This product is eligible for the P2HD
5 Year Warranty Repair Program. For
details, see page 163.
Operating Instructions
Memory Card Camera-Recorder
Model No.
AG-HPX300P
Before operating this product, please read the instructions carefully and save this manual for
future use.
ENGLISH
VQT2C25-3
D
S0109T3059 -P
Printed in Japan
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ꢁ indicatesꢁsafetyꢁinformation.
FCC NOTICE (USA)
Declaration of Conformity
Model Number:
Trade Name:
AG-HPX300P
Panasonic
Responsible Party:
Panasonic Corporation of North America One Panasonic Way, Secaucus, NJ
07094
Support contact:
Panasonic Broadcast & Television Systems Company 1-800-524-1448
This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
To assure continued compliance, follow the attached installation instructions and do not make any
unauthorized modifications.
CAUTION:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can
radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions,
may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful
interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off
and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is
connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
The user may find the booklet “Something About Interference”
available from FCC local regional offices helpful.
FCC Warning:
To assure continued FCC emission limit compliance, follow the attached installation instructions and
the user must use only shielded interface cables when connecting to host computer or peripheral
devices. Also, any unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment could void the user’s
authority to operate this device.
NOTIFICATION (Canada)
This class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
IMPORTANT
“Unauthorized recording of copyrighted television programs, video tapes and other materials may infringe the
right of copyright owners and be contrary to copyright laws.”
For USA-California Only
This product contains a CR Coin Cell Lithium Battery which contains Perchlorate Material – special handling
may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
A rechargeable battery that is recyclable powers the product you have perchased.
ꢂ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Precautions for Use
Caution regarding laser beams
TheꢁMOSꢁsensorꢁmayꢁbeꢁdamagedꢁifꢁitꢁisꢁexposedꢁtoꢁlaserꢁlight.
Whenꢁusingꢁtheꢁcamera-recorderꢁinꢁlocationsꢁwhereꢁlaserꢁirradiationꢁequipmentꢁisꢁused,ꢁbeꢁcarefulꢁnotꢁtoꢁallowꢁtheꢁlaserꢁ
beamꢁtoꢁshineꢁdirectlyꢁonꢁtheꢁlens.
PLEASE NOTE:
ꢁ ꢁWhenꢁpreparingꢁtoꢁrecordꢁimportantꢁevents,ꢁalwaysꢁshootꢁsomeꢁadvanceꢁtestꢁfootage,ꢁtoꢁverifyꢁthatꢁbothꢁpicturesꢁandꢁ
soundꢁareꢁbeingꢁrecordedꢁnormally.
ꢁ ꢁShouldꢁvideoꢁorꢁaudioꢁrecordingꢁfailꢁdueꢁtoꢁaꢁmalfunctionꢁofꢁthisꢁcamera-recorderꢁorꢁtheꢁPꢀꢁcardsꢁused,ꢁweꢁwillꢁnotꢁ
assumeꢁliabilityꢁforꢁsuchꢁfailure.
Disposing and transferring ownership of memory card devices
FormattingꢁorꢁdeletingꢁaꢁmemoryꢁcardꢁdeviceꢁinꢁthisꢁcameraꢁorꢁaꢁPCꢁwillꢁonlyꢁchangeꢁfileꢁmanagementꢁdataꢁandꢁleaveꢁ
dataꢁonꢁtheꢁcardꢁintact.ꢁItꢁisꢁrecommendedꢁthatꢁtheꢁcardꢁeitherꢁbeꢁphysicallyꢁdestroyedꢁorꢁthatꢁcommerciallyꢁsoldꢁsoftwareꢁ
beꢁusedꢁtoꢁcompletelyꢁdeleteꢁanyꢁdataꢁonꢁtheꢁcard.ꢁNoteꢁthatꢁmanagingꢁcardꢁdataꢁisꢁtheꢁowner’sꢁresponsibility.
Information on software for this product
1.ꢁ ꢁIncludedꢁwithꢁthisꢁproductꢁisꢁsoftwareꢁlicensedꢁunderꢁtheꢁGNUꢁGeneralꢁPublicꢁLicenseꢁ(GPL)ꢁandꢁGNUꢁLesserꢁ
GeneralꢁPublicꢁLicenseꢁ(LGPL),ꢁandꢁusersꢁareꢁherebyꢁinformedꢁthatꢁtheyꢁhaveꢁtheꢁrightꢁtoꢁobtain,ꢁchangeꢁandꢁ
redistributeꢁtheꢁsourceꢁcodesꢁofꢁthisꢁsoftware.
DetailsꢁonꢁGPLꢁandꢁLGPLꢁcanꢁbeꢁfoundꢁonꢁtheꢁinstallationꢁCDꢁprovidedꢁwithꢁtheꢁunit.ꢁReferꢁtoꢁtheꢁfolderꢁcalledꢁ
“LDOC”.ꢁ(Detailsꢁareꢁgivenꢁinꢁtheꢁoriginalꢁ(English-language)ꢁtext.)
Toꢁobtainꢁtheꢁsourceꢁcodes,ꢁgoꢁtoꢁtheꢁfollowingꢁhomeꢁpage:
https://eww.pavc.panasonic.co.jp/pro-av/
Theꢁmanufacturerꢁasksꢁusersꢁtoꢁrefrainꢁfromꢁdirectingꢁinquiriesꢁconcerningꢁtheꢁsourceꢁcodesꢁtheyꢁhaveꢁobtainedꢁandꢁ
otherꢁdetailsꢁtoꢁitsꢁrepresentatives.
ꢀ.ꢁ ꢁIncludedꢁwithꢁthisꢁproductꢁisꢁsoftwareꢁwhichꢁisꢁlicensedꢁunderꢁMIT-License.
DetailsꢁonꢁMIT-LicenseꢁcanꢁbeꢁfoundꢁonꢁtheꢁinstallationꢁCDꢁprovidedꢁwithꢁtheꢁunit.ꢁReferꢁtoꢁtheꢁfolderꢁcalledꢁ“LDOC”.
(Detailsꢁareꢁgivenꢁinꢁtheꢁoriginalꢁ(English-language)ꢁtext.)
This product is licensed under the AVC Patent Portfolio License for the personal and
non-commercial use of the following activities of a consumer but no license is granted
or implied for any other use.
ꢁ EncodeꢁvideoꢁinꢁcomplianceꢁwithꢁtheꢁAVCꢁstandardꢁ(“AVCꢁvideo”)
ꢁ DecodeꢁAVCꢁvideoꢁthatꢁwasꢁencodedꢁbyꢁaꢁconsumerꢁengagedꢁinꢁaꢁpersonalꢁandꢁnon-commercialꢁactivity.
ꢁ DecodeꢁAVCꢁvideoꢁthatꢁwasꢁobtainedꢁfromꢁaꢁvideoꢁproviderꢁlicensedꢁtoꢁprovideꢁAVCꢁvideo
Additional information may be obtained from MPEG LA, LLC (http://www.mpegla.com).
Trademarks
ꢁ ꢁTheꢁSDꢁandꢁSDHCꢁlogosꢁareꢁtrademarks.
ꢁ ꢁMultiꢁMediaꢁCardꢁ(MMC)ꢁisꢁaꢁregisteredꢁtrademarkꢁofꢁInfineonꢁTechnologiesꢁAG.
ꢁ ꢁApple,ꢁMacintosh,ꢁMacꢁOSꢁareꢁregisteredꢁtrademarksꢁorꢁtrademarksꢁofꢁApple,ꢁInc.ꢁinꢁtheꢁUnitedꢁStatesꢁand/orꢁotherꢁ
countries.
ꢁ UnislotꢁisꢁaꢁregisteredꢁtrademarkꢁofꢁIkegamiꢁTsushinkiꢁCo.,ꢁLtd.
ꢁ ꢁMicrosoftꢁandꢁWindowsꢁareꢁregisteredꢁtrademarksꢁorꢁtrademarksꢁofꢁMicrosoftꢁCorporationꢁinꢁtheꢁUnitedꢁStatesꢁand/orꢁ
otherꢁcountries.
ꢁ ꢁOtherꢁnamesꢁofꢁcompaniesꢁandꢁproductsꢁareꢁtrademarksꢁorꢁregisteredꢁtrademarksꢁofꢁtheꢁrespectiveꢁcompanies.
ꢃ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
Read this first! ................................................................................................................. 2
Precautions for Use ......................................................................................................... 4
Chapter 1 Overview
Camera Unit Features ..................................................................................................... 8
Recording and Playback Features ............................................................................... 10
Outline of operations ..................................................................................................... 12
Saving and editing on external devices ................................................................ 12
System Configuration .................................................................................................... 13
Standard accessories ................................................................................................... 14
Chapter 2 Parts and Their Functions
Power Supply and Accessory Mounting Section .................................................. 15
Audio (input) Function Section .............................................................................. 16
Audio (output) Function Section ........................................................................... 17
Shooting and Recording/Playback Functions Section .......................................... 18
Menu/Thumbnail Operation Section ..................................................................... 22
Time Code Section ................................................................................................ 23
Warning and Status Display Functions ................................................................. 24
LCD Monitor .......................................................................................................... 24
Viewfinder ............................................................................................................. 25
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback
Setting Date and Time of Internal Clock ....................................................................... 26
P2 Cards ....................................................................................................................... 28
Inserting P2 Cards ................................................................................................ 28
Removing P2 Cards .............................................................................................. 28
To Prevent Accidental Erasure of P2 Card Content .............................................. 29
P2 CARD ACCESS LED and status of P2 cards ................................................... 29
P2 card recording times ........................................................................................ 30
Handling P2 Card Recording ................................................................................ 31
Basic Procedures .......................................................................................................... 32
Shooting ................................................................................................................ 33
Normal Recording ................................................................................................. 33
Standard and Native Recording ................................................................................... 34
Standard recording (pull-down recording) ........................................................... 34
Native recording .................................................................................................... 34
Variable Frame Rate (VFR) Recording .......................................................................... 35
Native VFR Recording ........................................................................................... 35
Standard VFR recording(pulldown recording) ...................................................... 35
Using VFR Recording Function ............................................................................. 36
Special Recording Modes ............................................................................................ 38
Pre-recording (PRE REC) ...................................................................................... 38
Interval recording (INTERVAL REC) ...................................................................... 39
One-shot recording (ONE SHOT REC) ................................................................. 39
Loop recording (LOOP REC) ................................................................................ 40
PROXY Recording Function (Optional) ................................................................. 40
Hot Swap Recording ............................................................................................. 40
REC REVIEW Function .......................................................................................... 40
Shot Marker (SHOT MARK) Recording Function .................................................. 41
Text Memo Recording Function ............................................................................ 41
Normal and Variable Speed Playback .......................................................................... 42
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording
Selecting recording signals .................................................................................. 43
List of recording formats and functions ................................................................ 44
Recording settings and recording function table ................................................. 45
Selecting video output .......................................................................................... 45
List of recording, playback and output formats .................................................... 46
Adjusting the White Balance and Black Balance ......................................................... 48
Adjusting the White Balance ................................................................................. 48
Adjusting the Black Balance ................................................................................. 49
Setting the Electronic Shutter ........................................................................................ 51
Setting the Shutter Mode and Speed .................................................................... 51
Placing the Camera-recorder in SYNCHRO SCAN Mode .................................... 51
FBC (Flash Band Compensation) Function .................................................................. 52
ꢄ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting FBC function ............................................................................................. 52
Assigning functions to USER buttons ........................................................................... 53
Selecting Audio Input Signals and Adjusting Recording Levels .................................. 54
Selecting Audio Input Signals ............................................................................... 54
Adjusting Recording Levels .................................................................................. 54
Selecting Function for the FRONT AUDIO LEVEL Control .................................... 55
CH3 and CH4 Recording Levels .......................................................................... 55
Setting Time Data .......................................................................................................... 56
Recording time codes and user bits ..................................................................... 57
Setting user bits .................................................................................................... 58
Entering the User Bits ........................................................................................... 58
Setting the Time Code .......................................................................................... 60
Externally Locking the Time Code ........................................................................ 62
Outputting the time code externally ...................................................................... 63
GENLOCK and time code input/output connection and setup ............................ 64
Counter Setting and Display ................................................................................. 64
Viewfinder Screen Status Displays ............................................................................... 65
Viewfinder Status Indication Layout ...................................................................... 65
Selecting Viewfinder Display Information ............................................................. 65
Screen displays .................................................................................................... 66
Center Information Display ................................................................................... 69
Checking and displaying shooting status ............................................................. 71
MODE CHECK indication ...................................................................................... 72
Center marker display ........................................................................................... 73
Safety zone markers ............................................................................................. 73
Audio level meter magnification ............................................................................ 73
Zebra pattern display ............................................................................................ 74
Focus assist function ............................................................................................ 75
Adjusting and setting the LCD monitor ......................................................................... 76
Waveform monitor function ................................................................................... 77
Adjusting and Setting up the Viewfinder ....................................................................... 78
Adjusting Right and Left Viewfinder Position ........................................................ 78
Diopter Adjustment ............................................................................................... 78
Using the Viewfinder ............................................................................................. 78
Emphasizing Image Outlines ................................................................................ 79
Setting the viewfinder to monochrome mode ....................................................... 79
Handling setup data ..................................................................................................... 80
Configuration of setup data files ........................................................................... 80
Handling SD memory cards .................................................................................. 81
Formatting, Writing and Reading an SD memory card ......................................... 81
How to Use Scene File Data ................................................................................. 82
Saving scene files and other settings on SD memory cards ................................ 84
Chapter 5 Preparation
Power Supply ................................................................................................................ 86
Mounting the Battery and Setting the Battery Type .............................................. 86
Use of the external DC power supply ................................................................... 88
Mounting and Adjusting the Lens ................................................................................. 89
Mounting the Lens ................................................................................................ 89
Adjusting the Lens Flange Back ........................................................................... 90
White Shading Compensation .............................................................................. 91
Setting Chromatic Aberration Compensation (CAC) ........................................... 92
Preparing for Audio Input .............................................................................................. 95
When Using the Front Microphone ....................................................................... 95
Using a wireless receiver ...................................................................................... 95
When Using Audio Devices .................................................................................. 96
Attaching Accessories .................................................................................................. 97
Mounting the Camera on a Tripod ........................................................................ 97
Attaching the Shoulder Strap ................................................................................ 97
Attaching the Rain Cover ...................................................................................... 98
Attaching the FRONT AUDIO LEVEL Control Knob .............................................. 98
Attaching the Eye Cup .......................................................................................... 98
DC OUT Connector and External REC Start/Stop Switch Connection ......................... 99
Connecting the AJ-RC10G Remote Controller ........................................................... 100
Chapter 6 Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails
Thumbnail Operations ................................................................................................. 101
Thumbnail Manipulations Overview .................................................................... 101
ꢅ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Thumbnail Screen ............................................................................................... 102
Selecting Thumbnails .......................................................................................... 104
Playing back Clips .............................................................................................. 104
Switching the Thumbnail Display ........................................................................ 105
Changing thumbnails .......................................................................................... 106
Shot Mark ............................................................................................................ 106
Text Memo ........................................................................................................... 107
Deleting Clips ...................................................................................................... 108
Restoring Clips .................................................................................................... 109
Reconnection of Incomplete Clips ...................................................................... 109
Copying Clips ..................................................................................................... 109
Setting of Clip Meta Data .................................................................................... 110
Setting of Proxy (optional) ................................................................................... 114
Formatting a P2 Card .......................................................................................... 114
Formatting SD memory cards ............................................................................. 115
Setting the Thumbnail Display Mode .................................................................. 115
Properties ............................................................................................................ 116
Chapter 7 Menu Operations
Viewfinder and LCD Menus ........................................................................................ 120
Using the menus ................................................................................................. 120
Initializing the menu settings ............................................................................... 121
Setup menu structure .................................................................................................. 122
Setup menu list ........................................................................................................... 124
SCENE FILE screen ............................................................................................ 124
SYSTEM SETUP screen ...................................................................................... 126
SW MODE screen ............................................................................................... 128
RECORDING SETUP screen ............................................................................... 129
AUDIO SETUP screen ......................................................................................... 130
OUTPUT SEL screen ........................................................................................... 132
DISPLAY SETUP screen ...................................................................................... 132
BATTERY SETUP screen ..................................................................................... 134
CARD FUNCTIONS screen ................................................................................. 136
LENS SETUP screen ........................................................................................... 136
OTHER FUNCTIONS screen ............................................................................... 137
DIAGNOSTIC screen .......................................................................................... 138
OPTION MENU screen ....................................................................................... 138
Chapter 8 Connecting to External Devices
Functionality Provided by Connections to USB 2.0 Connector .................................. 139
Connecting to a computer in USB device mode ................................................ 139
USB host mode .................................................................................................. 140
Connections to the DVCPRO/DV Connector ............................................................... 145
Recording signals input to the DVCPRO/DV connector ..................................... 145
Control of external devices through 1394 connection ........................................ 146
Chapter 9 Maintenance and Inspections
Inspections Before Shooting ....................................................................................... 147
Preparing for Inspections .................................................................................... 147
Inspecting the Camera Unit ................................................................................ 147
Inspecting the Memory Recording Functions ..................................................... 148
Maintenance ............................................................................................................... 150
Eyepiece Care .................................................................................................... 150
Cleaning Inside the Viewfinder ........................................................................... 150
Charging the internal battery .............................................................................. 150
Warning System .......................................................................................................... 151
Warning Description Tables ................................................................................ 151
Warning and Error Display for Thumbnail Operation and USB HOST MODE .... 153
Updating the firmware incorporated into the unit ....................................................... 155
Chapter 10 Index
Chapter 11 Specifications
Dimensions and specifications ................................................................................... 160
Dimensions ......................................................................................................... 160
Specifications ...................................................................................................... 160
Connector signal description ...................................................................................... 164
ꢆ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Overview
The AG-HPX300P P2 memory card camera-recorder features a camera unit equipped with a 1/3 inch 2.2 megapixel 3MOS
sensor and a recording and playback unit that provides AVC-Intra 100 compression recording as standard to offer HD full
pixel and full sampling for superb image quality and high-quality video.
It handles multiple HD and SD formats: AVC-Intra, DVCPRO HD, DVCPRO50, DVCPRO and DV compression recording.
The P2 card provides a reliability, speed and IT functionality that no other media can match and is destined to revolutionize
recording and editing paradigms.
Multiple HD/SD formats
The camera supports both the HD and SD video formats making it ready for news gathering, program production
and film making in a wide range of professional applications and content production. In 1080i/720P HD recording for
broadcasting, the camera uses the highly reliable AVC-Intra or DVCPRO HD codec while also supporting SD multi-
codec (DVCPRO50, DVCPRO or DV) recording capability.
The AG-HPX300P provides high quality and uncompressed, 16-bit, 48 kHz, 4-channel recording of audio in all formats.
Variable frame rate makes speed effects possible (in the 720P format)
The AG-HPX300P comes with the variable frame rate feature developed for the VariCam HD Cinema camera. In 720P
mode*1, the frame rate can be set to any of 20 steps between 12P and 60P. This puts features such as undercranking
(dropping frames) and overcranking (high frame rate) for quick motion and slow motion cine-like effects at the disposal
of the camera crew.
Native mode/over 60P mode selectable
ꢁ ꢁNativeꢁmode:
Playing back a recording made at a frame rate set in the camera at the normal rate provides speed effects without
using a frame rate converter. Native mode also extends the recording time of a P2 card.
ꢁ ꢁꢆꢀ0Pꢁoverꢁꢅ0Pꢁmode:
Use of a DVCPRO HD recorder such as the AJ-HD1400 or the FOCUS FS-100 hard disk recorder enables the AG-
HPX300P to make backup recordings with a DVCPRO HD stream from the DVCPRO/DV connector. *2
1080/480 24P advanced mode
Recording 1080/24P or 480/24P makes it possible to select 24PA (advanced) mode*3. Using 2:3:3:2 pulldown, the 24PA
mode performs 60i conversion to enable nonlinear editing*4 maintaining an image quality that is better than normal 24P
(2:3 pulldown). Recording at 30P applies a 2:2 pulldown.
Camera Unit Features
Progressive 3MOS sensor
The AG-HPX300P is equipped with a 1/3 inch 2.2 megapixel 3MOS sensor that enables HD full pixel recording for high-
resolution video.
14-bit digital circuit
The high-performance DSP (Digital Signal Processor) in the camera offers 14-bit signal input and 20-bit internal
processing. It handles gamma settings and other adjustments for each R/G/B color in 1080/60i video as well as
conversion to all HD/SD formats (P/I conversion, line conversion and down conversion). Because of this high-quality
images can be produced in all video formats.
Seven gamma curves including cine-like gamma
To expand camera capabilities, the AG-HPX300P offers seven gamma curves including cine-like gamma to easily
produce recordings with the characteristic warm tone of film.
*1 1080 and 480 recording is performed at a fixed frame rate of 24P/30P.
*2 The AVC-Intra mode does not allow the output of a DVCPRO HD stream from the DVCPRO/DV connector.
*3 Not available with the AVC-Intra codec.
*4 For details on compatible systems, visit the Web site listed below.
https://eww.pavc.panasonic.co.jp/pro-av/
24P and 30P indicate recording at 23.98P and 29.97P, respectively, while 60P and 60i indicate recording at 59.94P and
59.94i, respectively.
ꢇ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Slow, synchro and high speed shutter
The shutter speed can be set from a slow speed of 1/6 s up to a maximum speed of 1/7200 s*1. Combined with the
variable frame rate functions, this allows you to create blurring or stop motion effects. The AG-HPX300P also features a
synchro scan function that is ideal for capturing screen shots from a computer monitor.
Scene file dial
This dial allows you to instantly retrieve settings that suit shooting conditions. Six preset files are provided, and you can
change the file names and their settings as desired. You can also save up to four files to an SD or SDHC memory card
(both referred to as “SD memory card” below) and load files from an SD memory card.
Shooting assist functions
ꢁ ꢁUSERꢁbuttons:
Three USER buttons each of which can be assigned a frequently used function for immediate access.
ꢁ ꢁFocusꢁassist:
Magnifies the center portion of the image and displays a focus bar to facilitate focusing.
ꢁ ꢁEightꢁfilesꢁforꢁcompensatingꢁlensꢁchromaticꢁaberrationꢁandꢁfourꢁfilesꢁforꢁcorrectingꢁshadingꢁforꢁinterchangeableꢁlensesꢁ
areꢁprovided.
ꢁ ꢁVariableꢁcolorꢁtemperature:
Allows fine adjustment after setting the white balance.
ꢁ ꢁRECꢁREVIEW:
Provides a quick check of the last few seconds of the most recently recorded clip.
ꢁ ꢁꢃ-positionꢁopticalꢁNDꢁfilterꢁprovided.
Chromatic aberration compensation (CAC)
This function automatically corrects the registration error caused by the slight chromatic aberration that the lens cannot
compensate for, in order to minimize color bleeding into surrounding image areas.
Remote control support
The camera supports the AJ-RC10G (optional accessory) remote control unit. The remote control allows you to adjust
camera image and recording controls at a distance while viewing what you are shooting.
Auto Tracking White Balance (ATW)
Automatically adjusts the white balance of the subject in real-time, a convenient function for quick adjustment in
recording situations where there is no time for normal white balance adjustment.
DRS (Dynamic Range Stretcher) function
This function compresses the video signal level while maintaining contrast to extend the dynamic range making it
possible to correctly render highlight areas without overexposure and loss of detail that would otherwise occur. *2
*1 This is the shutter speed value when 3.0d is configured for the synchro scan mode.
*2 The DRS function is not available in 1080/30P, 1080/24P modes.
ꢈ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording and Playback Features
A variety of interfaces
ꢁ ꢁUSBꢁꢀ.0ꢁconnectorꢁ(HOST/DEVICE)
A USB 2.0 connection to a computer or other device allows you to use P2 cards in the camera as mass storage.
The USB host function makes it possible to save P2 card data to an external hard disk connected via USB 2.0 and
clips stored on the hard disk can be viewed and written back to a P2 card.
ꢁ ꢁDVCPRO/DVꢁinputꢁandꢁoutputꢁprovidedꢁasꢁstandardꢁfeature
IEEE1394 compliant external devices can be connected to enable output and input via the digital interface.
Connect a 6-pin plug to this connector. Note that the connector does not support bus power.
Input and output via IEEE1394 is not available when the AVC-Intra codec is selected.
P2 cards for high capacity, high speed and high reliability
In addition to exceptional resistance to shock, vibration and temperature fluctuations, the P2 (Professional Plug-in) card
has a reliability that guarantees long-term repeated recording/initialization that a tape or hard disk system with their
moving parts could never match.
The connectors are professional grade to withstand long-term continual insertion and removal.
The P2 card stores the AV data for each shooting session as a single file that is immediately accessible for nonlinear
editing or transfer over a network without digitizing. Transfer speeds far surpassing those of optical disks also help to
speed up production processes. The P2 card complies with PC card standards and can be directly plugged into the PC
card slot on a computer. *1
The two P2 card slots allow continuous recording on two P2 cards and also offer the following recording capabilities in a
memory card camera-recorder.
ꢁ ꢁCardꢁselection:
In standby status, you can instantly select (switch to) the slot of the card you wish to record on*2 Recorded content
can be quickly passed on to editing or transferred to minimize interruptions in recording making it far more efficient
than systems where tapes or disks have to be exchanged.
ꢁ ꢁHot-swapꢁrecording:
Cards can be replaced during recording. A full memory card can be replaced while recording is made on another
card. Successively swapping cards in this way gives you virtually unlimited recording capacity.
ꢁ ꢁLoopꢁrecording:
Setting the camera for consecutive overwriting, you can repeatedly rerecord on the inserted P2 cards, always
maintaining a recording of the most recent, specific period of time.
Immediate startup and reliable data protection
When you press the REC button in standby mode, the camera instantly finds a blank area on the P2 card and begins
recording. Unlike a VTR system, there is no need to locate a blank section before recording. It can begin recording
immediately even when you are using it to preview video. In normal use, there is no chance of accidentally deleting a
recording. Recordings will not be erased unless you intentionally delete a file or initialize the card.
*1 This requires the installation of a P2 card driver (provided with each device). The P2 card driver runs under Windows®
Vista, Windows® XP or Windows® 2000.
*2 This assumes that the SLOT SEL function is assigned to a USER button (USER MAIN, USER1 or USER2).
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Other features
ꢁ ꢁPre-rec:
This function provides a way to capture moments you otherwise would have missed. In the standby mode, the
camera will store video and audio for up to 3 seconds in HD and 7 seconds in SD. When you press the REC button,
the three or seven seconds of immediately prior video data stored in internal memory is added at the beginning of
the clip you record.
ꢁ ꢁOne-shotꢁREC:
Convenient for producing animation, this mode records for a set time (from 1 frame to 1 second) each time you
press the REC button.
ꢁ ꢁIntervalꢁREC:
Recording one frame at a time at set intervals (from 2 frames to 10 minutes), this mode is useful for monitoring,
supervision and special ultra undercranking effects.
ꢁ ꢁProxyꢁrecordingꢁ(withꢁAJ-YAXꢇ00Gꢁinstalled)
Installing an optional video encoder card (AJ-YAX800G) in P2 slot number 2 makes it possible to record MPEG4
format video, time code data and other real-time data to P2 cards or SD memory cards simultaneous with camera
recording of video and audio. This is a convenient feature for checking clip content and speeding up editing work
flow.
Clip thumbnail preview
The camera records each cut as a clip (file) and automatically attaches a thumbnail image and file information to it. To
preview a clip on the LCD monitor or to check clip data, simply choose the clip you want from the list of thumbnails.
These thumbnails and the file data can be viewed on a PC (P2 Viewer*1) or processed in a nonlinear editing program.
Shot marker and text memo
If desired, you can add a simple OK/reject shot marker to each clip either during or after recording. When a P2 card is
mounted in a PC (P2 Viewer), the PC will display only marked clips.
A text memo function is also provided. Pressing the USER button to which the text memo function has been assigned
anywhere in a clip during recording or in preview mode allows you to attach empty post-it like text memos (up to 100)
that can later be filled with text on a PC (P2 Viewer).
Using the camera copy function, you can create a new clip by stripping out the desired frames from a clip by copying
data between text memo labels.
SD memory card slot
The camera provides an SD memory card slot for saving and loading scene files and user settings. A metadata upload
file (created using P2 Viewer) containing the name of the person who shot the video, the name of the reporter, the
shooting location or a text memo and other information can be saved to an SD memory card. This data file can be
loaded as clip metadata.
HD/SD SDI output and downconverter supported
Video line outputs (3 BNC connectors) are provided as standard. These outputs can flexibly handle both monitor and
line recording. A down-converter is also built-in. Aspect mode can also be selected.
ꢁ ꢁSDIꢁOUTꢁ(HD/SD)ꢁ1ꢁsystem,ꢁꢀꢁoutputs:
The HD-SDI outputs allow you to make backups on an external VTR (with HD-SDI input) in synch with REC button
operation. SD-SDI can also down convert and output HD content.
ꢁ ꢁVIDEOꢁOUT:
Outputs down converted SD video (composite video).
Fine adjustment of sound recording level
The camera features a front-mounted control for fine adjustment of the sound recording level. This control is particularly
useful for adjusting the sound level when you have to control both video and audio recording. The control can be
disabled.
Unislot wireless receiver compatible
The AG-HPX300P is designed to work with optional slot wireless receivers. (page 95)
The camera supports 2-channel wireless receivers.
*1 “P2 Viewer” is a Windows® PC viewing software that can be downloaded free of charge by P2 card users.
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Outline of operations
The AG-HPX300P records video on P2 cards. Excelling at high transfer speeds, the P2 card enables high vision recording
and smooth editing and dubbing.
Saving and editing on external devices
Using USB DEVICE mode to connect an external
device via the USB 2.0 connector (Page 139)
The data (file) is transferred for nonlinear editing on your computer
or other unit.
P2 card
Computer
USB2.0 (DEVICE)
Using USB HOST mode to connect an external
device via the USB 2.0 connector (Page 140)
The unit directly controls the external hard disk drive, and transfers
the data (file) to it.
External hard disk
USB2.0 (HOST)
Connecting an external device via the
DVCPRO/DV connector (Page 145)
DVCPRO/DV
(Windows/Macintosh)
Computer/Memory card recorder
Video equipment/Monitor
BNC cable
(composite/SDI)
The contents can be transferred as a
data stream (digital dubbing).
1ꢀ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Configuration
Rain cover
Soft carrying case
SHAN-RC700
AJ-SC900
Hard carrying case
Remote control unit*5
AJ-HT901G
AJ-RC10G
Shotgun microphone
(Phantom +48 V)
Remote control cable
AJ-C10050G
AG-MC200G
AJ-MC700P
Battery
*1
PROPAC14, TRIMPAC14
HYTRON50/140
DIONIC90/160
Lens*2
(Bayonet type)
FUJINON, CANON
V-mount
type
battery
plate
ENDURA E-7/7S
ENDURA E-10/10S
AG-HPX300P
Tripod adapter
SHAN-TM700
NP-L7
Holder
plate*6
Video encoder card
AJ-YAX800G*4
NP battery holder
SD Memory cards*3
External power supply
P2 Cards*3
LCD monitor
BT-LH80W, BT-LH900 etc.
USB2.0 compatible devices
DVCPRO/DV standard device
complying with
Unislot wireless
microphone receiver
the IEEE1394 standard
*1 The camera is equipped with a battery holder as standard.
*2 The camera comes with a Fujinon lens.
*3 For the latest information on P2 cards and SD memory cards not available in the operating Instructions, visit the P2
Support Desk at the following Web sites.
https://eww.pavc.panasonic.co.jp/pro-av/
*4 For details, refer to the AJ-YAX800G User’s Guide on the supplied CD-ROM.
*5 For details, refer to the AJ-RC10G User’s Guide on the supplied CD-ROM.
*6 Attach the NP battery holder to the holder plate before fixing it to the V-mount type battery plate.
1ꢂ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Standard accessories
Lens*1
Front lens cap*1 *2
Rear lens cap*1 *2
Zoom lever*1 *2
For details, refer to
[Mounting the Lens]
(page 89).
Connector cap*1 *2
Lens hood*1
Lens hood cap*1 *3
Eye cup
For details, refer to
[Attaching the Eye Cup]
(page 98)
Shoulder belt
FRONT AUDIO LEVEL knob Mount cap*4
(screw included)
XLR connector cap*4
For details, refer to
[Attaching the FRONT
AUDIO LEVEL Control
Knob] (page 98).
For details, refer to
[Attaching the Shoulder
Strap] (page 97).
BNC cap*4
CD-ROM
*1 Manufactured by Fujinon Co., Ltd.
*2 This component is part of the lens.
*3 This component is part of the lens hood.
*4 This component is part of the camera.
NOTE
• Be sure to appropriately dispose of the packing material when you have unpacked the product.
• Consult your supplier regarding purchases of accessories.
1ꢃ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Parts and Their Functions
Power Supply and Accessory Mounting Section
17 6 13 2
16
6 5 14
8
1
4
3 15
10 12 11
7
9
1
2
POWER switch
Use to turn the power on and off.
9
Mount cap
To remove the cap, raise the lens lever. Replace the
cap when a lens is not mounted.
Battery holder
A battery from Anton/Bauer is mounted here.
For details, refer to [Mounting the Battery and Setting
the Battery Type] (page 86).
10 Lens cable/microphone cable clamp
This clamp secures the lens and microphone cables.
For details, refer to [Mounting the Lens] (page 89).
3
4
DC IN (external power input) socket (XLR, 4P)
Connect this camera to an external DC power supply.
For details, refer to [Use of the external DC power
supply] (page 88).
11 Tripod mount
To mount the camera on a tripod, attach the optional
tripod adapter (SHAN-TM700) here.
For details, refer to [Mounting the Camera on a Tripod]
(page 97).
BREAKER switch
This switch is located on the camera base.
When an excessive amount of current is fed through
the video camera recorder, due to a malfunction, the
breaker automatically turns off the power to protect the
device. Press this button after conducting an internal
inspection or repair. The camera will power up if it is
working normally.
12 Lens jack (12-pin)
The lens connection cord is connected here. For
a detailed description of your lens, refer to the
manufacturer’s instruction manual.
13 Battery release lever
Pull down the release lever to release the battery.
14 Viewfinder left-right positioning ring
For details, see [Adjusting Right and Left Viewfinder
Position] (page 78).
5
6
Light shoe
A video light or similar accessory can be attached here.
(Size of holes for securing screws)
• 1/4-20UNC (6 mm or shorter screws)
15 Light control switch
For details, refer to [Power Supply] (page 86).
Shoulder strap fittings
16 Cable holder
The shoulder strap is attached here.
For details, refer to [Attaching the Shoulder Strap]
(page 97).
Used to secure the light and microphone cables.
17 Accessory mounting hole
Accessories can be attached here. Do not use this hole
for purposes other than attaching accessories.
(Size of holes for securing screws)
• 1/4-20UNC (10 mm or shorter screws)
• 3/8-16UNC (10 mm or shorter screws)
7
8
Lens mount (1/3-bayonet mount)
The lens is attached here.
For details, refer to [Mounting the Lens] (page 89).
Lens lever
Tighten this lever to lock the lens to the lens mount.
For details, refer to [Mounting the Lens] (page 89).
1ꢄ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Audio (input) Function Section
7
2
8
6
4
1
3
5
1
MIC IN (microphone input) jack (XLR, 3-pin)
• Connect a microphone (optional accessory) to this
jack.
• A phantom-powered microphone may be connected.
To use a phantom-powered microphone, set the menu
option F.MIC POWER to ON in the AUDIO SETUP
screen.
NOTE
To record 2-channel wireless input, switch both CH1 and
CH2 to W.L. position and set the menu option WIRELESS
TYPE in the AUDIO SETUP screen to DUAL.
5
6
AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 (audio channel 1/2) connectors
(XLR, 3-pin)
Audio devices or microphones may be connected here.
For details, refer to [When Using Audio Devices]
(page 96).
For details, refer to [Preparing for Audio Input]
(page 95).
LINE/MIC/+48V (line input/mic input/mic input +48V)
selector switch
Use to select audio signals input to the AUDIO IN CH1/
CH2 connectors.
2
3
4
AUDIO LEVEL CH1/CH2 (audio channel 1/2
recording level adjustment) controls
• With the AUDIO SELECT CH1/CH2 switch positioned
to MAN, these controls can be used to adjust the
recording levels for audio channels 1 and 2.
• Note that the controls are designed to be locked. For
adjustment, each control must be depressed while
turning.
LINE:
Line input for audio signals input from an
audio device
MIC:
Audio signal input from microphone with
internal power supply (the camera does not
supply power to a phantom microphone).
Audio signal input from a microphone that
requires an external power supply (The
camera supplies power to a phantom
microphone).
+ 48V:
AUDIO SELECT CH1/CH2 (audio channel 1/2
automatic/manual level adjustment selector) switch
Use this switch to select recording level control mode
for Audio Channels 1 and 2.
NOTE
AUTO:
MAN:
Recording level automatically controlled.
Recording level manually controlled.
Power is supplied when the menu option
R.MICPOWER in the AUDIO SETUP screen is
set to ON.
For details, refer to [Adjusting Recording Levels]
(page 54)
7
FRONT AUDIO LEVEL (audio recording level
adjustment) control
• This control adjusts the recording level of audio
channels 1 and 2.
AUDIO IN (audio input selector) switch
Use this switch to select signals recorded through
audio channels 1 – 4.
• With the AUDIO SELECT CH1/CH2 switch positioned
to MAN, this control can be used to adjust the
recording levels for audio channels 1 and 2.
• Use the menu options FRONT VR CH1 and FRONT
VR CH2 in the AUDIO SETUP screen to select the
input connector this control will be used for.
FRONT: Records signals from a microphone
connected to the MIC IN jack.
W.L.(WIRELESS):
Records signals from a wireless receiver.
REAR:
Records signals from audio devices or
microphones connected to the AUDIO IN
CH1/CH2 connectors.
8
Wireless slot
A Unislot wireless receiver (optional accessory) may be
attached here.
1ꢅ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Audio (output) Function Section
3 4
1
2 5 6
7
1
MONITOR SELECT (audio channel) CH1/2, CH3/4
selector switch
4
Speaker
The speaker outputs EE sound during recording and
reproduced sound during playback. The speaker emits
an alarm sound when the warning lamp and indicator
light or blink. EE sound and reproduced sound are not
output during alarm sound output.
When earphones are connected to the PHONES
connector, the sound from the speaker is automatically
muted.
Use this switch to select the audio channel whose
signals are output to the speaker, earphones or AUDIO
OUT connectors.
CH1/2:
CH3/4:
Signal output of audio channels 1 and 2.
Signal output of audio channels 3 and 4.
The channel indications of the audio level meters in the
viewfinder and on the LCD monitor show the channels
selected with this switch.
5
6
PHONES (earphones) jack (mini jack)
This connector is designed for audio monitoring (stereo)
earphones.
2
MONITOR SELECT (audio selection) CH1/3, ST,
CH2/4 selector switch
This switch and the MONITOR SELECT CH1/2, CH3/4
switch select the audio signal output to the speaker,
earphones and AUDIO OUT connectors.
DC OUT (DC power supply) output socket.
This is a 12 V DC output socket that provides a
maximum current of 1.5 A.
MONITOR SELECT switch (right)
MONITOR SELECT
switch (left)
CH1/2
CH3/4
NOTE
CH1/3 Audio Channel 1
Stereo signals
Audio Channel 3
Stereo signals
from Audio
Be sure to check polarity before connecting an external
device as incorrect connection could lead to damage.
MONITOR
SELECT
ST
from Audio
7
AUDIO OUT connector
• This connector outputs audio signals recorded on
audio channels 1/2 and 3/4.
Channels 1 and 2*1 Channels 3 and 4*1
CH2/4 Audio Channel 2
Audio Channel 4
*1 MIX in the menu option MONITOR SELECT in the
AUDIO SETUP screen allows you to change stereo
signals to a mixed signal.
• Use the MONITOR SELECT CH1/2, CH3/4 selector
switch to select output signals.
3
MONITOR (volume) control
Use to control the alarm sound volume and volume of
sound output from the monitor speaker and earphones.
1ꢆ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Shooting and Recording/Playback Functions Section
1
9 8
11 3
4 10 5 6 7 2
4
AUTO W/B (white/black) BAL switch
Shooting and Recording (camera unit)
AWB:
Automatically adjusts the white balance. Set
the WHITE BAL switch on the side to [A] or
[B] and use this switch to adjust the white
balance, which takes a few seconds. The
adjusted value is stored in memory.
1
ND FILTER (filter switching) control
Use this control to adjust the amount of light entering
the MOS sensor during shooting in strong outdoor
lighting.
Control
position
When the WHITE BAL switch is set to PRST
and the AUTO W/B BAL switch is set to AWB
to indicate the color temperature, pushing
the AUTO W/B BAL switch towards AWB a
second time allows you to change the preset
color temperature.
Setting
CLEAR
1/4ND
Description
1
Does not use the ND filter.
Reduces the amount of light
entering the MOS sensor to 1/4.
Reduces the amount of light
entering the MOS sensor to 1/16.
Reduces the amount of light
entering the MOS sensor to 1/64.
2
3
4
1/16ND
1/64ND
ABB:
Automatically adjusts the black balance.
For details, refer to [Adjusting the White Balance and
Black Balance] (page 48).
2
3
USER MAIN, USER1 and USER2 buttons
These buttons can be assigned user-selected functions
in a setting menu. Each button, when pressed,
performs the assigned function.
For details, refer to [Assigning functions to USER
buttons] (page 53).
5
GAIN selector switch
• This switch adjusts video amplifier gain to suit
ambient lighting conditions at the time of shooting.
• Use the menu options LOW GAIN, MID GAIN and
HIGH GAIN in the SW MODE screen to set the L/M/H
position gain values.
• The factory settings for L, M and H positions are 0 dB,
6 dB and 12 dB, respectively.
SHUTTER switch
Use to turn the electronic shutter on and off.
OFF:
ON:
The electronic shutter is off.
The electronic shutter is on.
SEL:
Changes the speed of the electronic shutter.
This dial switch returns to its original position when
released. Each push in the SEL direction changes the
shutter speed.
For details, refer to [Setting the Electronic Shutter]
(page 51).
1ꢇ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6
OUTPUT/AUTO KNEE selector switch
This switch selects the video signals sent from
the camera unit to the memory card recorder unit,
viewfinder and video monitor.
8
9
DISP/MODE CHK button
• Press this button to turn off the viewfinder and LCD
display. (The time code indication stays on.)
• A second press of the button turns the display back
on and holding it down displays shooting conditions
and functions assigned to USER switches.
• It also serves to turn off the alarm sound.
CAM. AUTO KNEE ON:
Video being recorded through the camera is
output with the Auto knee circuit activated. A
DRS (Dynamic Range Stretcher) function can
be used instead of the AUTO KNEE function.
For details, refer to [DRS (Dynamic Range
Stretcher) function] (page 9).
SYNCHRO SCAN switch
This function adjusts the synchro scan speed when
the SHUTTER switch is set to ON and synchro scan is
selected.
Pressing the – switch sets a slower shutter speed and
pressing the + switch sets a faster one.
For example, to record a computer screen, make
adjustments to minimize horizontal bar noise in the
viewfinder.
In VFR (Variable Frame Rate) mode, press the JOG dial
button and this switch to change the frame rate.
For details, refer to [2. JOG dial button] in [Menu/
Thumbnail Operation Section] (Page 22).
CAM. AUTO KNEE OFF:
Video being recorded through the camera is
output with the Auto knee circuit turned off.
The KNEE point is locked to the level set in
the menu.
BARS:
Color bar signals are output with the AUTO
KNEE circuit turned off.
NOTE
AUTO KNEE function
10 ZEBRA (zebra pattern) switch
Usually, when you shoot people or scenery against a
strongly lit background and adjust the level to the subject,
the background will be totally whited-out, with buildings
and other objects blurred. Use of the AUTO KNEE function
in situations like these will reproduce the background
clearly.
Use this switch to display a zebra pattern in the
viewfinder and on the LCD monitor.
For details, refer to [Zebra pattern display] (page 74).
11 Focal plane index (
)
This symbol indicates the focal plane of the MOS
sensor.
It provides a reference for making accurate focal
distance measurements from the subject.
The AUTO KNEE function is effective when:
• The subject is a person positioned in the shade under a
clear sky.
• The subject is a person in a vehicle or building and you
also want to capture the background visible through a
window.
• The subject is a high-contrast scene.
7
WHITE BAL (white balance memory selector) switch
Use to select method of white balance adjustment.
PRST:
Use PRST when you have no time to adjust
the white balance.
• The factory default setting is 3200 K.
• Use a setting menu or push the AUTO
W/B BAL switch towards AWB to display
the color temperature. While the color
temperature is still indicated, push the
AUTO W/B BAL switch once again towards
AWB to switch between 3200 K and
5600 K.
A • B:
Pushing the AUTO W/B BAL towards AWB
will automatically adjust the white balance
and save the adjusted value in memory A or
memory B.
For details, refer to [Adjusting the White
Balance] (page 48).
The setting menu also allows you to assign Auto
Tracking White balance (ATW) to B. For details, refer to
(page 49).
1ꢈ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
19
18
31 12
20 25 24
28 23 21
30 29
32
14 16 15 17
27 22 26
13
15 yFF (fast forward) button
Shooting and Recording/Playback
In stop mode, press this button for fast playback.
During playback, press this button for fast playback at
about 4x normal speed.
If this button is pressed when playback is paused, the
beginning of the next clip is located in pause mode
(cue-up mode).
Function Section (Recorder Unit)
12 REC button
Press this button to start recording and press once
again to stop it.
This button operates in the same way as the VTR button
on the lens.
16 gSTOP button
13 SDI OUT CHARACTER switch
Use this switch to control the superimposition of
character data onto SDI OUT to indicate status or
setting menus.
Press this button to stop playback.
Press this button to stop interval recording and one-shot
recording.
17 PLAY/PAUSE button
ON:
Superimposes characters.
Press this button to view playback in the viewfinder or
on a color video monitor.
OFF:
Does not superimpose characters.
Press it during playback to pause playback.
NOTE
18 USB 2.0 connector (DEVICE)
In addition to SDI OUT, a setting menu allows you to
superimpose characters on VIDEO OUT video.
19 USB 2.0 connector (HOST)
14 tREW (rewind) button
Connect a USB 2.0 cable to this connector.
To enable transfer of data via USB 2.0, set the menu
option PC MODE in the SYSTEM SETUP screen to ON.
This setting restricts recording, playback and clip
operations with the camera. For details, refer to
page 140.
In stop mode, press this button for fast-reverse
playback.
During playback, press this button for fast-reverse
playback at about 4x normal speed.
If this button is pressed when playback is paused, the
beginning of the clip being played is located in pause
mode (cue-up mode).
ꢀ0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• For the latest information not available in the Operating
Instructions, visit the P2 Support Sites at the following
Web site.
20 P2 CARD ACCESS LED
This LED indicates the recording and playback status of
each card.
For details, refer to [P2 CARD ACCESS LED and status
of P2 cards]. (Page 29)
https://eww.pavc.panasonic.co.jp/pro-av
About SD and SDHC memory cards
21 GENLOCK IN connector
• The SDHC card is a new standard, established by the
SD Card Association in 2006, for memory cards with
capacities of 2 GB or more.
• The SD logo is a registered trademark.
• MMC (MultiMediaCard) is a registered trademark of
Infineon Technologies AG.
This connector inputs a reference signal when the
camera unit is gen-locked, or when the time code is
externally locked.
NOTE
• Supply an HDY signal (1080/59.94i, 720/59.94P) or
a composite signal (480/59.94i) as input reference
signal.The subcarrier of VIDEO OUT connector output
(composite signal) cannot be externally locked. In SD
mode, the signal will not lock to the HD signal.
25 BUSY (operation mode display) lamp
This lamp indicates the active status of the SD memory
card. It stays illuminated when the card is active.
NOTE
22 REMOTE connector
Do not remove the card while the lamp is on.
The SD memory card could be damaged.
Some functions can be remote controlled when the
remote control unit AJ-RC10G (optional accessory) is
connected to the camera.
For details, refer to [Connecting the AJ-RC10G Remote
Controller] (page 100).
26 DVCPRO/DV connector
An IEEE1394 standard connector for input and output of
video, audio and data.
For details, refer to [Connections to the DVCPRO/DV
Connector] (page 145).
23 VIDEO OUT connector
This connector outputs video signals.
• In HD mode, down-converted composite video
signals are output.
27 SDI OUT 1 connector
28 SDI OUT 2 connector
• Use the menu option DOWNCON MODE in the
OUTPUT SEL screen to set signal output. (The factory
setting is LETTER BOX.)
• This connector outputs SDI signals.
• Use the menu option SDI SELECT in the OUTPUT SEL
screen to select AUTO, 1080i or 480i. This connector
does not support up-conversion.
24 SD memory card slot
It outputs the same signals as SDI OUT 1 connector.
Insert an SD memory card (optional accessory) in this
slot. It is used for recording and loading camera setting
menus or lens files, uploading meta data and recording
proxies (optional).
29 SCENE FILE dial
This dial allows you to select and load shooting
conditions from the scene files prerecorded to each of
the six positions.
NOTE
SD memory card precautions
NOTE
• Use only SD memory cards that conform to the SD
standard or the SDHC standard in this camera.
• MultiMediaCards (MMC) cannot be used. (Use of such
cards may prevent recording.)
During recording, selecting a position with a different
frame rate will not change the frame rate until the camera
is set to recording standby mode.
For details, refer to [How to use Scene File Data] (page 82).
• Be sure to use mini SD card adapters when using mini
SD cards with this camera. (Note that this camera will
not operate normally when a mini SD adapter is installed
without inserting a card. Be sure to insert a card when an
adapter is installed.)
30 FOCUS ASSIST button
Turns magnification of the center portion of the image
on and off.
For details, refer to [Focus assist function] (page 75).
• Use of Panasonic SD memory cards and mini SD cards
is recommended. Be sure to format such cards in this
camera.
• This unit supports the following SD and SDHC memory
card capacities.
31 REC switch
Switches functions of the REC button on the handle.
ON:
OFF:
Enables the REC button.
Disables the REC button.
8MB/16MB/32MB/64MB/
128MB/256MB/512MB/1GB/
2GB
4GB/6GB/8GB/12GB/16GB/
32GB
32 USB lamp
SD memory cards
This lamp lights when the camera is in USB mode (PC
mode).
SDHC memory
cards
For proxy (optional) recording, use 256 MB, 512 MB, 1 GB,
2 GB SD memory cards labeled “High Speed” or SDHC
memory cards.
ꢀ1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Menu/Thumbnail Operation Section
3
7
6 5 4
2
1
1
2
MENU button
5
6
CURSOR and SET buttons
Use these buttons to manipulate setting menus, the
menu bar and thumbnails.
The four triangular buttons are cursor buttons and the
square center button is the SET button.
• Hold down the button to open a setting menu screen.
A second press of the button returns the previous
image.
• This function is not available in the thumbnail display
and during recording.
EXIT/CANCEL button
JOG dial button
Press this button to exit an open thumbnail menu or
property window to return to the previous image.
Pressing this button while holding down the SHIFT
button turns it into a cancel function allowing you to
cancel clip selections at one time.
• Use this button to go between setting menus and to
select and set items in open setting menus.
• In a setting menu, turning the JOG dial button
downwards moves the menu cursor downwards and
turning it upwards moves the menu cursor upwards.
Press the JOG dial button to confirm made settings.
For more information, see [Using the menus]
(page 120).
7
SHIFT button
Use this button together with other buttons.
• Hold down the SHIFT button and press the cursor
button ([ ]) in a thumbnail screen to move the
pointer to the thumbnail at the beginning or end of a
clip.
• Hold down the SHIFT button and press the SET button
to select all clips from a previously selected clip to the
clip at the cursor location.
• SHIFT button + EXIT/CANCEL button
This button combination operates like the cancel
function.
For details, refer to [6. EXIT/CANCEL button].
Operations while the SHIFT button is pressed are
shown blow each button.
• In VFR (Variable Frame Rate) mode, press this button
and use the SYNCHRO SCAN switch to change frame
rates.
NOTE
Use the JOG dial button to go between setting menus and
select items.
For details, refer to [Viewfinder and LCD Menus] (page 120).
3
4
Thumbnail button
Press this button to open the thumbnail screen. Note
that this switchover cannot be performed during
recording or playback.
Thumbnail menu button
In thumbnail display mode, use this button to access
thumbnail menu functions to delete clips, for example.
NOTE
Use the cursor, SET and EXIT/CANCEL buttons to select
thumbnails and access menu functions.
For details, see [Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails]
(page 101).
ꢀꢀ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Time Code Section
4 6 5
8
7
1
3 2
1
GENLOCK IN connector (BNC)
6
7
COUNTER (counter display selector) button
Each press of the button displays the counter value,
time code, user bit and frame rate data in the viewfinder
and LCD display.
Use this connector to input a reference signal to
genlock the camera unit or externally lock the time
code. The subcarrier of the VBS signal output by
the VIDEO OUT connector of the camera cannot be
externally locked.
TCG (time code selector) switch
Use this switch to set the running mode of the built-in
time code generator.
F-RUN: Select this position to continuously advance
the time code independently of P2 card
recording status. Use this position to
synchronize the time code with the time of
day, or to externally lock the time code.
For details, refer to [Externally Locking the Time Code]
(page 62).
2
3
TC IN connector (BNC)
To externally lock the time code, input a reference time
code to this connector.
For details, refer to [Externally Locking the Time Code]
(page 62).
SET:
Select this position to set the time code or
user bits.
TC OUT connector (BNC)
R-RUN: Select this position to advance the time
code only during recording. The time code
is continuously recorded during normal
recording. But deleting clips and setting a
24P/24PA frame rate to continue recording of
clips that are not 24P/24PA clips may break
the sequence of time code recording.
Connect this connector to the time code input (TC IN) of
the external device to lock the time code of that device
to the time code of the AG-HPX300P.
For details, refer to [Outputting the time code externally]
(page 63).
4
5
HOLD button
Pressing this button instantly freezes the time data
indication on the counter. Note that time code
generation continues. Pressing the button again restarts
the counter.
This function allows you to check the time code or
counter value of a recorded scene.
NOTE
Always use the CURSOR and SET buttons to set the time
code and user bits.The JOG dial button cannot be used for
this purpose.
8
CURSOR and SET buttons
Use these buttons to set the time code and user bits.
The four triangular buttons are cursor buttons and the
square center button is the SET button.
RESET button
Use this button to reset the counter value on the time
code display to 0.
For details, refer to [Setting Time Data] (page 56).
Pressing this button with the TCG switch positioned at
[SET] when the TC PRESET screen and UB PRESET
screen are open, resets all set values to 0. Use the
Cursor SET button to PRESET.
ꢀꢂ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Warning and Status Display
Functions
LCD Monitor
1 3
4
1
2
2
1
LCD Monitor
The LCD monitor displays the video in the viewfinder.
Alternatively, it can show clips on the P2 card in a
thumbnail format.
For details on the LCD monitor, refer to [Viewfinder and
LCD Menus] (page 120).
In thumbnail display mode, you can use the thumbnail
menu buttons, CURSOR and SET buttons to manipulate
or delete clips, or format P2 cards.
For details, refer to [Manipulating Clips with
Thumbnails] (page 101).
1
2
3
Back tally lamp
When the BACK TALLY switch is set to ON, this lamp
behaves in the same way as the front tally lamp.
Rear tally lamp
When the BACK TALLY switch is set to ON, the rear tally
lamp behaves in the same way as the back tally lamp.
BACK TALLY switch
Use this switch to control the back and rear tally lamps.
ON:
OFF:
Enables the back and rear tally lamps.
Disables the back and rear tally lamps.
2
OPEN button
Use to open the LCD monitor.
4
WARNING lamp
This lamp starts blinking or lights when an error is
detected in the memory card recorder unit.
ꢀꢃ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Viewfinder
3
1
5 4
8
7
2
6
1
Viewfinder
The viewfinder displays the video image in color during
recording or playback. It also displays warnings and
messages – indicating camera operating status and
settings – zebra patterns and markers (safety zone and
center markers, etc.).
NOTE
The menu option EVF COLOR can be set to monochrome
in the DISPLAY SETUP screen.
2
3
TALLY switch
Use to control the front tally lamp.
ON:
OFF:
Tally lamp goes on
Tally lamp goes out.
Front tally lamp
This lamp goes on during recording when the TALLY
switch is set to the [ON] . It blinks to indicate warnings.
4
5
Eyepiece
Diopter adjusting ring
Adjust this ring to suit your vision so that the image in
the viewfinder is as clear as possible.
6
Eyepiece lock button
For details, refer to [Detaching the eyepiece]
(page 150).
7
8
Microphone holder
Right and left viewfinder positioning rings
Loosen the rings to adjust right and left position, and
tighten the ring after completing the adjustment.
ꢀꢄ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback
Setting Date and Time of Internal Clock
The CLOCK SETTING value is recorded in the contents
(clip), and affects the sequence of playback of the
thumbnails. Before carrying out recording, be sure to check
and set CLOCK SETTING and TIME ZONE.
Time zone
Time
difference
Time
difference
+01:00
Area
Area
00:00
Greenwich
Central Europe
-00:30
+01:30
Eastern
Europe
This shows you how to adjust the calendar
-01:00
Azores Islands
Mid-Atlantic
+02:00
to 5:20 PM on April 1, 2009.
-01:30
-02:00
-02:30
-03:00
+02:30
+03:00
+03:30
+04:00
Moscow
Tehran
Abu Dhabi
ꢁ
ꢁ
SetꢁtheꢁPOWERꢁswitchꢁtoꢁON.
1
Buenos Aires
Newfoundland
Island
-03:30
+04:30
Kabul
SelectꢁTIMEꢁZONEꢁitemꢁinꢁOTHERꢁ
FUNCTIONS,ꢁthenꢁpressꢁtheꢁJOGꢁdialꢁbutton.
2
-04:00
-04:30
-05:00
-05:30
-06:00
-06:30
-07:00
-07:30
-08:00
-08:30
-09:00
Halifax
+05:00
+05:30
+06:00
+06:30
+07:00
+07:30
+08:00
+08:30
+09:00
+09:30
+10:00
Islamabad
Bombay
Dacca
Yangon
Bangkok
• For details on menu operation, refer to [Using the
menus] (page 120).
New York
Chicago
ꢁ
3
UseꢁtheꢁJOGꢁdialꢁbuttonꢁtoꢁsetꢁtheꢁtimeꢁ
differenceꢁfromꢁGreenwichꢁMeanꢁTime.
Denver
Beijing
• Check what time zone you are in and set
accordingly.
Los Angeles
Tokyo
Darwin
Guam
Lord Howe
Island
Solomon
Islands
Norfolk Island
New Zealand
Chatham
Islands
Alaska
Marquesas
Islands
OTHER FUNCTIONS
-09:30
-10:00
+10:30
+11:00
USER FILE
>>>
OFF
1394 CONTROL
1394 CMD SEL
ACCESS LED
ALARM
REC P
ON
Hawaii
-10:30
-11:00
+11:30
+12:00
HIGH
>>>
CLOCK SETTING
TIME ZONE
GL PHASE
Midway Island
+9:00
HD SDI
-11:30
+12:45
+13:00
-12:00
+00:30
Kwajalein
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
NOTE
• The clock is accurate to within about 30 seconds a month
with the power turned off.
• Check and set the time when accurate time is required. After
setting the time, change the setting menu TIME ZONE item
and the display and the recorded local time will be reset
accordingly.
ꢀꢅ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ꢁ
4
SelectꢁCHANGEꢁatꢁtheꢁCLOCKꢁSETTINGꢁitemꢁ
inꢁOTHERꢁFUNCTIONS,ꢁthenꢁpressꢁtheꢁJOGꢁ
dialꢁbutton.
• The CLOCK SET screen appears.
OTHER FUNCTIONS
USER FILE
>>>
OFF
1394 CONTROL
1394 CMD SEL
ACCESS LED
ALARM
REC P
ON
ON
CLOCK SETTING
TIME ZONE
GL PHASE
RETURN
CHANGE
HD SDI
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
ꢁ
5
TurnꢁtheꢁJOGꢁdialꢁbuttonꢁtoꢁselectꢁYEAR,ꢁthenꢁ
pressꢁtheꢁJOGꢁdialꢁbutton.
CLOCK SETTING
YEAR
2009
APR
1
MONTH
DAY
HOUR
MINUTE
13
7
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
ꢁ
6
TurnꢁtheꢁJOGꢁdialꢁbuttonꢁtoꢁsetꢁYEARꢁtoꢁꢀ00ꢈ,ꢁ
thenꢁpressꢁtheꢁJOGꢁdialꢁbutton.
• A year between 2000 to 2037 can be set.
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
TurnꢁtheꢁJOGꢁdialꢁbuttonꢁtoꢁselectꢁMONTH,ꢁ
thenꢁpressꢁtheꢁJOGꢁdialꢁbutton.
7
8
9
TurnꢁtheꢁJOGꢁdialꢁbuttonꢁtoꢁsetꢁMONTHꢁtoꢁ
APR,ꢁthenꢁpressꢁtheꢁJOGꢁdialꢁbutton.
SetꢁDAY,ꢁHOURꢁandꢁMINUTEꢁinꢁtheꢁsameꢁwayꢁ
asꢁsettingꢁYEARꢁandꢁMONTH.
• This is a 24-hour clock.
CLOCK SETTING
YEAR
2009
APR
1
MONTH
DAY
HOUR
MINUTE
17
20
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
ꢀꢆ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P2 Cards
ꢁ
4
Pushꢁtheꢁejectꢁbuttonꢁthatꢁpopsꢁupꢁtoꢁtheꢁright.
Inserting P2 Cards
• Insert a P2 card into the AG-HPX300P. The P2
CARD ACCESS LED for the appropriate slot
indicates the status of the P2 card.
For details, refer to [P2 CARD ACCESS LED and
status of P2 cards] (page 29).
NOTE
When using the camera recorder for the first time, be sure to
set the time data beforehand.
For details, refer to [Setting Date and Time of Internal Clock]
(page 26).
ꢁ
ꢁ
TurnꢁonꢁtheꢁPOWERꢁswitch.
Openꢁtheꢁcardꢁslotꢁcover.
1
2
PꢀꢁCARDꢁACCESSꢁLED
ꢁ
Closeꢁtheꢁcardꢁslotꢁcover.
5
NOTE
• To prevent cards from falling out, dust from entering and
reduce the risk of exposure to static electricity, close the card
slot cover before moving the camera.
Slotꢁcover
• Format P2 cards only on a P2 card device.
ꢁ
3
InsertꢁaꢁPꢀꢁcardꢁinꢁaꢁPꢀꢁcardꢁslot.
Removing P2 Cards
• Press in the card until the eject button pops up.
EJECTꢁbutton
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
Openꢁtheꢁcardꢁslotꢁcover.
Raiseꢁtheꢁejectꢁbutton.
1
2
3
ThenꢁdepressꢁtheꢁejectꢁbuttonꢁtoꢁreleaseꢁtheꢁPꢀꢁ
card.
Insertꢁtheꢁcardꢁwithꢁtheꢁ
logoꢁfacingꢁup.
Raiseꢁtheꢁejectꢁbutton.
Pressꢁtheꢁraisedꢁejectꢁ
buttonꢁtoꢁremoveꢁaꢁPꢀꢁ
card.
ꢀꢇ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NOTE
P2 CARD ACCESS LED and status
of P2 cards
• When a P2 card is being accessed or recognised after
insertion (P2 CARD ACCESS LED blinks in orange), do not
remove the P2 card. Removing a P2 card during access could
damage it.
• If a P2 card being accessed is removed, the viewfinder
displays “TURN POWER OFF” and the AG-HPX300P gives a
warning using an alarm and the WARNING LED. In addition,
all P2 CARD ACCESS LEDs blink rapidly in orange. If this is
the case, turn the power off.
For details, refer to [Warning System] (page 151).
• Removing a P2 card during access may corrupt clip data.
Check the clips and restore them if required.
P2
MODE
CARD
ACCESS
LED
Stays on Recording
in green enabled
Status of P2 Card
CHECK
indication*1
Writing and
reading enabled.
Writing and
reading enabled
for current
recording mode
(loop, interval
or one-shot
ACTIVE
ACTIVE
For details, refer to [Restoring Clips] (page 109).
• If a P2 card being formatted is removed, it may be not be
formatted properly. In this case, the viewfinder displays
“TURN POWER OFF”. If this message appears, turn off the
power, then restart the AG-HPX300P to reformat the card.
• If a P2 card is inserted while another P2 card is being played
back, the inserted P2 card is not recognised and the P2
CARD ACCESS LED for that card does not come on. Card
recognition starts when playback ends.
• A P2 card inserted in an empty slot during recording may not
be immediately recognized during the following events.
• Immediately following PRE REC operation
• The CARD ACCESS LED can be set to stay off in the menu
option ACCESS LED in the OTHER FUNCTIONS screen.
When the camera is used in this way, remove cards when the
camera has been powered down or a sufficiently long time
after terminating recording, playback and other operating
modes.
Stays on Selected for
in orange recording
recording).
Blinks in
Being
Writing or reading
ACCESSING
INFO
orange*2 accessed being performed.
Quickly
Being
The P2 card is
blinks in
orange
recognized being recognised. READING
The P2 card has
no free space.
Only reading is
enabled.
Card full
FULL
Blinks in
green
The write-protect
switch on the P2
card is positioned
at [PROTECT].
Only reading is
enabled.
Write-
protected
PROTECTED
• Removing a P2 card during thumbnail display terminates the
thumbnail display.
The card is not
supported by your
AG-HPX300P.
Replace the card.
The P2 card
is not properly
formatted.
Reformat the card.
No P2 card is
inserted.
Card not
supported
NOT
SUPPORTED
To Prevent Accidental Erasure of
P2 Card Content
To prevent the content of a P2 card being accidentally
erased, position the write-protect switch on the P2 card at
[Protect].
Incorrect
format
FORMAT
ERROR
Stays off
Card not
inserted
NO CARD
Card recognition
standby.
*1 MODE CHECK appears in the viewfinder and on the
LCD monitor.
For details, see [Viewfinder Screen Status Displays]
(page 65)
*2 Blinks orange also when a PROXY card (optional
accessory) is inserted in slot 2.
Write-protectꢁswitch
NOTE
Write-protect switchover can be performed while the card is
being accessed (during recording or playback), but does not
take effect until access to the card ceases.
ꢀꢈ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Splitting clips recorded on P2 cards
P2 card recording times
This camera will automatically generate additional clips
for a continuous recording on an 8 GB or higher capacity
P2 card when the recording exceeds the durations given
below. Even so, a P2 device will handle such clips as a
single clip in thumbnail operations (display, delete, recover,
copy, etc.). Such recordings may be handled as separate
clips by nonlinear editing software or a PC.
P2 cards available to the AG-HPX300P
This camera supports the following P2 cards.
• AJ-P2C004HG (4 GB)
• AJ-P2C008HG (8 GB)
• AJ-P2C016AG (16 GB)
• AJ-P2C016RG (16 GB)
• AJ-P2C032AG (32 GB)
• AJ-P2C032RG (32 GB)
• AJ-P2C064AG (64 GB)
Recording format
Continuous recording time
(excluding Native format)
AVC-I 100
Approx. 5 min.
DVCPRO HD
NOTE
AVC-I 50
• Card model numbers and capacities above will become
available as of January 2009. Greater capacities and technical
innovation may extend the recording time.
• This unit cannot use AJ-P2C002SG (2 GB) cards.
• Use of cards other than those listed above may require
updating the camera driver.
Approx. 10 min.
DVCPRO50
DVCPRO
Approx. 20 min.
DV
For details, refer to [Updating the firmware incorporated into the
unit] (page 155).
• For the latest information not available in the Operating
Instructions, visit the P2 Support Desk at the following Web
site.
https://eww.pavc.panasonic.co.jp/pro-av/
P2 card recording times
(When using one 64 GB card)
Recording format
(codec)
Recording
time
System mode
AVC-I 100
DVCPRO HD
Approx. 64 min.
HD (1080i, 720P)
Approx. 128
min.
AVC-I 50
Approx. 128
min.
Approx. 256
min.
DVCPRO50
SD (480i)
DVCPRO
DV
NOTE
• The above recording time is for normal recording. Recording
in native mode will extend recording time depending on
system mode.
For details, refer to [List of recording formats and functions]
(page 44).
• Use of 32 GB, 16 GB and 8 GB P2 cards will provide 1/2, 1/4
and 1/8, respectively of above recording times.
• The indicated capacities include a management area so the
total area available for recording is somewhat smaller.
ꢂ0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Handling P2 Card Recording
The P2 card is a semiconductor memory card designed
for the DVCPRO P2 series, Panasonic’s line of professional
video and broadcast equipment.
• Since the DVCPRO P2 format and AVC-Intra record data
as files, it is ideally suited for computer processing. The
file structure is in a proprietary format that includes audio
and video data recorded in the MXF file format as well as
various other essential data forming an interrelated folder
structure as shown below.
Drive:\
CONTENTS
AUDIO
CLIP
ICON
PROXY
VIDEO
VOICE
LASTCLIP.TXT.*
Allꢁtheseꢁfoldersꢁareꢁrequired.
*ꢁꢁThisꢁfileꢁcontainsꢁtheꢁlastꢁclipꢁdataꢁrecordedꢁ
onꢁaꢁPꢀꢁdevice.
NOTE
If any of this data is changed or lost, it will not be recognized
as P2 data or the P2 card may no longer be possible to use in
a P2 device.
• To prevent data loss in transferring P2 card data to a
PC or write back PC data on a P2 card, use P2 Viewer,
which can be downloaded from the Web site listed below.
(Supported operating systems: Windows 2000, Windows
XP, Windows Vista)
https://eww.pavc.panasonic.co.jp/pro-av/support/
desk/e/index.htm
• Follow the steps below to use general software such as
Microsoft Windows Explorer or Apple Finder to transfer
the data to a PC. Be sure to use P2 Viewer to write data
back to a P2 card.
• Treat the CONTENTS folder and the LASTCLIP.TXT file
as a unit.
• Do not modify the data below the CONTENTS folder.
• In copying, be sure to copy both the CONTENTS folder
and the LASTCLIP.TXT file together.
• When transferring data from multiple P2 cards,
create separate folders for each P2 card to prevent
overwriting clips with identical names.
• Do not delete data on a P2 card.
• Format P2 cards only on a P2 card device.
ꢂ1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Procedures
This section describes the basic procedure for shooting
and recording.
Before you embark on a shoot, pre-inspect your system to
ensure that it works properly.
For directions on inspecting your memory card camera-
recorder, see [Inspections Before Shooting] (page 147).
Setting the switches before shooting and
recording
When a battery and P2 cards are installed, set the switches
as detailed below, before starting to use your AG-HPX300P.
Battery Set-up to P2 card Insertion
f
ꢁ
Insertꢁaꢁchargedꢁbattery.
1
2
e
ꢁ
TurnꢁtheꢁPOWERꢁswitchꢁtoꢁONꢁtoꢁcheckꢁtheꢁ
batteryꢁremainingꢁlevelꢁinꢁtheꢁviewfinder.
• When battery capacity is low, replace it with a fully
charged battery.
NOTE
When low battery capacity is indicated after replacing
a battery with a fully charged battery, check battery
installation.
For details, refer to [BATTERY SETUP screen] (page 134).
a
b
c d b
ꢁ
InsertꢁaꢁPꢀꢁcard,ꢁcheckꢁthatꢁtheꢁPꢀꢁCARDꢁ
ACCESSꢁLEDꢁlightsꢁorangeꢁorꢁgreenꢁbeforeꢁ
closingꢁtheꢁslotꢁcover.
3
a
b
Iris
The iris is automatically adjusted when the lens is set to
the auto iris mode.
• When more than one P2 card slot contains a P2
card, the card in the slot with the lowest number
is used first. However, regardless of slot number,
a P2 card inserted later will not be accessed until
the other cards have been used.
USER MAIN/USER1/USER2
Assigning the SLOT SEL function to a USER button
allows you to select one of the two inserted P2 cards for
recording.
The P2 card selected for recording switches with each
press of the USER button, and the P2 CARD ACCESS
LED of the selected P2 card lights orange. The slot
number of the card to be recorded appears in green in
the LCD monitor and the viewfinder.
Example:
If the two slots contain P2 cards, the cards are
used in order of slot numbers 12. However, if
the P2 card in Slot 1 is removed and then re-
inserted, the cards will be used in the following
order: 21.
For more information on viewfinder displays, see
[Viewfinder Screen Status Displays] (page 65).
NOTE
• The slot selected for recording cannot be changed when
recording has started. Perform this operation during
recording standby.
• Use the USER MAIN/USER1/USER2 item in setting menu
SW MODE screen to assign functions to the USER MAIN/
USER1/USER2 button.
c
d
GAIN switch
Normally, this should be set to L (0 dB). If conditions are
too dark, an appropriate gain level should be set.
AUTO KNEE selector switch
Set to ON or OFF. Selecting BARS turns off this function
and outputs a color bar signal.
1
2
e
f
TCG
Note that the recording order is retained even if the power
is turned off. When the power is next turned on, the last
card written before powering-down will be the target card.
Set to F-RUN or R-RUN.
AUDIO SELECT CH 1/CH 2
Set to AUTO.
ꢂꢀ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ꢁ
ꢁ
Pointꢁtheꢁcameraꢁatꢁyourꢁsubjectꢁtoꢁadjustꢁtheꢁ
focus,ꢁandꢁzoom.
Shooting
3
White/Black Balance Adjustment to
Recording Completion
Toꢁuseꢁtheꢁelectronicꢁshutter,ꢁsetꢁtheꢁshutterꢁ
speedꢁandꢁshutterꢁmode.
4
For shooting, follow the steps below.
For more information, see [Setting the Electronic
Shutter] (page 51).
1
ꢁ
ꢁ
PressꢁtheꢁRECꢁbuttonꢁtoꢁstartꢁrecording.
Toꢁstopꢁrecording,ꢁpressꢁtheꢁRECꢁbutton.
5
6
NOTE
• Shooting the sun and other very bright subjects may produce
a color cast in surrounding areas.
Operation Buttons
During recording, all operation buttons (REW, FF, PLAY/PAUSE,
STOP) are disabled.
3
5, 6 4
2
Normal Recording
• Pressing the REC button starts recording of video and
ꢁ
ꢁ
UseꢁtheꢁNDꢁFILTERꢁcontrolꢁtoꢁselectꢁaꢁfilterꢁ
accordingꢁtoꢁambientꢁlightꢁconditions.
sound on the P2 card.
• The video and audio (including additional information)
recorded in one session is referred to as a clip.
1
ꢁWhenꢁtheꢁwhiteꢁbalanceꢁisꢁsaved:
2
• Position the WHITE BAL switch to [A] or [B].
ꢁWhenꢁtheꢁwhiteꢁorꢁblackꢁbalanceꢁisꢁnotꢁsavedꢁ
andꢁyouꢁhaveꢁnoꢁtimeꢁtoꢁadjustꢁtheꢁwhiteꢁ
balance:
• Position the WHITE BAL switch to [PRST].
• The color temperature can be set to 3200K or
5600K.
ꢁIfꢁtheꢁwhiteꢁbalanceꢁisꢁadjustedꢁonꢁtheꢁspot:
• Select a filter according to ambient light
conditions. Then, position the WHITE BAL
switch to [A] or [B] and shoot a white test
subject so that it appears at the center of the
screen. Then, follow the steps below to adjust
the white balance.
RECꢁbutton
NOTE
Pressing the REC button will not immediately stop data write
operations to a P2 card in the following situations. And the
REC button operation is not recognized.
1. Turn the AUTO W/B BAL switch toward [AWB]
to adjust the white balance.
2. Turn the AUTO W/B BAL switch toward [ABB]
to adjust the black balance.
3. Turn the AUTO W/B BAL switch toward [AWB]
to adjust the white balance again.
• When terminating a short recording
• When terminating a recording that has just continued onto a
second P2 card
For directions on making adjustments, see
[Adjusting the White Balance] (page 48) and
[Adjusting the Black Balance] (page 49).
ꢂꢂ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Standard and Native Recording
This camera is capable both of native recording, when it
records video data at the frame rate used by the camera,
and is also capable of standard recording or recording
59.94 frames with a pulldown.
Native recording
Native recording extracts only the active frames during
1080i AVC-Intra recording as well as 720P DVCPRO HD
and AVC-Intra recording.
At 720P, this lengthens the recording time 2 to 2.5 times
over pull-down recording.
Standard recording
Also in native recording, the output of camera video and
playback video is a 59.94 frame rate.
(pull-down recording)
In 24P and 30P mode, 59.94i or 59.94P will be recorded
with 2:3 and 2:2 pulldown, respectively.
The camera can also handle video shot in the 24PA mode
(2:3:3:2 advanced pulldown).
Cameraꢁrecording
A
B
C
D
(10ꢇ0/ꢀꢃPN)
ꢀ:ꢂꢁpull-down
Ao Ae Bo Be Bo Ce Co De Do De
Note that AVC-Intra does not support pulldown recording.
Recording
A
B
C
D
Cameraꢁrecording
A
B
C
D
Cameraꢁrecording
(ꢆꢀ0/ꢀꢃPN)
A
B
C
D
(10ꢇ0/ꢀꢃPꢁoverꢁꢅ0i)
ꢀ:ꢂꢁpull-downꢁrecording Ao Ae Bo Be Bo Ce Co De Do De
A�
A
B�
B
B
C�
C
D�
D
D
ꢀ:ꢂꢁpull-down
Cameraꢁrecording
(ꢆꢀ0/ꢀꢃPꢁoverꢁꢅ0P)
ꢀ:ꢂꢁpull-downꢁrecording A�
A
B
C
D
Recording
A
B
C
D
ꢁActiveꢁframe
A
B�
B
B
C�
C
D�
D
D
Activeꢁframe
NOTE
• In 24P/24PA, 24PN (native recording) and in 30PN (native recording) at 720P, the camera starts recording in 5-frame, 4-frame
and 2-frame segments, respectively. For this reason, to continue recording clips in a system mode using a different recording
segmentation may break the continuity of the time code.
• The camera uses internal memory for recording, when recording starts as soon as a P2 card is inserted or the camera is powered
up. In this situation, recording cannot be stopped until P2 card recognition ends.
To check P2 card status, press the DISP/MODE CHK button and check the row for SLOT 1 and 2.
• An editing system that supports 24PA (2:3:3:2 advanced pulldown) will enable editing with less quality loss than 24P (2:3
pulldown).
• Record at standard 24P if a 24PA compatible editing system will not be used.
ꢂꢃ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Variable Frame Rate (VFR) Recording
In 720P mode, this camera is capable of frame skipping
Standard VFR recording
(pulldown recording)
(undercranking) and high-speed (overcranking) recording.
The camera operator can select between native (PN)
recording mode and standard (OVER) recording.
Native VFR Recording
ꢁ
InꢁtheꢁSYSTEMꢁSETUPꢁscreen,ꢁsetꢁtheꢁmenuꢁ
optionꢁSYSTEMꢁMODEꢁtoꢁꢆꢀ0-ꢄꢈ.ꢈꢃPꢁandꢁtheꢁ
menuꢁoptionꢁRECꢁFORMATꢁtoꢁAVC-Iꢁ100/ꢅ0P.
1
2
ꢁ
ꢁ
InꢁtheꢁSYSTEMꢁSETUPꢁscreen,ꢁsetꢁtheꢁmenuꢁ
optionꢁSYSTEMꢁMODEꢁtoꢁꢆꢀ0-ꢄꢈ.ꢈꢃPꢁandꢁ
theꢁmenuꢁoptionꢁRECꢁFORMATꢁtoꢁAVC-Iꢁ
100/ꢀꢃPN.
1
ꢁ
InꢁtheꢁSCENEꢁFILEꢁscreen,ꢁsetꢁtheꢁmenuꢁ
optionꢁVFRꢁtoꢁONꢁandꢁtheꢁmenuꢁoptionꢁFRAMEꢁ
RATEꢁtoꢁsuitꢁshootingꢁpurposes.
• The frame rate can be set to a value between 12
(12P) to 60 frames (60P).
InꢁtheꢁSCENEꢁFILEꢁscreen,ꢁsetꢁtheꢁmenuꢁ
optionꢁVFRꢁtoꢁONꢁandꢁtheꢁmenuꢁoptionꢁFRAMEꢁ
RATEꢁtoꢁsuitꢁshootingꢁpurposes.
2
NOTE
Pressing the SYNCHRO SCAN switch while the JOG
dial button is held down and the frame rate indication
is blinking allows you to change the frame rate without
opening a setting menu as long as recording is not in
progress.
• The frame rate can be set to a value between 12
(12P) to 60 frames (60P).
NOTE
Pressing the SYNCHRO SCAN switch while the JOG
dial button is held down and the frame rate indication
is blinking allows you to change the frame rate as long
as recording is not in progress.
ꢁ
3
PressꢁtheꢁRECꢁbutton.
This starts recording in the VFR mode (OVER 60P).
This mode can be combined with the AVC-I 100/60P, AVC-I
50/60P and DVCPRO HD/60P recording formats.
For details, refer to [List of recording, playback and output
formats] (page 46).
ꢁ
PressꢁtheꢁRECꢁbutton.
3
This starts recording in the VFR mode (native VFR).
This mode can be combined with the AVC-I 100, AVC-I 50,
DVCPRO HD, 30PN, and 24PN recording formats.
For details, refer to [List of recording, playback and output
formats] (page 46).
For details, refer to [SYSTEM SETUP screen] (page 126).
Setting a low frame rate and recording a fast-moving
subject at 60P will produce a smoothly flowing sequence at
playback.
For details, refer to [SYSTEM SETUP screen] (page 126).
NOTE
NOTE
Note the following about native VFR recording.
- The P2 card that is being recorded cannot be changed
during recording.
- Pre-recording, loop recording, interval recording and one-
shot recording are not available.
- 1394 output is not available during recording and recording
standby.
- Changing Scene Dial position during recording does not
change VFR on and off position.
- Sound cannot be recorded. *1
- The time code is locked to Rec Run. *1
- Thumbnail screens are created 1 frame later than video
recorded on a P2 card, but this is not a malfunction.
*1 In 24PN/30PN recording modes, when the frame rate is 24
and 30 frames per second, respectively, audio can also be
recorded. The time code can be set to Free Run (F-RUN).
• Audio playback is disabled when a frame rate converter is
used to extract active frames for over and under-cranking.
• Note the following about standard VFR recording.
- The P2 card that is being recorded cannot be changed
during recording.
- Pre-recording, loop recording, interval recording and one-
shot recording are not available.
- 1394 output is available during recording and recording
standby, but not in AVC Intra mode.
- Changing Scene Dial position during recording does not
change VFR on and off position.
- Sound is recorded.
ꢂꢄ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using VFR Recording Function
Standard speed for film production
Screen production normally requires a 24 fps (24 frames per second) frame rate (normal speed) for screening a film.
Making the settings described below will provide film-quality playback. The 720P progressive mode and cine-like gamma
will make video look like it was shot with a film camera.
Standard setting for film production
SYSTEM MODE settings
Recording frame rate
SYSTEM MODE
Other settings
AVC-I 100/24PN
(AVC-I 50/24PN)
(DVCPRO HD/24PN)
REC FORMAT
VFR
720 - 59.94P
OFF
24 frames
AVC-I 100/24PN
(AVC-I 50/24PN)
(DVCPRO HD/60i)
24P
REC FORMAT
CAMERA MODE*1
1080 - 59.94i
*1 Only when the menu option REC FORMAT is set to DVCPRO HD/60i in the SYSTEM SETUP screen.
Shooting at standard speed for producing commercials and TV programs
Production aimed at HDTV and SDTV broadcasts for TV audiences must use the frame rate (x1) of 30fps (30 frames/s). The
settings below allow you to obtain the kind of playback used for broadcast programs. This permits film-like video recording
of commercials and music clips that also provide a frame rate suitable for broadcasting.
Standard settings for producing commercials and dramas
SYSTEM MODE settings
Recording frame rate
SYSTEM MODE
Other settings
AVC-I 100/30PN
(AVC-I 50/30PN)
(DVCPRO HD/30PN)
REC FORMAT
VFR
720 - 59.94P
OFF
30 frame
AVC-I 100/30PN
(AVC-I 50/30PN)
(DVCPRO HD/60i)
30P
REC FORMAT
CAMERA MODE*2
1080 - 59.94i
*2 Only when the menu option REC FORMAT is set to DVCPRO HD/60i in the SYSTEM SETUP screen.
ꢂꢅ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Undercranking effects
This effect produces the quick motion often used for showing clouds drifting across the sky, crowds of people swarming
past a solitary standing individual, a kung fu demonstration and other performances. For example, selecting a VFR
recording frame rate of 12 fps when shooting at a 24P recording format yields a fast-motion effect of 2x normal speed.
Standard setup for undercranking effects
SYSTEM MODE setup
Recording frame rate
SYSTEM MODE
Other settings
AVC-I 100/24PN
(AVC-I 50/24PN)
REC FORMAT
(DVCPRO HD/24PN)
720-59.94P
12 to 22 frames
VFR
ON
FRAME RATE
Set to 22 frames or less
• With the menu option REC FORMAT set to DVCPRO HD/60P, you can use a nonlinear editing system to generate quick
motion effects from the resulting footage.
Overcranking effects
Overcranking produces slow-motion playback, which is frequently used in climax scenes, or for dramatic effects like car
chases and action scenes. For example, selecting a recording frame rate of 60 fps when shooting a 24P recording format
yields a slow-motion effect that is 2.5 times normal speed. Shooting 720P progressive video will produce smooth and high-
quality slow-motion.
Standard setup for overcranking effects
SYSTEM MODE setup
Recording frame rate
SYSTEM MODE
Other settings
AVC-I 100/24PN
(AVC-I 50/24PN)
REC FORMAT
(DVCPRO HD/24PN)
720-59.94P
25 to 60 frames
VFR
ON
FRAME RATE
Set to 25 frames or more
• With the menu option REC FORMAT set to DVCPRO HD/60P, you can use a nonlinear editing system to generate slow
motion effects from the resulting footage.
ꢂꢆ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Special Recording Modes
During P2 card recording, setting items in the menu option
RECORDING SETUP screen provides the following special
recording modes: pre-recording, interval recording, one-
shot recording, and loop recording.
ꢁ
3
PressꢁtheꢁRECꢁbutton.
This setting will record audio and video a time
period prior to start of recording.
• The following recording modes will disable the
pre-recording function and start respective
recording function when selected.
• Recording of video input via the IEEE1394
connector
These recording modes are available only with the
following settings.
SYSTEM MODE
REC FORMAT
DVCPRO HD/60i
AVC-I 100/60i
AVC-I 50/60i
Other conditions
Set CAMERA
MODE to 60i or
30P
1080 - 59.94i
• When changing recording formats
• After a change from playback to recording
• During interval recording
• During one-shot recording
• During loop recording
DVCPRO HD/60P
AVC-I 100/60P
AVC-I 50/60P
DVCPRO 50/60i
DVCPRO/60i
DV/60i
720 - 59.94P
480 - 59.94i
Turn VFR OFF
Set CAMERA
MODE to 60i or
30P
• There may be a short delay in start of audio and
video recording when the REC button is pressed
directly after switching from thumbnail display
or playback to view what you are shooting, after
turning the power on and after changing the
PREREC MODE.
Pre-recording (PRE REC)
This function is used to start recording a certain number of
seconds (approx. 3 seconds for HD recordings or approx.
7 seconds for SD recordings) before actual recording
starts.
Startingꢁrecording
Stoppingꢁrecording
(time)
Actualꢁrecordingꢁtime
PREꢁRECꢁtime
ꢁ
ꢁ
CheckꢁthatꢁtheꢁSYSTEMꢁSETUPꢁscreenꢁisꢁsetꢁ
upꢁasꢁdescribedꢁabove.
1
For details on menu operation, refer to [Using the
menus] (page 120).
SetꢁtheꢁmenuꢁoptionꢁPRERECꢁMODEꢁtoꢁONꢁinꢁ
theꢁRECORDINGꢁSETUPꢁscreen.
2
• The following indications appear in the special
recording display area in the viewfinder.
Recording: P-REC lights
Pause: P-PAUSE lights
For details, refer to [Screen displays] (page 66).
ꢂꢇ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interval recording (INTERVAL REC)
This function is used to record 1 frame at the time interval
One-shot recording
(ONE SHOT REC)
This function records a single shot at each unit of time
which has been set.
set in the INTERVAL TIME item.
1ꢁframeꢁ
recording
1ꢁframeꢁ
recording
1ꢁframeꢁ
recording
(time)
ꢁ
ꢁ
CheckꢁthatꢁtheꢁSYSTEMꢁSETUPꢁscreenꢁisꢁsetꢁ
upꢁasꢁdescribedꢁonꢁpageꢁꢂꢇ.
1
For details on menu operation, refer to [Using the
menus] (page 120).
SetꢁINTERVAL SetꢁINTERVAL
TIMEꢁsetting TIMEꢁsetting
SelectꢁONEꢁSHOTꢁinꢁtheꢁmenuꢁoptionꢁRECꢁ
FUNCTIONꢁinꢁtheꢁRECORDINGꢁSETUPꢁ
screen.
2
ꢁ
ꢁ
CheckꢁthatꢁtheꢁSYSTEMꢁSETUPꢁscreenꢁisꢁsetꢁ
upꢁasꢁdescribedꢁonꢁpageꢁꢂꢇ.
1
For details on menu operation, refer to [Using the
menus] (page 120).
ꢁ
ꢁ
SetꢁtheꢁtimeꢁinꢁtheꢁmenuꢁoptionꢁONEꢁSHOTꢁ
TIMEꢁinꢁtheꢁRECORDINGꢁSETUPꢁscreen.
3
SelectꢁINTERVALꢁinꢁtheꢁmenuꢁoptionꢁRECꢁ
FUNCTIONꢁinꢁtheꢁRECORDINGꢁSETUPꢁ
screen.
2
PressꢁtheꢁRECꢁbutton.
4
• The camera will pause recording after making a
recording that lasts the duration set in step 3.
• Press the STOP button to stop recording.
• To cancel this function, turn the camera off or
select NORMAL in the REC FUNCTION option.
• The following indications appear to the left of the
operation status display.
ꢁ
ꢁ
SetꢁtheꢁtimeꢁinꢁtheꢁmenuꢁoptionꢁINTERVALꢁ
TIMEꢁinꢁtheꢁRECORDINGꢁSETUPꢁscreen.
3
PressꢁtheꢁRECꢁbutton.
4
• The camera will repeat 1-frame recording for the
time interval set in the INTERVAL TIME option.
• Press the STOP button to stop recording.
• To cancel this function, turn the camera off or
select NORMAL in the REC FUNCTION option.
• The following indications appear to the left of the
operation status display.
• During recording: “I-REC” stays lit.
• During a pause: “I-PAUSE” stays lit.
• When stopped: ”I-“ in “I-PAUSE” blinks.
NOTE
• No other functions are available during operation.
• The pre-recording function is not available.
• Sound is not recorded.
• During recording: “I-REC” stays lit.
• Data recorded (until the STOP button is pressed) in
this mode is recorded as a single file.
• There is no output from the DVCPRO/DV connector.
• During continuous one-shot recording, recording
operation speed may be decreased.
• During a pause: “I-PAUSE” stays lit.
When a setting of less than 2 seconds is made
in step 3, “I-REC” blinks according to time
setting during recording.
• When stopped: “I-” in “I-PAUSE” blinks.
NOTE
• The pre-recording function is not available.
• Sound is not recorded.
• Data recorded (until the STOP button is pressed) in
this mode is recorded as a single file.
• There is no output from the DVCPRO/DV connector.
ꢂꢈ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• During loop recording, the access LEDs for all P2
cards used in the recording light orange or blinks.
Note that removing any of the P2 cards will terminate
loop recording.
• Irregularity in the input GENLOCK reference signal
during loop recording may terminate recording.
Loop recording (LOOP REC)
• When two P2 cards are inserted in the P2 card slots,
each card is recorded in succession.
• When there is no longer any space left on the cards,
recording starts over from the first card by recording new
clips over saved old clips.
PROXY Recording Function
(Optional)
Installing an optional video encoder card (AJ-YAX800G) in
P2 card slot 2 makes it possible to record MPEG4 format
video, time code data and other real-time data to P2 cards
or SD memory cards simultaneous with camera recording
of video and audio.
For the clip recording time, see [Splitting clips recorded
on P2 cards] (page 30).
1stꢁcard
ꢀndꢁcard
Beforeꢁstartingꢁ
loopꢁrecording
Noꢁrecording
Recorded
Recordingꢁstart
Firstꢁloopꢁ
recording
A
B
B
Secondꢁloopꢁ
recording
C
NOTE
Insert the video encoder card when the camera is turned off.
Recordingꢁwillꢁbeꢁmadeꢁonꢁtheꢁareasꢁwithꢁnoꢁrecordingꢁ
consecutivelyꢁ(A,ꢁB,ꢁthenꢁC).ꢁWhenꢁallꢁareasꢁonꢁallꢁcardsꢁareꢁ
recorded,ꢁnewꢁrecordingꢁ(C)ꢁwillꢁbeꢁmadeꢁbyꢁoverwritingꢁtheꢁ
areaꢁA.
For details, refer to the supplied User’s Guide of the video
encoder card.
Hot Swap Recording
ꢁ
CheckꢁthatꢁtheꢁSYSTEMꢁSETUPꢁscreenꢁisꢁsetꢁ
upꢁasꢁdescribedꢁonꢁpageꢁꢂꢇ.
With a P2 card in each card slot it is possible to make
one continuous recording that spans two cards. And by
removing any card other than that being recorded, you can
make continuous recording on 2 or more cards (hot swap
recording).
1
For details on menu operation, refer to [Using the
menus] (page 120).
Note that recognition of a P2 card may be delayed
depending on when it is inserted in an empty card slot
(for example, immediately after pre-recording or when a
recording continues from one card to the next). P2 cards
should be inserted when there is still 1 minute or more time
left on the card that is being recorded.
ꢁ
SelectꢁLOOPꢁinꢁtheꢁmenuꢁoptionꢁRECꢁ
FUNCTIONꢁinꢁtheꢁRECORDINGꢁSETUPꢁ
screen.
2
3
ꢁ
PressꢁtheꢁRECꢁbutton.
NOTE
• Recording starts.
This function is not compatible with hot-swap playback.
• Press the REC button to stop recording.
• To cancel this function, turn the camera off or
select NORMAL in the REC FUNCTION item.
• The following indications appear to the left of the
operation status display.
REC REVIEW Function
• Pressing the RET button on the lens after a recording will
automatically locate and play back the last two seconds
of the most recent clip. Holding down the RET button on
the lens will allow you to play back up to 10 seconds.
Use this function to check that recording is performed
normally. The camera returns to recording standby mode
after playback. If the clip is short, holding down the RET
button after a return to the beginning of the clip will not
result in playback of the clip before the current clip.
• You can use menu options USER MAIN, USER1 and
USER2 to assign the REC REVIEW function to a user
button. Select these options from the SW MODE screen.
• During recording: “L-REC” stays lit.
• During a pause: “L-PAUSE” stays lit.
• When remaining memory is low: “P2 LACK L-”
blinks.
NOTE
• Use two P2 cards with at least one minute of
remaining recording time.
• The mode check screen shows standard recording
time depending on recording format as remaining P2
card time. When loop recording is stopped right after
deleting old data, the time of recordings on the card
may be shorter than indicated.
• This function is not available during IEEE1394 input.
• The pre-recording function is not available.
• Canceling this function may take some time.The
succeeding operations are not available until the P2
CARD ACCESS LED goes from blinking to steady
lighting.
NOTE
Note that a backup recording performed on a backup device
connected to the DVCPRO/DV or SDI OUT connector will also
record video played back using the REC REVIEW function.
ꢃ0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Shot Marker (SHOT MARK)
Recording Function
Text Memo Recording Function
Use this function to add text memos anywhere in the video
during clip recording or playback.
This function can be used to distinguish a clip from other
clips by adding a thumbnail to each clip.
This also makes possible to display or play back the
marked clips only.
This makes it possible to display thumbnails only of clips
with text memos, or to display thumbnails and time codes
of text memo positions in order, to play back clips from text
memo points and select and copy only the sections you
want.
For details, refer to [Text Memo] (page 107).
To add shot marks
To add text memos
ꢁ
1
InꢁtheꢁSWꢁMODEꢁscreen,ꢁassignꢁSHOTꢁMARKꢁ
toꢁaꢁuserꢁbuttonꢁ(USERꢁMAIN,ꢁUSER1ꢁorꢁ
USERꢀ)ꢁorꢁtheꢁRETꢁbuttonꢁonꢁtheꢁlens.
ꢁ
1
InꢁtheꢁSWꢁMODEꢁscreen,ꢁassignꢁTEXTꢁMEMOꢁ
toꢁaꢁuserꢁbuttonꢁ(USERꢁMAIN,ꢁUSER1ꢁorꢁ
USERꢀ)ꢁorꢁtheꢁRETꢁbuttonꢁonꢁtheꢁlens.
For details on menu operation, refer to [Using the
menus] (page 120).
For details on menu operation, refer to [Using the
menus] (page 120).
ꢁ
2
Pressꢁtheꢁuserꢁbuttonꢁ(orꢁtheꢁRETꢁbuttonꢁonꢁtheꢁ
lens)ꢁtoꢁwhichꢁSHOTꢁMARKꢁhasꢁbeenꢁassignedꢁ
duringꢁrecordingꢁorꢁwhenꢁrecordingꢁisꢁpaused.
ꢁ
2
Pressꢁtheꢁuserꢁbuttonꢁ(orꢁtheꢁRETꢁbuttonꢁonꢁtheꢁ
lens)ꢁtoꢁwhichꢁTEXTꢁMEMOꢁhasꢁbeenꢁassignedꢁ
duringꢁrecordingꢁorꢁplayback.
• SHOT MARK ON is displayed as a shot mark is
inserted in the currently recorded clip.
• Pressing this key a second time displays SHOT
MARK OFF and the shot mark is deleted.
• “TEXT MEMO” is displayed and a text memo is
inserted at the point the button is pressed.
NOTE
NOTE
• A shot mark added during a pause after recording is added to
the most recently recorded clip.
•You can insert up to 100 text memos per clip.
• Text memos cannot be added during loop recording, interval
recording and one-shot recording. When this function is not
available, pressing this button displays TEXT MEMO INVALID.
• Shot marks can be added also in the thumbnail display.
• The shot mark function is not available during loop recording,
interval recording and one-shot recording. When this function
is not available, pressing this button displays SHOT MARK
INVALID.
• Shot marks can be set or cancelled in playback pause mode
but not during playback.
• Shot marks cannot be set or deleted for video data created
in a single hot-swap recording session consisting of multiple
clips unless all the P2 cards that contain the video data
for the entire session are inserted. In clips that consist of
multiple clips like the one above, shot marks can be added
only to the first clip of video data.
ꢃ1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Normal and Variable Speed Playback
Normal speed playback
Press the PLAY/PAUSE button to view playback in the
viewfinder and on the LCD monitor in color. Connecting a
color video monitor to the VIDEO OUT connector or SDI
OUT connector will enable playback of color video.
The PLAY/PAUSE button can be used to pause playback.
Fast-forward/fast-reverse playback
The FF and REW buttons provide 32× and 4× fast
playbacks and fast reverse playbacks. In stop mode, this
function will play back video at 32× speed and in playback
mode, it will play back video at 4× speed.
Clip cue up
When playback is paused, the FF button locates the
beginning of the next clip while staying in pause mode.
When playback is paused, the REW button locates the
beginning of the current clip while staying in pause mode.
NOTE
• It may take some time to load clip data if playback is started
or a thumbnail screen is opened right after removing or
inserting a P2 card or turning the power on.The thumbnail
screen displays UPDATING at such times.
• If a P2 card is inserted while another P2 card is being played
back, the clips on the inserted P2 card will not be played
back. A P2 card inserted during playback will be recognised
after playback ends.
• If you perform variable speed playback on a clip split across
more than one P2 card, sound may disappear for a moment.
This is not a malfunction.
• To play back a clip in a different SYSTEM MODE, adjust
the SYSTEM MODE to the clip to reset the camera before
playback.
• Playback of the audio channels CH5 to CH8 recorded on
another device is not possible.
ꢃꢀ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording
Selecting recording signals
This camera records HD (1080i, 720P) signals using AVC-Intra or DVCPRO HD codecs and use a combination of
DVCPRO50, DVCPRO or DV codecs for recording SD (480i) signals.
It provides a variety of capture frame rates and recording frame rates (native recording) to suit specific applications.
Select recording and recording signal in the setting menus listed below.
Screen
Setting menu
SYSTEM MODE
REC SIGNAL
Setting
Selects the 1080i, 720P or 480i signal format.
To change this setting, wait until TURN POWER OFF appears before
turning the power off and then turn it back on again.
Selects to record using this camera or from the DVCPRO/DV connector.
Selects AVC-Intra or DVCPRO HD codec and 60i, 60P, 30PN or 24PN
native recording in HD mode.
SYSTEM SETUP screen
REC FORMAT
Selects DVCPRO50, DVCPRO or DV codec in SD mode.
Selects 60i, 30P, 24P or 24PA pulldown recording in 1080i or 480i mode.
Selects the video aspect ratio for recording and output in SD mode (480i).
Setting this function to ON in 720P mode starts variable frame rate capture
which records at the frame rate set in the FRAME RATE option.
For details, refer to [Variable Frame Rate (VFR) Recording] (page 35)
When the VFR option is set to ON, select the frame rate for variable frame
rate recording.
CAMERA MODE
ASPECT CONV
VFR
SCENE FILE screen
FRAME RATE
NOTE
• Changing the menu options SYSTEM MODE, REC SIGNAL, REC FORMAT and CAMERA MODE may distort video and audio, but
this is not a malfunction.
ꢃꢂ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
List of recording formats and functions
The table below lists the recording formats and recording functions that the camera supports.
Camera recording modes (When the menu option REC SIGNAL is set to CAMERA)
Setting
Recording function
FRAME
RATE
[FRAME]
Recording format *1
Recording time *2
SYSTEM
MODE
CAMERA
MODE
PRE
PROXY
INTERVAL,
LOOP
REC
REC FORMAT
VFR
REC (optional) ONE SHOT
AVC-I 100/60i
(AVC-I 50/60i)
1080/60i
Approx. 64 min.
(Approx. 128 min.)
AVC-I 100/30PN
(AVC-I 50/30PN)
1080/30PN
Native
AVC-I 100
(AVC-I 50)
Disabled
–
–
–
–
AVC-I 100/24PN
(AVC-I 50/24PN)
1080/24PN
Native
Approx. 80 min.
(Approx. 160 min.)
–
–
–
–
1080-59.94i
60i
Disabled
Disabled
1080/60i
1080/30P Over60i
2:2 Pull Down
30P
DVCPRO HD/60i
DVCPRO HD
Approx. 64 min.
1080/24P Over60i
2:3 Pull Down
1080/24PA Over60i
2:3:3:2 Pull Down
24P
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
24PA
OFF
ON
Disabled
12-60
–
–
–
–
AVC-I 100/60P
(AVC-I 50/60P)
Approx. 64 min.
(Approx. 128 min.)
720/60P
OFF
Disabled
30
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
720/30PN Native
AVC-I 100/30PN
(AVC-I 50/30PN)
Approx. 128 min.
(Approx. 256 min.)
720/30PN Native VFR
(Audio cannot be
recorded)
ON
OFF
ON
Other than
30
AVC-I 100
(AVC-I 50)
–
–
–
–
Disabled
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
720/24PN Native
AVC-I 100/24PN
(AVC-I 50/24PN)
Approx. 160 min.
(Approx. 320 min.)
720/24PN Native VFR
(Audio cannot be
recorded)
Other than
24
–
–
–
–
OFF
Disabled
60
720/60P
–
–
–
–
720/30P Over60P
2:2 Pull Down
720/24P Over60P
2:3 Pull Down
720-59.94P
Disabled
30
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
DVCPRO HD/60P
Approx. 64 min.
ON
Other than
above
720/60P VFR
OFF
ON
Disabled
30
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
DVCPRO HD
720/30PN Native
DVCPRO HD/30PN
DVCPRO HD/24PN
Approx. 128 min.
Approx. 160 min.
Approx. 128 min.
720/30PN Native VFR
(Audio cannot be
recorded)
Other than
30
–
–
–
–
OFF
ON
Disabled
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
720/24PN Native
720/24PN Native VFR
(Audio cannot be
recorded)
480/60i
480/30P Over60i
2:2 Pull Down
480/24P Over60i
2:3 Pull Down
480/24PA Over60i
2:3:3:2 Pull Down
Other than
24
–
–
–
–
60i
30P
DVCPRO 50/60i
DVCPRO/60i
DV/60i
DVCPRO50
480-59.94i
Disabled
Disabled
DVCPRO*3 Approx. 256 min. *3
24P
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
DV*4
Approx. 256 min. *4
24PA
*1 24P and 30P indicate recording at 23.98P and 29.97P, respectively, while 60P and 60i indicate recording at 59.94P and
59.94i, respectively. Native mode records active frames only.
*2 Recording times are indicated for a single 64 GB P2 card. Two cards double the recording time.
Since native VFR mode records only active frames, the recording time and actual shooting time differ.
Example: In 24PN recording, shooting at a frame rate of 60 frames will result in a shooting time of 24/60 (0.4 times).
In 24PN recording, shooting at a frame rate of 12 frames will result in a shooting time of 24/12 (2 times).
*3 For DVCPRO/60i
*4 For DV/60i
ꢃꢃ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1394 input recording mode (when the REC SIGNAL option is set to 1394)
Setting
Recording function
Recording
time *2
FRAME
RATE
[FRAME]
Recording format *1
SYSTEM
MODE
REC
FORMAT
CAMERA
MODE
PRE
REC (optional)
PROXY
INTERVAL,
ONE SHOT
LOOP
REC
VFR
1080-59.94i
720-59.94P
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled Disabled Disabled 1080/60i
Disabled Disabled Disabled 720/60P
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
Approx. 64
min.
Approx. 128
min.
Approx. 256
min.
DVCPRO HD
DVCPRO50
DVCPRO50/60i
−
−
−
−
480-59.94i
Disabled Disabled Disabled
480/60i
DVCPRO/60i
DV/60i
DVCPRO
DV
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
*1 60P and 60i is recorded at 59.94P and 59.94i, respectively.
*2 Recording times are indicated for a single 64 GB P2 card. Two cards double the recording time.
Recording settings and recording function table
The recording modes of the camera can be made to operate as described below using the setting menus.
Recording setting
Enabled and disabled functions and operations
Proxy
recording
(Thumbnail
menu)
Operating
mode
REC
REC REC FORMAT,
VFR PRE REC
(MENU) function
1394
TEXT
SHOT
SIGNAL FUNCTION CAMERA MODE
(MENU)
output MEMO MARK
(MENU)
(MENU)*5
(optional)
Recording via
1394 input
INTERVAL REC
Disabled
(enabled at 480i)
1394
Disabled
INTERVAL
ONE SHOT
LOOP
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
(Enabled at
Disabled
ONE SHOT REC
60i, 60P, 30P only
24PN, 30PN
playback *3
Enabled *3
Disabled
)
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
LOOP REC
Native VFR
Native recording
(VFR OFF)
Standard VFR
Standerd
Disabled*4
ON
OFF
ON
CAMERA
(Enabled at
playback *3
Enabled *3
)
NORMAL
Enabled
Enabled
Other than 24PN and
30PN
recording
OFF
Enabled
Enabled *3
(VFR OFF)
*3 DV/DVCPRO only. Disabled in AVC-Intra mode.
*4 Enabled in PAUSE mode after LOOP REC.
*5 24P and 30P indicate recording at 23.98P and 29.97P, respectively, while 60P and 60i indicate recording at 59.94P and
59.94i, respectively. Native mode records active frames only.
Selecting video output
The table below lists available video output formats.
Use the setting menus listed below to select video output.
Setting menu
Setting
SDI SELECT
(OUTPUT SEL screen)
Select the signal format (from AUTO, 1080i, 480i) to be output via
the SDI OUT connector *6.
Select the setup level for the signal (composite) output via the VIDEO OUT connector.
0%: 0% setup level for both output and recording
7.5%A: 7.5% setup level for output only (0% for recording)
The SETUP menu setting is enabled also during playback.
Select the screen type for down-converted output (VIDEO OUT and SDI SELECT output
as 480i) of HD mode (1080i, 720P).
SETUP
(SYSTEM SETUP screen)
DOWNCON MODE
(OUTPUT SEL screen)
*6 HD (1080i, 720P) output cannot display thumbnails and SDI OUT outputs black screen.
ꢃꢄ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
List of recording, playback and output formats
Camera recording mode (when the REC SIGNAL option is set to CAMERA)
Setting
SDI OUT *2
FRAME
RATE
[FRAME]
Recording format *1
1394 output
SYSTEM
MODE
REC
FORMAT
CAMERA
MODE
VFR
Video format
Audio
AVC-I 100/60i
(AVC-I 50/60i)
1080/60i
1080-59.94i
AVC-I 100/30PN
(AVC-I 50/30PN)
1080/30PN
Native
AVC-I 100
(AVC-I 50)
1080-29.97PsF
Over59.94i 2:2
Disabled
4ch
No output
AVC-I 100/24PN
(AVC-I 50/24PN)
1080/24PN
Native
1080-23.98PsF
Over59.94i 2:3
1080-59.94i
60i
Disabled
Disabled
1080/60i
1080-59.94i
1080/30P Over60i
2:2 Pull Down
1080/24P Over60i
2:3 Pull Down
1080/24PA Over60i
2:3:3:2 Pull Down
1080-29.97PsF
Over59.94i 2:2
1080-23.98PsF
Over59.94i 2:3
1080-23.98PsF
Over59.94i 2:3:3:2
30P
1080-59.94i
DVCPRO HD
DVCPRO HD/60i
DVCPRO HD
4ch
4ch
24P
24PA
OFF
ON
Disabled
12-60
720-59.94P
AVC-I 100/60P
(AVC-I 50/60P)
720/60P
720-59.94P VFR
OFF
Disabled
30
Other than
30
Disabled
24
Other than
24
720-29.97P
720/30PN Native
4ch
Muted
4ch
Over59.94P 2:2
AVC-I 100/30PN
(AVC-I 50/30PN)
ON
OFF
ON
AVC-I 100
(AVC-I 50)
720/30PN Native VFR
(Audio cannot be recorded)
No output
720-59.94P VFR
720-23.98P
Over59.94P 2:3
720/24PN Native
AVC-I 100/24PN
(AVC-I 50/24PN)
720/24PN Native VFR
(Audio cannot be recorded)
720-59.94P VFR
720-59.94P
Muted
OFF
Disabled
60
720/60P
720/30P Over60P
2:2 Pull Down
720/24P Over60P
2:3 Pull Down
720-29.97P
720-59.94P
Disabled
30
24
720-59.94P
DVCPRO HD
Over59.94P 2:2
DVCPRO HD/60P
ON
720-23.98P
Over59.94P 2:3
4ch
Other than
above
Disabled
30
720/60P VFR
720-59.94P VFR
DVCPRO HD
OFF
ON
720-29.97P
Over59.94P 2:2
720/30PN Native
DVCPRO HD/30PN
DVCPRO HD/24PN
Other than
30
Disabled
24
Other than
24
720/30PN Native VFR
720-59.94P VFR
Muted
4ch
(Audio cannot be recorded)
No output *4
OFF
ON
720-23.98P
Over59.94P 2:3
720/24PN Native
720/24PN Native VFR
(Audio cannot be recorded)
720-59.94P VFR
480-59.94i
Muted
60i
480/60i
480/30P Over60i
2:2 Pull Down
480/24P Over60i
2:3 Pull Down
480/24PA Over60i
2:3:3:2 Pull Down
480-29.97PsF
Over59.94i 2:2
480-23.98PsF
Over59.94i 2:3
480-23.98PsF
Over59.94i 2:3:3:2
30P
480-59.94i
DVCPRO50
DVCPRO*5
DV*6
DVCPRO50/60i
DVCPRO/60i
DV/60i
DVCPRO50
DVCPRO*5
DV*6
4ch or
2ch*3
480-59.94i
Disabled
Disabled
24P
24PA
*1 24P and 30P indicate recording at 23.98P and 29.97P, respectively, while 60P and 60i indicate recording at 59.94P and
59.94i, respectively. Native mode records active frames only.
*2 Varies with SDI SELECT option. In the table above the SDI SELECT option is set to AUTO.
AUTO: depends on SYSTEM MODE
1080i: outputs 1080i also when the SYSTEM MODE is 720P.
480i: outputs as 480i at all times
*3 Uses a 4ch setting for DVCPRO50 and observes the 2CH or 4CH setting in the menu option 25M REC CH SEL in the
AUDIO SETUP screen for DVCPRO and DV.
*4 Outputs 720-59.94P DVCPRO HD during playback.
*5 For DVCPRO/60i
*6 For DV/60i
NOTE
VIDEO OUT outputs SD signals (480i) at all times.
ꢃꢅ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1394 input recording mode (when the REC SIGNALoption is set to 1394)
Setting
SDI OUT *2
FRAME
RATE
[FRAME]
Recording format *1
SYSTEM
MODE
REC
FORMAT
CAMERA
MODE
VFR
Video format
Audio
1080-59.94i
720-59.94P
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled Disabled Disabled 1080/60i
Disabled Disabled Disabled 720/60P
1080-59.94i
720-59.94P
4ch
4ch
DVCPRO HD
DVCPRO50/60i
DVCPRO/60i
DV/60i
DVCPRO50
DVCPRO
DV
4ch
2ch
2ch or 4ch*3
480-59.94i
Disabled Disabled Disabled 480/60i
480-59.94i
*1 60P and 60i is recorded at 59.94P and 59.94i, respectively.
*2 Varies with the SDI SELECT option. The table above shows operating conditions when the SDI SELECT option is set to
AUTO.
AUTO: depends on SYSTEM MODE
1080i: outputs 1080i also when the SYSTEM MODE is 720P.
480i: outputs as 480i at all times
*3 32 kHz 4ch input is converted and recorded at 48 kHz 4ch.
ꢃꢆ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting the White Balance and Black Balance
To record high-quality video with the AG-HPX300P, the
black and white balances must be adjusted according to
conditions.
For higher quality, it is recommended that the adjustments
should be made in this order AWB (white balance
adjustment) ABB (black balance adjustment) AWB
(white balance adjustment).
ꢁ
3
Placeꢁaꢁwhiteꢁpatternꢁatꢁaꢁpointꢁwhereꢁtheꢁlightꢁ
conditionsꢁmatchꢁthoseꢁforꢁtheꢁlightꢁsourceꢁofꢁ
theꢁsubject.ꢁThenꢁzoom-inꢁonꢁtheꢁwhiteꢁpatternꢁ
soꢁthatꢁwhiteꢁcolourꢁappearsꢁinꢁtheꢁscreen.
• A white object (cloth or wall) may be used instead
of a white pattern. The illustration below shows the
required size for the white space.
Adjusting the White Balance
Whenever light conditions change, the white balance must
be readjusted.
To adjust the white balance, follow the steps below.
NOTE
• Do not point the camera at a high-brightness area.
• The white object must appear at the center of the
screen.
1/ꢂꢁorꢁmoreꢁofꢁtheꢁscreenꢁinꢁwidth
1/ꢂꢁorꢁmoreꢁofꢁtheꢁ
screenꢁinꢁheight
ꢁ
ꢁ
Adjustꢁtheꢁlensꢁiris.
4
5
6
• Use the YGET function (for details, refer to
page 53) and adjust the iris to a approximately
70% of incoming light.
a
b
c d e
TurnꢁtheꢁAUTOꢁW/BꢁBALꢁswitchꢁtowardꢁAWBꢁ
andꢁreleaseꢁit.
a
ND FILTER control
This control adjusts the amount of light entering the
MOS sensor.
• The switch returns to the central position with the
white balance automatically adjusted.
b
c
AUTO W/B BAL switch
Use for automatic control of white balance.
ꢁ
Duringꢁanꢁadjustment,ꢁtheꢁviewfinderꢁdisplaysꢁ
theꢁfollowingꢁmessage:
GAIN selector switch
Normally set to 0 dB. If this is too dark, adjust gain as
necessary.
AWB Ach ACTIVE
d
e
OUTPUT selector switch
Set to CAM.
WHITE BAL switch
Set to A or B.
ꢁ
7
Theꢁadjustmentꢁwillꢁtakeꢁeffectꢁinꢁaꢁfewꢁ
seconds,ꢁandꢁtheꢁfollowingꢁmessageꢁwillꢁ
appear:
• The adjusted value is automatically stored in the
selected memory (A or B).
ꢁ
ꢁ
SetꢁtheꢁGAIN,ꢁOUTPUTꢁandꢁWHITEꢁBALꢁ
switches.
1
AWB
A
OK 3.2K
AdjustꢁtheꢁNDꢁFILTERꢁcontrolꢁaccordingꢁtoꢁtheꢁ
lightꢁconditions.
2
• “C TEMP+7” to “C TEMP-7” will appear when
COLOR TEMP of the scene file is set to the value
other than 0.
For examples of ND FILTER adjustments, see
[Shooting and Recording/Playback Functions
Section] (page 18).
ꢃꢇ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cancelling auto tracking white balance
ꢁ
8
Ifꢁtheꢁsubject’sꢁcolourꢁtemperatureꢁisꢁlowerꢁ
thanꢁꢀꢂ00Kꢁorꢁhigherꢁthanꢁꢈꢈ00Kꢁtheꢁfollowingꢁ
messageꢁappears:
Press the USER button to which ATW was assigned a
second time or change the WHITE BAL switch position. If
ATW was assigned to the WHITE BAL switch B, the USER
button cannot be used to cancel the function.
• If the arrow points down () the actual colour
temperature is lower than the temperature
indicated. If the arrow points up () the actual
temperature is higher than the temperature
indicated.
NOTE
This function does not provide a 100% accurate white balance.
The tracking performance relative to changes in ambient
lighting and white balance performance have been given a
degree of latitude.
AWB
A
OK 2.3K
Adjusting the Black Balance
When you have no time to adjust the
white balance
Position the WHITE BAL switch at PRST.
• Turning the AUTO W/B BAL switch to AWB toggles the
color temperature between 3200K and 5600K.
The black balance must be adjusted when:
• You use your AG-HPX300P the first time.
• Your AG-HPX300P has not been used for some time.
• The ambient temperature has changed substantially.
• The gain switchover value has been changed.
• The menu options SYSTEM MODE and REC FORMAT in
the SYSTEM SETUP screen.
When the white balance has not been
automatically adjusted
When the white balance has not been successfully
adjusted, the viewfinder displays an error message.
Adjust the black balance before shooting to ensure
optimum video quality.
Error message
Description
AWB Ach
The color temperature is too high or
too low.
There is insufficient light.
There is too much light.
(or Bch) NG
LOW LIGHT
LEVEL OVER
Viewfinder displays related to white
balance
See [Viewfinder Screen Status Displays] (page 65).
Setting auto tracking white balance (ATW)
a
b
This camera is equipped with an auto tracking white
balance (ATW) function that automatically adjusts the white
balance of images in accordance with lighting conditions.
The ATW function can be assigned to the WHITE BAL
switch B by setting the menu option ATW in the SW MODE
screen to B ch.
a
b
AUTO W/B BAL switch
Use for automatic control of white balance.
OUTPUT selector switch
Set to CAM.
It can also be assigned to the USER MAIN, USER1, USER2
buttons.
For details, refer to [Assigning functions to USER buttons]
(page 53).
ꢁ
ꢁ
TiltꢁtheꢁAUTOꢁW/BꢁBALꢁswitchꢁsoꢁthatꢁitꢁisꢁ
positionedꢁatꢁ[ABB],ꢁthenꢁreleaseꢁit.
1
• The switch returns to the central position with the
black balance automatically adjusted.
SW MODE
LOW GAIN
MID GAIN
HIGH GAIN
ATW
0dB
6dB
Duringꢁadjustment,ꢁtheꢁviewfinderꢁdisplaysꢁtheꢁ
followingꢁmessage:
2
9dB
Bch
ATW TYPE
W.BAL.PRESET
USER MAIN
USER1
1
3.2K
ABB ACTIVE
DRS
REC REVIEW
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
NOTE
Duringꢁadjustment,ꢁtheꢁlensꢁirisꢁautomaticallyꢁ
becomesꢁCLOSE.
ꢃꢈ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ꢁ
3
Theꢁadjustmentꢁwillꢁtakeꢁeffectꢁinꢁaꢁfewꢁsecondsꢁ
andꢁtheꢁfollowingꢁmessageꢁwillꢁappear:
ABB END
• The adjusted value is automatically stored in the
memory.
NOTE
• Ensure that the lens connector is connected and the lens iris
is CLOSE.
• During a black balance adjustment, light is automatically cut
off.
• ABB NG appears when the lens connector has come loose.
• Black balance adjustment is not available during recording.
• Pressing the REC button during ABB adjustment will not
start recording on a P2 card.
ꢄ0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting the Electronic Shutter
Viewfinder displays relating to the shutter
See [Vie wfinder Screen Status Displays] (page 65).
Setting the Shutter Mode and
Speed
Placing the Camera-recorder in
SYNCHRO SCAN Mode
ꢁ
1
PressꢁtheꢁSHUTTERꢁswitchꢁpositionedꢁatꢁOFFꢁ
towardsꢁON.
To place the camera-recorder in SYNCHRO SCAN mode,
follow the steps below.
ꢁ
1
PressꢁtheꢁSHUTTERꢁswitchꢁpositionedꢁatꢁONꢁ
towardsꢁSEL,ꢁtoꢁplaceꢁtheꢁcamera-recorderꢁinꢁ
SYNCHROꢁSCANꢁ(S/S)ꢁmode.
SHUTTERꢁswitch
ꢁ
2
PressꢁtheꢁSHUTTERꢁswitchꢁtowardsꢁ[SEL].ꢁ
Repeatꢁthisꢁswitchoverꢁuntilꢁtheꢁdesiredꢁmodeꢁ
orꢁspeedꢁappearsꢁinꢁtheꢁviewfinderꢁscreen.
• If all modes and speeds are available, the display
changes in the following order:
Forꢁꢅ0iꢁandꢁꢅ0Pꢁrecording
SHUTTERꢁswitch
SYNCHROꢁSCANꢁswitch
S/S (1/15) (1/30) 1/60 1/100 1/120
1/500 1/1000 1/2000
1/250
ꢁ
2
InꢁSYNCHROꢁSCANꢁmode,ꢁuseꢁtheꢁSYNCHROꢁ
SCANꢁswitchꢁtoꢁmakeꢁsteplessꢁchangesꢁinꢁtheꢁ
rangeꢁbetweenꢁ1/ꢅ0.0ꢁsꢁandꢁ1/ꢀꢃꢈ.ꢇꢁsꢁ(forꢁꢅ0iꢁ
mode).
Forꢁꢂ0Pꢁrecording
S/S (1/7.5) (1/15) 1/60 1/100 1/120
1/500 1/1000 1/2000
1/250
•ꢁꢁHoldꢁdownꢁtheꢁSYNCHROꢁSCANꢁswitchꢁtoꢁspeedꢁ
upꢁtheꢁrateꢁofꢁshutterꢁspeedꢁchanges.
ForꢁꢀꢃPꢁrecording
Ifꢁshutterꢁspeedꢁchangesꢁstopꢁbeforeꢁtheꢁdesiredꢁ
shutterꢁspeedꢁhasꢁbeenꢁreached,ꢁpressꢁagainꢁtoꢁ
continueꢁchangingꢁshutterꢁspeeds.
S/S (1/6) (1/12) 1/60 1/100 1/120
1/500 1/1000 1/2000
1/250
• The bracketed ( ) speeds cannot be selected
when VFR is ON.
Range of variation in each mode
• 60P/60i mode: 1/60.0 to 1/249.8
NOTE
• 30P/30PN mode: 1/30.0 to 1/249.8
• 24P/24PA/24PN mode: 1/24.0 to 1/249.8
• When the SYNC SCAN DISP option in DISPLAY SETUP is
set to deg: 3.0d to 359.5d
• In any electronic shutter mode, a slower shutter speed will
reduce camera sensitivity.
• In auto iris mode, a faster shutter speed will increase the
aperture and lower the depth of field.
• Changes in synchro scan and shutter speed settings may
cause screen flicker.
• Under fluorescent lighting and other discharge lighting
systems, horizontal stripes may appear on the screen.
Changing the shutter speed may correct this problem.
• A subject that is captured when moving quickly across the
field of view may appear distorted.This is due to the signal
read out format of the image sensor (MOS sensor) and is not
a malfunction.
• If SYSTEM MODE setting is changed, shutter speed may
also be changed.
SettingꢁtheꢁmenuꢁoptionꢁSYNCꢁSCANꢁDISPꢁinꢁtheꢁDISPLAYꢁ
SETUPꢁscreenꢁtoꢁdegꢁprovidesꢁaꢁguideꢁtoꢁsettingꢁandꢁ
displayingꢁshutterꢁangle.
• The red, blue and green dots that may appear on the screen
at low shutter speeds do not indicate a malfunction.
ꢄ1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FBC (Flash Band Compensation) Function
This camera-recorder comes with a function to compensate
for and minimize light band (flash band) interference
that occurs with the MOS imager when shooting in an
environment where flash photography is taking place.
NOTE
The following phenomena that may occur in video that
includes flash light is due to FBC compensation and not
indicative of a malfunction.
Timeꢁflow
• Moving subjects may appear to be stationary for an instant.
• Resolution decreases in video exposed to flash light.
• Horizontal lines appear in video footage exposed to flash
light.
Flashꢁlight
Using FBC
FBC goes on when the brightness of the lower half of the
image differs markedly from the previous half, which could
be caused by light from a camera flash or other strong light
source. Since FBC may be incorrectly activated in certain
shooting environments, for example, in zooming that includes
a bright window, be sure to use the function only for shooting
footage exposed to flash light.
Imageꢁrecordedꢁ
(FBCꢁoff)
Flashꢁband
Setting FBC function
Assign the FBC function to a USER button.
Press the USER button to which the FBC function has
been assigned to turn it on and automatically detect and
compensate for flash light from still cameras.
For details, refer to [Assigning functions to USER buttons]
(page 53).
In some shooting environments adequate FBC effect may not
be obtained even when a flash goes off.
FBC requirements
• The FBC function is available in the 1080/60i, 720/60P (VFR
OFF) and 480/60i modes when the shutter off.
• Switching to an operating mode other than 1080/60i, 720/60P
(VFR OFF) and 480/60i turns FBC off if on.
To turn on FBC after returning to 1080/60i, 720/60P (VFR OFF)
and 480/60i, press the USER button to which the function is
assigned.
• Turning the shutter on when the FBC function is engaged
temporarily turns it off.
The FBC function goes back on when the shutter is later
turned off.
• Turning the power off disengages the FBC function.
USERꢁMAIN,ꢁUSER1ꢁandꢁUSERꢀꢁbuttons
The status display indicates “FBC” when the FBC function
is on. *1
T C 1 2 : 3 4 : 5 6 : 2 3
1 2 1 9 9 9 min B 9 0%
P 2
L A C K
I - P A U S E U S E R - 1
C A C
F B C
1394
1 0 8 0 i
100
AVC-I
P 3 .2K
PROXY
0
dB
L T . BOX
ND 1
8 3% ND 1
F E B 2 5 2 0 0 8 2 3 : 5 9 : 5 9
6 0 : 2 4 P N
DR S
1/ 2 5 0
S PO T
F 5 . 6
CH 1
CH 2
= = = = = = = =
Z 9 9
*1 Not displayed when the menu option OTHER DISPLAY in
the DISPLAY SETUP screen is set to OFF.
ꢄꢀ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Assigning functions to USER buttons
The USER MAIN, USER1, and USER2 buttons can be
assigned user-selected functions.
• PC MODE:
Assigns a function that switches the USB
Use the menu options USER MAIN, USER1, and USER2 to
assign functions to respective button. Select these items
from the setting menu SW MODE screen.
device mode or the USB host mode on and off.
Switching the USB device mode and USB host
mode on and off is set by the menu option PC
MODE SELECT in the SYSTEM SETUP screen.
SW MODE
• WFM:
LOW GAIN
MID GAIN
HIGH GAIN
ATW
0dB
6dB
Assigns a function that switches WAVE FORM
display. The WAVE FORM display is selected
using the menu option WFM (page 128) in the
SW MODE screen.
12dB
OFF
ATW TYPE
W.BAL.PRESET
USER MAIN
USER1
1
3.2K
• FBC:
Y GET
BACKLIGHT
Turns the FBC function on or off.
NOTE
The default settings are listed below.
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
• USER MAIN:
• USER1:
• USER2:
Y GET
BACKLIGHT
TEXT MEMO
Selectable Functions
• REC REVIEW:
Assigns REC REVIEW.
• SPOTLIGHT:
Assigns auto iris control on/off for spotlight.
• BACKLIGHT:
Assigns auto iris control on/off for backlight
compensation.
• ATW:
Turns the ATW function on or off.
• ATW LOCK:
Pressing this lock during ATW operation locks
the white balance. Press again to start the ATW
function again.
• GAIN:24 dB:
Assigns a function that raises gain by 24 dB.
•Y GET:
• DRS:
Assigns a function that displays the brightness
level at the center of the image.
Assigns a function that stretches the dynamic
range. A function that magnifies the dynamic
range by compressing the video level in high-
brightness areas.
• TEXT MEMO:
Assigns text memory recording.
• SLOT SEL:
Assigns P2 card slot selection.
• SHOT MARK:
Assigns the shot marker function.
• MAG A. LVL:
Assigns a function that magnifies the audio level
meter.
• PRE REC:
Assigns a function that turns the PRE REC
function on and off.
ꢄꢂ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Selecting Audio Input Signals and Adjusting Recording Levels
This AG-HPX300P supports independent four-channel
audio recording in any format (HD or SD).
Use the AUDIO SETUP screen in the setting menu to make
detailed audio settings.
When the AUDIO SELECT CH1/CH2 switch is positioned
at [AUTO], the recording levels for Audio Channels 1
and 2 are automatically adjusted. To manually adjust the
recording levels, position the switch at [MAN].
A setting menu allows you set the recording levels for
Audio Channels 3 and 4 either to automatic adjustment or
manual mode.
AUDIO SETUP
FRONT VR CH1
FRONT VR CH2
MIC LOWCUT CH1
MIC LOWCUT CH2
MIC LOWCUT CH3
MIC LOWCUT CH4
LIMITER CH1
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
LIMITER CH2
Selecting Audio Input Signals
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
The input signals to be recorded on Audio Channels 1, 2,
3, and 4 are selected with the AUDIO IN switch. For more
information, see [Audio (input) Function Section] (page 16).
Adjusting Recording Levels
To adjust the recording levels for Audio Channels 1 and 2,
a
b
follow the steps below.
ꢁ
1
PositionꢁtheꢁMONITORꢁSELECTꢁCH1/ꢀ,ꢁCHꢂ/ꢃ-
selectorꢁswitchꢁatꢁCH1/ꢀꢁsoꢁthatꢁtheꢁaudioꢁlevelꢁ
meterꢁonꢁtheꢁdisplayꢁwindowꢁwillꢁprovideꢁCH1ꢁ
andꢁCHꢀꢁindications.ꢁEnsureꢁthatꢁtheꢁchannelꢁ
indicationsꢁdisplayedꢁinꢁtheꢁwindowꢁareꢁ1ꢁandꢁꢀ.
ꢁ
ꢁ
PositionꢁtheꢁAUDIOꢁSELECTꢁCH1/CHꢀꢁswitchꢁ
atꢁ[MAN].
2
Whileꢁcheckingꢁtheꢁaudioꢁchannelꢁlevelꢁmeterꢁinꢁ
theꢁdisplayꢁwindowꢁorꢁtheꢁaudioꢁlevelꢁmeterꢁinꢁ
theꢁviewfinder,ꢁadjustꢁtheꢁAUDIOꢁLEVELꢁCH1/
CHꢀꢁcontrol.
3
c d
e
a
b
c
d
e
AUDIO LEVEL CH1/CH2 controls
• Note that if the level exceeds the top bar (0 dB),
the word OVER illuminates to show that the input
level is excessive. Adjust so that maximum sound
levels do not reach the 0 dB bar.
AUDIO SELECT CH1/CH2 switch
MONITOR SELECT CH1/3, ST, CH2/4 selector switch
MONITOR SELECT CH1/2, CH3/4 selector switch
AUDIO IN switch
CH 1
CH 2
Your AG-HPX300P is factory-set to perform no recording on
Audio Channels 3 and 4 in the DVCPRO and DV formats.
To enable four-channel recording, the menu option 25M
REC CH SEL on the AUDIO SETUP screen must be set to
4CH.
OVERꢁindication
NOTE
Pressing the USER button to which the magnification of the
audio level meters (MAG A.LVL) has been assigned magnifies
the audio level meters.
For details on switch settings and the input system, see
[AUDIO IN switch] (page 16).
For details, refer to [Audio level meter magnification] (page 73).
NOTE
• The audio signals recorded on the four channels are output
as is (SDI).
ꢄꢃ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When operating the AG-HPX300P without a sound
recordist, it is recommended that the FRONT AUDIO LEVEL
control should be used to adjust the audio level.
In advance, check the level meter in the viewfinder screen
and use the FRONT AUDIO LEVEL control to adjust the
appropriate audio channel to prevent input of excessive
audio signals.
Selecting Function for the FRONT
AUDIO LEVEL Control
Use the menu options FRONT VR CH1 and FRONT VR
CH2 in the AUDIO SETUP screen to determine whether or
not the FRONT AUDIO LEVEL control should be enabled.
Selecting an input signal in the menu will enable FRONT
AUDIO LEVEL control operations for that input signal.
• When the FRONT AUDIO LEVEL control is set to level 10,
it controls AUDIO LEVEL CH1 and CH2.
AUDIO SETUP
FRONT VR CH1
FRONT VR CH2
MIC LOWCUT CH1
MIC LOWCUT CH2
MIC LOWCUT CH3
MIC LOWCUT CH4
LIMITER CH1
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
LIMITER CH2
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
CH3 and CH4 Recording Levels
Conditions and input levels set in the menu options AUTO
LEVEL CH3 and the AUTO LEVEL CH4 in the AUDIO
SETUP screen change the operation of the audio level of
channels 3 and 4 as shown below. These functions cannot
be manually adjusted.
Each option can be selected in the AUDIO SETUP screen.
Input level
AUTO LEVEL
CH3/CH4
LINE
MIC
ON
AGC* ON
AGC ON
OFF
AGC/LIMITER OFF
LIMITER ON
* AGC: Audio Gain Control
ꢄꢄ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Time Data
The camera provides time data such as time codes, user
bits, time of day (real-time) data, which is recorded on each
frame alongside video data. It is also recorded as as data
in clip metadata files.
Time data overview
Time code
Use the TCG switch to select Rec Run or Free Run mode.
• Free Run: The time code advances constantly whether
the camera is on or not just like time itself. Recording
using a slave-locked time code input to the TC IN or
DVCPRO/DV connectors is also possible.
• Rec Run: The time code advances only during recording.
This will enable continuation of time codes in previously
recorded clips and when the power is turned off or new
P2 cards are inserted to continue recording.
NOTE
The following events will disrupt time code continuity.
• When clips are deleted
• When a 24P or 24PA frame rate is selected
• When 24PN or 30PN is selected
• When a recording is interrupted by a REC WARNING or other
abnormality
User bits
• Two types of user bits are provided internally: (LTC UB:
recorded as LTC, output via the TC OUT connector
as LTC embedded in HD SDI) and VITC (in DVCPRO
recorded in the VIDEO AUX area and output as VITC
embedded in HD SDI).
• LTC UB enables the recording of user settings, time,
date, time codes and similar values, the frame rate data
for camera capture and external input values (via TC IN
or DVCPRO/DV connector input).
• VITC user bits record the frame rate data of camera
capture.
• The user bits in clip metadata record the LTC UB value at
the start of recording.
Date (real time)
• The built-in clock calculates the year, month, day and
time from the internal clock to display on video in the
LCD, viewfinder and VIDEO OUT and other video output.
• The internal clock is not only used to calculate the free
run time code when the power is off and to set the user
bit year, date and time, but also to set file creation dates
when clips are recorded that determine the order of
thumbnails and playback order.
• It is also used for generating clip metadata and UMID
(Unique Material Identifier).
For details, see [Setting Date and Time of Internal Clock]
(page 26).
ꢄꢅ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording time codes and user bits
System setting status
Recorded TC
Output TC
LTC and VITC
Displayed TC
Recorded UB
Output UB
LTC UB
TC tc
(24/30
conversion)
TC OUT
VITC UB
SYSTEM
REC
CAMERA FRAME
REC FORMAT
LTC
VITC
TC OUT
embedded in
HD SDI
LTC UB
VITC UB connector embedded embedded
MODE SIGNAL
MODE
RATE
UB *1
in HD SDI *1 in HD SDI
R-RUN/F-RUN *3
DF/NDF
30 frames
60i,
30P
—
DVCPROHD/60i
R-RUN/F-RUN*5
NDF locked
30 frames
24P, 24PA
—
—
—
TC: 30 frames
tc: 24 frames
Outputs
LTC UB
Outputs
LTC UB
Outputs LTC Outputs LTC
Follows UB
MODE.
AVC-I100/60i
AVC-I50/60i
AVC-I100/30PN
AVC-I50/30PN
R-RUN/F-RUN*3
DF/NDF
30 frames
Same as LTC
value
In ‘EXT’
Frame rate
data
Frame rate
data
CAMERA
slaves to
UB in TC IN
connector
1080
Recording
TC: 24 frames
Playback
Output
adjusted
to Over 60i to Over 60i
based on
LTC UB
Output
adjusted
-59.94i
Converted
Converted
to 30 frames
to 30 frames
based on
R-RUN/F-RUN*7
NDF locked
24 frames
AVC-I100/24PN
AVC-I50/24PN
—
—
—
—
based on LTC TC: 24 frames
tc: 30 frames
based on
LTC UB
LTC
Follows UB
MODE.
Records VAUX
TC in 1394
input at all
times*6
Records
R-RUN/F-RUN*2
DF/NDF
30 frames
TC: 30 frames
In ‘EXT’
VITC UB in
Outputs
LTC UB
Outputs
LTC UB
Outputs
VITC UB
1394
DVCPROHD/60i
Outputs LTC Outputs LTC
tc: 24 frames slaves to LTC 1394 input
UB in 1394 at all times
input
R-RUN/F-RUN*3
DF/NDF
Other than
24 frames
—
—
DVCPROHD/60P
AVC-I100/60P
AVC-I50/60P
30 frames
R-RUN/F-RUN*5
NDF locked
30 frames
R-RUN/F-RUN*4
DF/NDF
Every active
frame
30 frames
24 frames
30 frames
Outputs LTC Outputs LTC
TC: 30 frames
tc: 24 frames
Outputs
LTC UB
Outputs
LTC UB
—
—
—
—
DVCPROHD/30PN
AVC-I100/30PN
AVC-I50/30PN
Follows UB
MODE.
In ‘EXT’
slaves to
UB in TC IN
connector
R-RUN locked
DF/NDF
Every active
frame
30 frames
Matches
Matches
Same as LTC
value
Frame rate
data
Frame rate
data
recorder TC recorder TC
CAMERA
Other than
30 frames
at start of
recording
30 frames/s
at start of
recording
30 frames/s
720
-59.94P
R-RUN/F-RUN*7
NDF locked
Every active
frame
Converts
and outputs
LTC to 30
frames
24 frames
Ouputs LTC
Recording
TC: 24 frames
Playback
TC: 24 frames
tc: 30 frames
Output
Output
DVCPROHD/24PN
AVC-I100/24PN
AVC-I50/24PN
adjusted to adjusted to
24 frames
Over 60P
based on
LTC UB
Over 60P
based on
LTC UB
R-RUN locked
NDF
Every active
frame
24 frames
Matches
Matches
recorder TC recorder TC
Other than
24 frames
at start of
recording
30 frames/s
at start of
recording
30 frames/s
Follows UB
MODE.
Records VAUX
TC in 1394
input at all
times*6
Records
R-RUN/F-RUN*2
DF/NDF
30 frames
TC: 30 frames
In ‘EXT’
VITC UB in
Outputs
LTC UB
Outputs
LTC UB
Outputs
VITC UB
1394
DVCPROHD/60P
—
—
Ouputs LTC
Ouputs LTC
tc: 24 frames slaves to LTC 1394 input
UB in 1394 at all times
input
R-RUN/F-RUN*3
DF/NDF
Follows UB
MODE.
In ‘EXT’
slaves to
UB in TC IN
connector
60i, 30P
—
—
Same as LTC
value
30 frames
Frame rate
data
Outputs
LTC UB
CAMERA
R-RUN/F-RUN*5
NDF locked
30 frames
(but not for DV)
24P, 24PA
DVCPRO50/60i
DVCPRO/60i
DV/60i
480
-59.94i
TC: 30 frames
tc: 24 frames
Outputs LTC
No input
No input
No input
Follows UB
MODE.
In ‘EXT’
slaves to LTC 1394 input
UB in 1394 at all times
input
Records VAUX
TC in 1394
Records
VITC UB in
R-RUN/F-RUN*2
DF/NDF
30 frames
Ouputs
LTC UB
1394
—
—
input at all
times (No DV)*6
*1 When UB MODE is FRM. RATE, playback of native clips is the pulldown frame rate read from VITC UB.
*2 In free run mode, it is slaved to the value input to the DVCPRO/DV connector. It does not slave it to the time code from
the TC IN connector.
*3 In Free Run mode, it is slaved to the time code input to the TC IN connector.
*4 In Free Run mode, it is slaved to the time code input to the TC IN connector. But not slaved to it during recording.
*5 In Free Run mode, it is slaved when TC input to the TC IN connector is non-drop frame. But not slaved to it during
recording.
*6 VAUX TC is time code recorded in the video AUX area in the DVC format.
*7 In Free Run mode, it is slaved to the time code input to the TC IN connector, whose value is converted to 24 frames
when it was NDF 30 frames. But not slaved to it during recording.
ꢄꢆ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting user bits
Use the setting menu UB MODE on the RECORDING
SETUP screen to select the user bits to record in the
subcode area.
Entering the User Bits
The user bits allow information, including memos that use
up to eight-digit hexadecimal numbers (date and time), to
be recorded in the Subcode area.
•ꢁUSER:
b
a
Records internal user values.
To set user values, set the TCG switch to SET to open
the setting menu UB PRESET screen.
Set values are retained after the power is turned off.
See also [Entering the User Bits] (this page).
•ꢁTIME:
Records the time calculated by the internal clock.
•ꢁDATE:
Records the year, month and day time digits from the
internal clock.
•ꢁEXT:ꢁ
Records the user bits input to the TC IN connector.
Recording of 1394 input also records user bits input to
the DVCPRO/DV connector.
•ꢁTCG:
Records the time code value.
•ꢁFRM.ꢁRATE:
Records the frame rate information of camera capture.
A native recorded clip is played back at the same frame
rate as the VITC UB regardless of recorded values. Use
this setting when a PC or other editing device is to use
the user bit frame rate.
d
c
a
b
c
d
RESET button
COUNTER button
TCG switch
For details, see [Frame rate information recorded in
user bits] (page 59).
CURSOR and SET buttons
• To slave lock to the user bits input to the TC IN connector,
set to EXT.
ꢁ
ꢁ
SetꢁtheꢁCOUNTERꢁbuttonꢁtoꢁUB.
1
• In slave mode, the UB indicator is highlighted.
• A slave relationship, once started, continues even after
input from the TC IN or DVCPRO/DV connector ends.
Note that the following events release user bit slave
status.
PositionꢁtheꢁTCGꢁswitchꢁatꢁSET.
2
• When a UB MODE option is set to something other than
EXT.
• When UB PRESET is performed
• Switching to 1394 in the menu option REC SIGNAL in
the SYSTEM SETUP screen.
• Turning the power off.
The internal user value retains the slave values even after
slave release.
ꢄꢇ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Frame rate information recorded in user
bits
ꢁ
3
UseꢁCURSORꢁbuttonsꢁtoꢁsetꢁtheꢁuserꢁbits.
UB PRESET
The frame rate value of video data captured and recorded
at a frame rate set in the menu option FRAME RATE
or other options in the SYSTEM SETUP screen can be
recorded in the user bits and be used in editing equipment
(computer editing software).
This type of data is recorded in VITC UB at all times.
Setting the setting menu UB MODE to FRM RATE, records
the information also to the user bits.
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
+/- : PUSH
SEL : PUSH
/
/
PRESET : PUSH SET
In playback of clips recorded in native mode, the same
frame rate information as that obtained in playing back the
user bits in the VIDEO AUX area is also output to the user
bits in the subcode area.
q button: Shifts the target (highlighted) digit to the
right.
w button: Shifts the target (highlighted) digit to the
left.
Frame rate information
Frame rate, video pull-down and time code user bits are
related as described below.
e button: Increases the highlighted number by one.
r button: Decreases the highlighted number by
one.
SET button: Confirms the set user bits.
• Pressing the RESET button while setting the user
bits will reset any user bit setting to 0.
Verificationꢁ
Fixedꢁ
Mediaꢁmanagementꢁdata
•ꢁꢁUpdateꢁframeꢁflag,ꢁactiveꢁ
frameꢁflag
informationꢁon value
theꢁright-hand
sixꢁdigits
•ꢁRꢁ ECꢁmark
ꢁ
4
PressꢁtheꢁSETꢁbuttonꢁtoꢁconfirmꢁtheꢁuserꢁbitꢁ
value,ꢁandꢁpositionꢁtheꢁTCGꢁswitchꢁatꢁF-RUNꢁorꢁ
R-RUN.
SequenceꢁNo.ꢁꢀꢃP,ꢁꢀꢃPA:ꢁ0-ꢃꢁ
Otherꢁthanꢁabove:ꢁlockedꢁatꢁF
Cameraꢁcaptureꢁmode
Example:
NOTE
•ꢁꢁꢅ0i:ꢁꢅ00
•ꢁꢁꢅ0P:ꢁꢅ0ꢇ
•ꢁꢁꢂ0P:ꢁꢂ0ꢇ
•ꢁꢁꢀꢃP:ꢁꢀꢃꢇ
Changing the TCG switch setting without pressing the
SET button disables the set value.
•ꢁꢁꢀꢃPA:ꢁꢀꢃC
•ꢁꢁꢀꢃPN:ꢁꢀꢃCꢁ(recording)
•ꢁꢁP:ꢁꢈꢁ(ꢆꢀ0P/ꢂ0PNꢁorꢁꢅ0PꢁVFR)
•ꢁꢁP:ꢁDꢁ(ꢆꢀ0P/ꢀꢃPNꢁVFRꢁrecording)
ꢁ
5
OpenꢁtheꢁsettingꢁmenuꢁRECORDINGꢁSETUPꢁ
screenꢁandꢁsetꢁtheꢁmenuꢁoptionꢁUBꢁMODEꢁtoꢁ
USER.
Whenꢁ10ꢇ0iꢁorꢁꢃꢇ0i
Frameꢁrate:ꢁꢀꢃPꢁoverꢁꢅ0iꢁ(ꢀ:ꢂ)
First field of updated frame rate
Retaining the user bits
The data set for the user bits are automatically saved and
retained even if the video camera-recorder is turned off.
Time code digit
00 01 02 03 04 05 06
23 24 25 26 27 28 29
Video
Ao Ae Bo Be Bo Ce Co De Do De Ao Ae Bo Be
Co De Do De Ao Ae Bo Be Bo Ce Co De Do De
Sequence No.
0
1
2
3
4
0
1
3
4
0
1
2
3
4
Updated frame information
10 10 01 01 00 10 10
01 00 10 10 01 01 00
Frameꢁrate:ꢁꢀꢃPAꢁoverꢁꢅ0iꢁ(ꢀ:ꢂ:ꢂ:ꢀ)
Time code digit
00 01 02 03 04 05 06
23 24 25 26 27 28 29
Video
Ao Ae Bo Be Bo Ce Co Ce Do De Ao Ae Bo Be
Co Ce Do De Ao Ae Bo Be Bo Ce Co Ce Do De
Sequence No.
0
1
2
3
4
0
1
3
4
0
1
2
3
4
Updated frame information
10 10 01 00 10 10 10
00 10 10 10 01 00 10
ꢄꢈ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Frameꢁrate:ꢁꢂ0Pꢁoverꢁꢅ0iꢁ(ꢀ:ꢀ)
ꢁ
4
UseꢁtheꢁCURSORꢁbuttonsꢁtoꢁsetꢁtheꢁtimeꢁcode.
Time code digit
00 01 02
• Range of available time code settings:
00:00:00:00 to 23:59:59:29 (other than 24PN),
00:00:00:00 to 23:59:59:23 (24PN)
Video
Ao Ae Bo Be Co Ce
TC PRESET
REC RUN
Updated frame information
10 10 10
00 h 00 m 00 s 00
h
min
s
frm
/
ꢆꢀ0Pꢁmode
+/- : PUSH
SEL : PUSH
/
Frameꢁrate:ꢁꢀꢃPꢁoverꢁꢅ0Pꢁ(ꢀ:ꢂ)
Updated frame
PRESET : PUSH SET
Time code digit
00 01 02 03 04 05 06
23 24 25 26 27 28 29
Video
q button: Shifts the target (highlighted) digit to the
right.
w button: Shifts the target (highlighted) digit to the
left.
A A B B B C C D D D A A B B
C D D D A A B B B C C D D D
01 00 10 10 01 01 00
Updated frame information
10 10 01 01 00 10 10
e button: Increases the highlighted number by one.
r button: Decreases the highlighted number by
one.
Frameꢁrate:ꢁꢂ0Pꢁoverꢁꢅ0Pꢁ(ꢀ:ꢀ)
Time code digit
00 01 02
SET button: Use to confirm set time code value.
• Pressing the RESET button will reset any time
code setting to 0.
Video
A A B B C C
Updated frame information
10 10 10
ꢁ
5
PressꢁtheꢁSETꢁbuttonꢁtoꢁconfirmꢁtheꢁtimeꢁcodeꢁ
setting,ꢁandꢁuseꢁtheꢁTCGꢁswitchꢁtoꢁselectꢁaꢁtimeꢁ
code.
Setting the Time Code
• F-RUN steps the time code in free run mode, and
R-RUN set it in recording run mode.
ꢁ
1
SwitchꢁtheꢁmenuꢁoptionꢁTCꢁMODEꢁonꢁtheꢁ
RECORDINGꢁSETUPꢁscreenꢁtoꢁDFꢁorꢁNDFꢁ
usingꢁtheꢁmenus.
NOTE
• When 24P or 24PA is used, the time code is adjusted
every 5 frames. It is adjusted to multiples of four for
24PN and to even numbers for 720/30PN.The time
code cannot be set during recording.
• The set value is not valid if you change the TCG
switch position without pressing the SET button.
For details on menu operation, refer to [Using the
menus] (page 120).
• Select DF to advance time code in drop frame
mode and NDF in non-drop frame mode. Note that
24P, 24PA and 24PN are always recorded in NDF
mode.
Time code function during battery
replacement
Even during battery replacement the backup mechanism
keeps the time code generator functioning.
ꢁ
ꢁ
UseꢁtheꢁCOUNTERꢁbuttonꢁtoꢁswitchꢁtoꢁtimeꢁ
codeꢁdisplay.
2
NOTE
When the POWER switch has been switched ON OFF
ON, the backup accuracy of the time code in free run mode is
about 2 frames.
PositionꢁtheꢁTCGꢁswitchꢁatꢁSET.
3
ꢅ0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VFR (variable frame rate) time code
• At 24PN, recording is performed at 24 frames and output uses a 2:3 pull-down scheme to produce 30 frames.
• At a frame rate (capture frame rate) of 24P the speed of recording and the output time code matches actual time, but not
at any speed other than 24P. (Example: at 60P recording progresses at 60/24 speed)
• Then the camera operates in Rec Run mode and the time code output at start of recording matches the recording time
code.
• This is true also for frame rates other than 30P capture in 30PN mode
ꢀꢃPNꢁrecordingꢁatꢁꢅ0Pꢁcapture
Rec start
Rec stop
Rec start
Video output
0
1
2
3
22 23 24 25
58 59 60 61 62 63
67 68
Output time code
00:00
00:00
00:00
00:01
00:11
00:12
00:29
01:00
01:01
02:20
02:20
Skips
Recorded video
24/30
conversion
0
1
2
3
22 23 24 25
58 59 60 61 62 63
67 68
Recorded time code
00:00 00:01 00:02 00:03
00:22 00:23 01:00 01:01
02:10 02:11 02:12 02:13 02:14 02:15
02:16
02:16 02:17
ꢂ0PNꢁrecordingꢁatꢁ1ꢄPꢁcapture
Rec start
Rec stop
Rec start
Video output
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
14 14 14 14 15 15 15 15
20 20 20 20 21 21
Output time code
00:00
00:00
0
00:01
00:02
1
00:03
00:28
00:29
01:00
00:16
00:16
00:17
Skips
Recorded video
14
15
21
Recorded time code
00:00
00:01
00:14
00:15
00:16
00:16
ꢅ1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Example 2: Connecting two or more AG-
HPX300Ps with one another,
with one being used as the
reference device.
Externally Locking the Time Code
The time code generator built into your AG-HPX300P may
be locked to an external generator. It is also possible
to lock an external time code generator to the internal
generator.
Referenceꢁdevice
Connections for externally locking the
time code (examples)
As illustrated, both the reference video signals and the time
code must be input.
VIDEOꢁOUT
TCꢁOUT
TCꢁIN
GENLOCKꢁIN
VIDEOꢁOUT
Example 1: Locking the time code to
external signals
TCꢁOUT
TCꢁIN
Referenceꢁtimeꢁ
code
TCꢁIN
GENLOCKꢁIN
VIDEOꢁOUT
TCꢁOUT
Referenceꢁvideoꢁ
signal
GENLOCKꢁIN
NOTE
• Set the menu option TC VIDEO SYNCHRO to TC IN in the
OUTPUT SEL screen and the menu option GL PHASE to
COMPOSITE in the OTHER FUNCTIONS screen on both units.
• Setting TC VIDEO SYNCHRO in the OUTPUT SEL screen to TC
IN will supply the time code via TC IN to the next slave device
without delay.
NOTE
• In addition to an HDY reference signal, a composite video
signal can also be input as reference signal.
• Input composite video signals when the system mode is 480i
(SD) and 720P.
• The subcarrier in the VBS signal of the VIDEO OUT connector
of the camera cannot be externally locked.
• During HD-Y signal input in 720P system mode, GENLOCK
input for the video signal is applied but the time code is
delayed by 1 field.
To externally lock the time code
Follow the steps below.
• If the reference GENLOCK input signal becomes irregular
and recording cannot be normally performed, “TEMPORARY
PAUSE IRREGULAR FRM SIG” blinks in red in the viewfinder
and on the LCD screen and the current clip is divided.The
continuity of the time code cannot be guaranteed. Recording
resumes when the signal returns to normal. Recording
will not resume if interval, one-shot or loop recording is in
progress.
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
TurnꢁonꢁtheꢁPOWERꢁswitch.
1
2
3
4
PositionꢁtheꢁTCGꢁswitchꢁatꢁ[F-RUN].
SetꢁtheꢁCOUNTERꢁbuttonꢁtoꢁTC.
Supplyꢁaꢁphase-relationshipꢁreferenceꢁ
timeꢁcodeꢁ(thatꢁconformsꢁtoꢁtheꢁtimeꢁcodeꢁ
requirements)ꢁandꢁreferenceꢁvideoꢁsignalsꢁ
toꢁtheꢁTCꢁINꢁandꢁGENLOCKꢁINꢁconnectors,ꢁ
respectively.
ꢅꢀ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Now the built-in time code generator is locked to the
reference time code.
External synchronisation of the camera
when the time code is externally locked
When the time code is externally locked, the reference
video signals input through the GENLOCK IN connector
gen-lock the camera.
• When locked to an external time code generator, the
time code is at all times locked to the external time code,
which is displayed as a highlighted value on the counter
indicator. Do not engage the recording mode during the
few seconds it takes for the sync generator to stabilize.
• Once a slave relationship is established, the TC IN and
GENLOCK IN connectors stay in slave status.*
Note that the following events release slave status.
• When TC PRESET is performed
• When the REC SIGNAL option in the SYSTEM SETUP
screen is set to 1394.
• The power is turned off
• The time code mode is switched
• The TCG switch is set to R-RUN
NOTE
• To lock other devices externally to the AG-HPX300P, as the
master device, make sure that the other devices are in the
same camera mode as the AG-HPX300P. Note that if some of
the connected devices use interlaced scanning while other
devices use progressive scanning, there may be breaks in the
video and time code.
• When 24P, 24PA or 24PN (native) is selected and the time
code is externally locked, be sure to select a non-drop frame
time code.The time code cannot be externally locked when
drop frame mode is selected.When the time code is externally
locked, the video may be distorted, but this is because of
adjustment to 5-frame segments and not a malfunction.
• When REC FORMAT and CAMERA MODE have been
switched
* The slave function locks the time code to the TC IN
input and the device will use this time code even if time
code input should subsequently cease.
Outputting the time code externally
To output time code from the camera’s TC OUT connector
to a VTR or other recording device in sync with camera
picture or playback picture, set the setting menu TC VIDEO
SYNCRO (OUTPUT SEL) to VIDEO OUT.
Set the menu option GL SELECT to SDI or COMPOSITE
as required by supplied video output in the OTHER
FUNCTIONS screen and the menu option TC OUT to TCG/
TCR in the OUTPUT SEL screen.
Setting the user bits when the time code
is externally locked
To externally lock user bits, set the setting menu UB MODE
(RECORDING SETUP screen) to EXT.
Regardless of an F-RUN or R-RUN setting of the TCG
switch, the time code is slaved to user bit values input to
the TC IN connector.
For details, refer to [Setting Time Data] (page 56) and
[Setting user bits] (page 58).
AG-HPXꢂ00P
To unlock the externally locked time code
Discontinue external time code supply, then position the
TCG switch at [R-RUN].
Cautions in switching the power source
from battery to external power supply
TC OUT
SDIꢁOUTꢁꢁ
orꢁꢁ
VIDEOꢁOUT
Connect the DC IN socket with the external power supply
before removing the battery, in order to keep the time code
generator energized. If the battery is removed first, there is
no guarantee that the time code will stay externally locked.
TC IN
VIDEO IN
SDI IN
HD SDI IN
VTR,ꢁetc.
NOTE
When the setting menu TC VIDEO SYNCRO is set to VIDEO
OUT, the time code is output via TC OUT in tune with VIDEO
OUT delay.
ꢅꢂ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GENLOCK and time code input/output connection and setup
GENLOCK input and camera output phase
Camera operating conditions
Camera setup
(In phase: Out of phase: ×)
Video and reference
signal to be output GENLOCK input
externally
Recording
format
VIDEO OUT,
SDI OUT (SD)
GL PHASE SDI OUT (HD)
TC OUT
SDI OUT (1080i)
VIDEO OUT
SDI OUT (1080i)
VIDEO OUT
SDI
COMPOSITE 90H advance
SDI
COMPOSITE 90H advance
90H delay
90H delay
×
1080i
1080i
SD (480i)
SDI OUT (720P)
SDI
120H delay
720P
120H
advance
120H
VIDEO OUT
COMPOSITE
SDI
90H delay
×
720P
480i
SDI OUT (720P)
SD (480i)
VIDEO OUT
COMPOSITE
advance
SDI OUT (480i)
SD (480i)
Disabled
No output
VIDEO OUT
Counter Setting and Display
Pressing the COUNTER button to view the counter displays the counter value on the time code indicator in the LCD and in
the viewfinder. The counter value is indicated in “Hour : Minute : Second” format. The counter value is not displayed during
playback.
The menu option REC COUNTER in the DISPLAY SETUP screen can be set to display two types of counters.
TOTAL: provides a continuous count until reset by pressing the COUNTER RESET button. The counter value is retained
when P2 cards are replaced and when the power is turned off.
CLIP:
The counter is reset to 0 at the start of each recording and allows you to keep track of clip recording time while
shooting the current clip.
NOTE
• Pressing the RESET button when the counter value is displayed resets the counter to 0.
• The counter value indicates values in the range between 0:00:00 and 9:59:59 in 1-second steps.
ꢅꢃ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Viewfinder Screen Status Displays
In addition to video, the viewfinder shows messages
indicating camera settings and operating status, center
markers, safety zone markers, zebra patterns and other
indications.
Viewfinder Status Indication Layout
The illustration below shows the indications (except MODE
CHECK) that are displayed in the viewfinder.
T C 1 2 : 3 4 : 5 6 : 2 3
1 2 1 9 9 9 min B 9 0%
P 2
L A C K
I - P A U S E U S E R - 1
C A C
F B C
1394
1 0 8 0 i
100
AVC-I
P 3 .2K
PROXY
0
dB
L T . BOX
ND 1
8 3% ND 1
F E B 2 5 2 0 0 8 2 3 : 5 9 : 5 9
6 0 : 2 4 P N
DR S
1/ 2 5 0
S PO T
F 5 . 6
CH 1
CH 2
= = = = = = = =
Z 9 9
For more information, see the following pages:
Selecting Viewfinder Display
Information
To select items in the viewfinder screen, open the DISPLAY
SETUP screen and turn on or off each item or type.
Refer to the section [Using the menus] (page 120).
DISPLAY SETUP
EVF PEAK LEVEL
EVF PEAK FREQ
EVF SETTING
EVF B. LIGHT
EVF COLOR
0
LOW
>>>
NORMAL
ON
ZEBRA1 DETECT
ZEBRA2 DETECT
ZEBRA2
70%
85%
SPOT
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
ꢅꢄ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Screen displays
1
27 26
25
24
T C 1 2 : 3 4 : 5 6 : 2 3
1 2 1 9 9 9 min B 9 0%
P 2
L A C K
I - P A U S E U S E R - 1
2
3
4
23
22
21
C A C
F B C
1394
1 0 8 0 i
100
AVC-I
5
P 3 .2K
20
19
18
17
PROXY
6
7
0
dB
L T . BOX
ND 1
8 3% ND 1
F E B 2 5 2 0 0 8 2 3 : 5 9 : 5 9
8
9
10
11
6 0 : 2 4 P N
DR S
1/ 2 5 0
S PO T
F 5 . 6
CH 1
CH 2
= = = = = = = =
Z 9 9
12
13
14 15
16
1
Time code displays
• FR:
Frame rate information for recording
Each press of the COUNTER button displays (or turns
off) the indications listed below.
• (No indication)
• FR60I -: 60i interlace mode (60 fields/s)
• FR60P -: 60P progressive mode (60 frames/s)
• FR30P -: 30P progressive mode (30 frames/s)
• FR24P*: 24P progressive mode (24 frames/s)
• FR24PA*: 24P advanced mode (24 frames/s)
* In FR24P and FR24PA modes, the last digit contains
the frame conversion sequence information.
• Counter:
Counter value (during recording only)
• TC:
Time code value
TC* is indicated when the time code value
cannot be correctly read from DVCPRO/DV
connector input.
The colon between the seconds and the
frames changes to a period ( . ) in drop
frame mode.
NOTE
When TC, tc and UB are locked to TC IN input, the characters in
TC TC
their icons change to outline characters
.
When the HOLD button is used to temporarily freeze
indications, the HOLD indication blinks.
• tc:
Time code value (frame digits are indicated
in 24 frames)
2
Warnings
P2
•
:
Blinks when no P2 card is inserted or the
card is write protected.
tc* is indicated when the time code value
cannot be correctly read from DVCPRO/DV
connector input.
The colon between the seconds and the
frames changes to a period (.) in drop frame
mode.
P2
P2
•
FULL:
Blinks when there is no more space left on
the P2 card.
LACK:
•
•
Blinks in loop rec mode when there is not
enough space left on the P2 card.
Lights when the battery for the internal clock
is depleted.
• UB:
User bit values
UB* is indicated when the user bit value
cannot be correctly read from DVCPRO/DV
connector input.
:
For details, refer to [Charging the internal
battery] (page 150).
ꢅꢅ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
Backup unit displays
9
Calendar
Month:
• The following indications show the status of backup
units connected to the DVCPRO/DV connector.
• The following indications are not displayed when
the menu option 1394 CONTROL in the OTHER
FUNCTIONS screen is set to OFF.
JAN (January), FEB (February),
MAR (March), APR (April), MAY (May),
JUN (June), JUL(July), AUG (August),
SEP (September), OCT (October),
NOV (November), DEC (December)
Day of the month
• 1394 *: Recording
• 1394 h: Recording standby
Year: 2000 – 2037
Hours
Minutes
Seconds
• 1394
:
The backup unit cannot be controlled.
No backup unit is connected.
• 1394:
• 1394––:
mmm dd yyyy hh:mm:ss
A backup unit is connected but is not in
recording or recording standby status.
10 Recording/playback frame rate display
In native recording, the capture frame rate and
recording and playback frame rates are displayed.
Example: 60:24PN (recording 60P with the camera
frame rate set to a variable frame rate of
24PN)
4
Recording format and system frequency indication
• System mode
• 1080i
• 720P
• 480i
• Recording format
Playback applies a 2:3 pull-down to perform 24P over
60P, indicating that 24/60 speed slow playback is
performed.
In standard recording only the capture frame rate is
indicated.
(In 1080i, 720P system mode)
• AVC-I 100: AVC-Intra 100 format
• AVC-I 50: AVC-Intra 50 format
• DVCPRO HD: DVCPRO HD format
(in 480i system mode)
• DVCPRO50, DVCPRO, DV
Example: 24PA (recording 24PA using 2:3:3:2 pulldown
for over60i recording)
5
Information display
The following information is displayed depending on the
situation.
• Performance of auto white balance and auto black
balance
11 Audio level meter display
HEADꢁROOMꢁ atꢁ-ꢀ0ꢁdB
-20dB
0dB
CH 1
CH 2
• Warning and error indication
• Information on switch and button operations
For details, refer to [Center Information Display]
(page 69).
HEADꢁROOMꢁ atꢁ-1ꢇꢁdB
-18dB
0dB
CH 1
CH 2
By assigning MAG A. LVL (level meter magnification)
to a user button makes it possible to switch to display
magnification.
For details, refer to [Audio level meter magnification]
(page 73).
6
7
8
Proxy information display (optional)
This display provides information on proxy card errors
and time remaining in proxy recording on an SD
memory card.
Letter box recording display
12 Shutter speed
This display appears in the 480i recording format when
LETTER BOX is selected in the menu option ASPECT
CONV in the SYSTEM SETUP screen.
The shutter speed is displayed here.
In synchro scan mode, the display (time (minutes)
display or shutter angle icon display) made in the menu
option SYNC SCAN DISP in the DISPLAY SETUP screen
is used.
Y GET brightness display
When the Y GET function is used, the image level at the
center of the image is indicated in a range between 0%
and 109%
13 DRS display
This indicates operation of the dynamic range stretcher
function.
14 Iris display
Displays F values.
• NC appears when the lens connector is not
connected.
15 Auto-iris control displays
• SPOT: Auto iris control for spot light
• BACK: Auto iris control for backlight compensation
This indication also appears when the lens is set to
manual iris, but is not active.
ꢅꢆ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
16 Zoom position display
25 Media remaining memory display
Zoom positions are indicated in a range from Z00
(maximum wide angle) to Z99 (maximum zoom).
• Set the menu option P2CARD REMAIN in the DISPLAY
SETUP screen to ONE-CARD to display the remaining
time on the P2 card being recorded and show the
number of the slot it resides in on the left. TOTAL
displays the remaining time on both cards.
• In a mode check, ONE-CARD and TOTAL are
alternately displayed.
• This display does not appear while remaining memory
is calculated and when the camera is in USB device
mode.
• A mode check during loop recording displays the
standard recording time available to loop recording.
• Indicates remaining time in 1-minute increments
from 0 to 999 minutes. 999 minutes and longer time
periods are also indicated as 999 minutes
• The display blinks when 2 minutes or less time is left.
17 Recommended ND filter display
This indicates the most suitable ND filter to use under
current shooting conditions.
18 ND filter display
• This indicates the selected ND filter.
• An ND -- indication means that the ND FILTER switch
is incorrectly set (a position other than ND1 to ND4).
Check ND FILTER switch position.
19 Gain display
Indicates the gain value set using the video amplifier.
20 WHITE BAL switch position indication
Indicates the currently selected switch position and
also white balance operation when AWB is preset. In
ATW (Auto Tracking White Balance) mode, ATW is also
indicated and LOCK is displayed when the function is
locked.
26 Media information display
Indicates the slots that contain P2 cards and general
information on the media.
1
1
1
•
•
•
On:
21 FBC indication
P2 card ready for recording
lights green:
P2 card selected for recording
flashes:
The card is being recognized
Appears when the FBC function is engaged.
22 CAC indicator
Indicates that the chromatic aberration function of the
lens is operating.
-
•
•
•
•
•
:
:
:
:
:
No card inserted
Write-protected
Full
23 Scene file name display
Indicates the name of currently selected SCENE FILE
(F1 to F6).
P
F
X
E
Cannot recognize
24 Remaining battery charge
P2 card in an invalid format (formatting will
take care of this problem)
P2 card slot contains a PROXY card.
As the remaining battery charge drops, the display
changes as follows:
.
• o :
27 Recording and playback
When the battery is completely discharged,
) blinks.
(When the AC adapter is being used, a display
• REC:
• PAUSE:
Recording
(
Recording standby
Playback pause
Play
other than
malfunctioning.)
Batteries that indicate battery level in % (percent)
Such batteries indicate remaining battery level as
follows.
may appear: this is not a sign of
• h :
• q :
• y (t ) :
Fast-forward/fast-forward playback (fast-
reverse/fast-reverse playback)
• 4X y (4X t ) :
4x speed search
• CLIP hq (CLIP hw ) :
Clip forward (clip reverse), cue up of single
clips
In DISPLAY OFF, only REC display is shown at top
right. (Also displayed at top right, when pre-recording,
interval recording or one-shot recording is set.)
Specialꢁrecordingꢁdisplay
• B%: 10%~99%
Indicates the remaining battery level in %.
• MAX:
• EMP:
Indicates that the battery is fully charged.
Indicates that the remaining battery level
is less than 10%.
Batteries that do not indicate capacity in % (percent)
Such batteries indicate the battery level in voltages.
• 13.5 V: Indication of current battery voltage.
This display appears when the menu option REC
FUNCTION in the RECORDING SETUP screen is set to
INTERVAL, ONE SHOT or LOOP and when PRE REC is
set to ON.
• L – : LOOP (loop recording)
• I – : INTERVAL, ONE SHOT
• P – : PRE REC
ꢅꢇ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
•ꢁEXTERNAL1ꢂꢈꢃꢁDISCONNECT
Center Information Display
The following information displays (for details, refer to
This message appears when the menu option 1394
CONTROL in the OTHER FUNCTIONS screen is set to
EXT and recording is attempted without connecting an
external device to the DVCPRO/DV connector.
•ꢁFORMATꢁERRꢁ!
page 67) are provided.
P2 card recording and playback data
indications
This indicates a P2 card that does not meet the P2 card
standard
•ꢁINCOMPATIBLEꢁCARD
•ꢁBOS
This message indicates that the inserted card does not
meet required standards and cannot be used.
It may also appear when a proxy card is inserted when
the power is on.
Beginning of stream. No more data is available in the
rearward playback direction.
•ꢁCANNOTꢁPLAY
Appears when playback is disabled.
•ꢁCARDꢁERRꢁ(1)ꢁ(ꢀ)ꢁ(1/ꢀ)ꢁ:ꢁ
The number identifies the P2 card that is giving
trouble.
•ꢁUPDATING:ꢁReadingꢁcardꢁdata
•ꢁCANNOTꢁREC
•ꢁLOWꢁBATTERY
This message indicates that the battery is depleted.
•ꢁRECꢁWARNING
This is displayed during a recording error. Do the
recording over. If this does not solve the problem,
consult your supplier.
• CARD ERR (1) (2) (1/2): The number indicates the P2
card that is giving trouble.
Appears when recording cannot be started by pressing
the REC button.
•ꢁEOS
• Turn the power off if the warning continues.
• If the warning persists after rerecording, replace
the card with another card.
End of stream. No more data is available in the forward
playback direction.
•ꢁPREꢁRECꢁONꢁ(OFF)ꢁ(INVALID)
Appears when the user button to which pre-recording
has been assigned is pressed.
•ꢁSHOTꢁMARKꢁONꢁ(OFF)ꢁ(INVALID)
SHOT MARK appears when the user button or the lens
RET button to which it has been assigned is pressed.
•ꢁSLOTꢁSELꢁ(INVALID)
Appears when pressing the user button to which SLOT
SEL is assigned.
•ꢁTEXTMEMOꢁ(INVALID)
• ERROR: Other causes (This indicates that an attempt
was made to record 1000 or more clips on
one card, for example.)
• PULL DOWN ERROR: Video pull-down sequence
error in a mode such as 24P
• REC RAM OVERFLOW: Overflow of recording memory
•ꢁRUNꢁDOWNꢁCARD
This message indicates that a P2 card has been
overwritten the maximum number of times and that
normal recording cannot be guaranteed if operation
continues.
TEXT MEMO appears when the user button or the lens
RET button to which it has been assigned is pressed.
It is best to replace such P2 cards with a new card.
•ꢁSYSTEMꢁERROR
Errors and warnings
This message indicates that a system error has
occurred. This type of error can often be corrected by
turning off the power and turning it back on again.
• CAM MICON ERROR: The microprocessor in the
camera is not responding.
Errors and warnings appear when something goes wrong
with the camera or a P2 card malfunctions. If the problem
cannot be solved by turning off the camera and turning it
back on, try replacing the card and if that does not help, it
may be necessary to consult your supplier.
•ꢁꢁ1ꢂꢈꢃ
• P2 CONTROL ERROR: a P2 control error has
occurred.
This error occurs in a 1394 connection or when signal
faults occur.
• P2 MICON ERROR: The P2 microprocessor does not
respond
• 1394 INITIAL ERROR: a connection error
• 1394 INPUT ERROR: an input error
• 1394 INPUT ERROR (OTHER FORMAT):
(different input format)
•ꢁTEMPORARYꢁPAUSE
IRREGULARꢁFRMꢁSIG:ꢁ
This message indicates that input GENLOCK
reference signal is irregular and that recording
has been terminated.
• COPY INHIBITED:
This indicates that a copy-guarded signal
entered DV format input from the DVCPRO/
DV connector.
•ꢁTURNꢁPOWERꢁOFF
This message indicates that an abnormal event has
occurred, for example, that a card was removed during
access or that a system mode change was made.
Turn the power off and then turn it back on again.
•ꢁWIRELESSꢁRF
•ꢁDIRꢁENTRYꢁNGꢁCARD
This message indicates that the directory on the card
has become corrupted and that normal recording
cannot be guaranteed if operation continues. Make a
quick backup of card data and reformat the card.
This message indicates that reception from the wireless
receiver is poor.
ꢅꢈ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Camera status display
•ꢁABB
ABB indicator
•ꢁATWꢁACTIVE
Appears when the AUTO W/B BAL switch is set to AWB
and ATW is running.
•ꢁATWꢁ(ATWꢁLOCK)
Appears when the WHITE BAL switch is set to B and
ATW has been assigned.
•ꢁAUTOꢁKNEEꢁ(ON/OFF)
Displayed when changing the AUTO KNEE switch
position.
•ꢁAWB
AWB indicator
•ꢁAWBꢁPꢂ.ꢀK/AWBꢁPꢄ.ꢅK
Displays the color temperature assigned to PRST when
the WHITE BAL switch is set to PRST. Also displayed
when AWB is performed in the PRST position.
•ꢁBACKꢁLIGHTꢁ(OFF)
Displayed during iris control when back light status is
changed by pressing the user button to which BACK
LIGHT is assigned.
•ꢁDRSꢁONꢁ(OFF)
Displayed when DRS operation has been changed.
•ꢁGAIN**dB
Displayed when GAIN is switched.
•ꢁNDꢁNG
Displayed when the ND filter is not positioned correctly.
•ꢁSCENE******
Displays the name of a scene file selected by turning
the SCENE FILE dial.
•ꢁSHUTTERꢁ1/****ꢁ(OFF)
Displayed when the shutter speed is changed.
•ꢁSPOTꢁLIGHTꢁ(OFF)
Displayed during iris control when back light status is
changed by pressing the user button to which SPOT
LIGHT is assigned.
•ꢁFBCꢁONꢁ(OFF)
Displayed when FBC operation has been changed.
ꢆ0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking and displaying shooting status
• Hold down the DISP/MODE CHK button in recording
standby or during recording to display the settings of
each shooting function, the list of functions assigned
to USER buttons and all other information. Release the
button to return to the regular screen.
• Press the DISP/MODE CHK button during recording
standby or recording clears all displays. Press again to
return to the regular display.
• These settings are maintained when the unit is turned off
and also when switching media and operating mode.
• The following items can be displayed in the viewfinder
and on the LCD monitor by pressing the DISPMODE
CHK button or by configuring the menu option OTHER
DISPLAY in the DISPLAY SETUP screen.
DISP/MODEꢁCHKꢁbutton
Displays opened or hidden by settings in the
Displays that
MODE CHECK
brings up
Other menus that clear
OTHER DISPLAY option
Displays that DISPLAY
No
Displays
displays
–
: Not affected,
: Opens,
×: Clears
OFF clears
–
: Not affected
ALL
–
PARTIAL
OFF
–
–
1
2
3
Time code displays
Warnings
Backup unit displays
Is not cleared
Is not cleared
Is not cleared
–
–
–
–
–
–
CARD/BATT*1
–
–
Recording format and
4
5
6
×
–
×
–
×
–
–
–
–
system frequency indication
Information display
Proxy information
display (optional)
Is not cleared
Is not cleared
–
–
–
Letter box recording
display
7
–
–
–
–
Y GET brightness
display
Calendar
Recording/playback
frame rate display
8
9
Is not cleared
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Date/Time
–
10
×
11 Audio level meter display
–
–
–
×
×
×
×
–
LEVEL METER
12
13
14
Shutter speed
DRS display
Iris display
–
–
–
–
–
–
Zoom
15 Auto-iris control displays
16 Zoom position display
Recommended ND
17
×
×
×
–
–
–
filter display
18
19
ND filter display
×
Gain display
Does not indicate 0 dB
Displays only ATW.
WHITE BAL switch
position indication
20
LOCK, P3.2K and
P5.6K
×
–
21
22
FBC indication
CAC indicator
–
–
×
×
–
×
–
–
–
23 Scene file name display
Remaining battery
Goes on when battery
charge drops
Goes on when battery
charge drops
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
CARD/BATT
CARD/BATT
CARD/BATT
charge
Media remaining
memory display
25
Media information
Lights when SLOT SEL is
performed
×
Lights when SLOT
SEL is performed
26
display
×
Appears at top right
Appears at top right only
Recording and
playback
only during recording
and in special
27
during recording and in
special recording modes
–
recording modes
*1 Only the warning that a P2 card has not been inserted is not displayed.
ꢆ1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MODE CHECK indication
MODE CHECK provides an almost complete set of camera information.
Items 1 to 4 below are provided only by MODE CHECK.
4
T C 1 2 : 3 4 : 5 6 : 2 3
1 2 1 9 9 9 min B 9 0%
I - P A U S E D I ONC 1 6 0 U S E R - 1
C A C
P 2
L A C K
1394
S L O T 1 : NO T S U P POR T E D
S L O T 2 : P ROX Y
MA I N : S L O T S E L
1 0 8 0 i
100
1
2
AVC-I
A B B NG
AWB NG
P 3 .2K
3
1
2
: T E X T MEMO
: P R E R E C
PROXY
0
dB
L T . BOX
R E T : S HO T MA R K
8 3% ND 1
ND 1
F E B 2 5 2 0 0 8 2 3 : 5 9 : 5 9
6 0 : 2 4 P N
DR S
1/ 2 5 0
S PO T
F 5 . 6
CH 1
CH 2
= = = = = = = =
Z 9 9
1
P2 card slot status display
Displays status for P2 card slots 1 and 2.
• ACTIVE:
Indicates cards that are ready for read and write operations (includes cards selected for recording)
• ACCESSING:
Indicates a card that is currently read or being written to
• INFO READING:
Card in the recognition phase
• FULL:
No more space available on the P2 card
• PROTECTED:
The P2 card is write-protected.
• NOT SUPPORTED:
The P2 card cannot be used or recognized.
• FORMAT ERROR:
The P2 card is not properly formatted.
• NO CARD:
No card has been inserted.
• PROXY: (optional)
Proxy card
• No indication:
The camera is in the USB DEVICE mode
2
Information on user button and lens RET button assignment
Information to check what functions are assigned to user buttons and the lens RET button are provided in the following
sections.
For details, refer to [Assigning functions to USER buttons] (page 53).
For details, refer to [RET SW] (page 128).
3
4
AWB, ABB error display
A mode check indicates when AWB and ABB fail to operate normally.
Battery type
This indicates the battery type selected for detection of remaining battery charge.
ꢆꢀ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Center marker display
A center marker is displayed when the menu option
Audio level meter magnification
Press the user button to which MAG A. LVL has been
assigned to display a magnification of the audio level meter
(available also when LEVEL METER in the DISPLAY SETUP
menu is set to OFF).
MARKER in the DISPLAY SETUP screen is set to ON.
Press the button again to return to normal audio level meter
size.
Turning on MODE CHECK during audio level meter
magnification clears the audio level meter display. After
MODE CHECK use, the audio level meter reappears at
normal size.
NOTE
T C 1 2 : 3 4 : 5 6 : 2 3
1 2 1 9 9 9 min B 9 0%
The center marker display appears only on the LCD monitor
and in the viewfinder. It is not superimposed on signals output
via the VIDEO OUT and SDI OUT connectors.
P 2
L A C K
I - P A U S E D I ONC 1 6 0 U S E R - 1
1394
�
1 0 8 0 i
AVC-I 100
PROXY
P 3 .2K
L T . BOX
0
dB
Safety zone markers
ND 1
A safety zone marker is displayed when the menu option
SAFETY ZONE is selected in the DISPLAY SETUP screen.
• OFF: Not displayed
W.L. : CH 1
-30
-20
-10
0
dB
REAR : CH 2
• 90%: indicates the display area on a normal household
TV
2 1
3
4
5
1
2
Channel display
This displays the currently monitored audio channel.
Input system display
This displays the audio input system (AUDIO IN switch).
•ꢁFRONT
• 4:3: Indicates display area available at a 4:3 aspect ratio.
•ꢁW.L.ꢁ(WIRELESS)
•ꢁREAR
3
Standard level bar
This bar indicates a -20 dB or -18 dB headroom level
depending on the menu option HEADROOM setting in
the AUDIO SETUP menu.
• 13:9: Indicates the display area available at a 13:9 aspect
ratio.
4
5
Peak hold display
Holds the audio peak level indication for 1 second.
Excessive level indicator
An audio level that is set too high is indicated in red.
• 14:9: Indicates the display area available at a 14:9 aspect
ratio.
NOTE
• The safety zone is not displayed when 4:3, 13:9 or 14:9
is selected when SYSTEM MODE is set to 480-59.94i and
ASPECT CONV is set to SIDE CROP or LETTER BOX.
• Safety zone markers appear only on the LCD monitor and in
the viewfinder.They are not superimposed on signals output
via the VIDEO OUT and SDI OUT connectors.
ꢆꢂ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Zebra pattern display
The AG-HPX300P can display two zebra patterns.
Turning the ZEBRA switch on displays the zebra pattern
set in the menu in the viewfinder and LCD monitor. A menu
setting makes it possible to also display the zebra pattern
on video output via the VIDEO OUT connector.
OUTPUTSELꢁscreen
Item
Setting
Description
ON:ꢁ
Displays the zebra pattern
shown on the LCD monitor
and viewfinder of this
Specifies
whether or
not the zebra
pattern is
superimposed
on VIDEO OUT
signals.
camera also in video
VIDEO OUT output via the VIDEO OUT
ZEBRA
connector.
OFF:ꢁ
The zebra pattern is not
displayed in video output
from the VIDEO OUT
connector.
ZEBRAꢁswitch
Use the DISPLAY SETUP screen to set the level of zebra
pattern display.
Item
Setting
Description
Sets the level of the
right-leaning zebra
pattern 1.
ZEBRA1
DETECT
50%…70%…109%
Sets the level of the
left-leaning zebra
pattern 2.
Selects the ZEBRA2
type.
ZEBRA2
DETECT
50%…85%…109%
ON, SPOT, OFF
ZEBRA2
Underlined values indicate factory defaults.
SPOT: A video level between ZEBRA1 and ZEBRA2
displays a zebra pattern.
ZEBRA 2
Imageꢁlevel
ON
OFF
SPOT
109%
ZEBRA 2
DETECT
ZEBRA 1
DETECT
0%
To display a zebra pattern on video output via the VIDEO
OUT connector, make the required settings in the OUTPUT
SEL screen.
ꢆꢃ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Focus assist function
Pressing the FOCUS ASSIST button magnifies the image at
the center to facilitate focusing.
Set the menu option FOCUS BAR to ON in the DISPLAY
SET UP screen to display the FOCUS BAR.
FOCUSꢁASSISTꢁbutton
NOTE
This function magnifies only the image at the center of the
LCD monitor and viewfinder. It is not superimposed on signals
output via the VIDEO OUT and SDI OUT connectors.
EXPANDED:ꢁ(FOCUSꢁASSISTꢁbutton)
Trebles the size of the center of the image.
The status indication and the zebra pattern disappears
and EXPANDED appears at the top of the screen.
EXPANDED
EXPANDED
• The EXPANDED display is available only during
recording and does not work in external input mode.
NOTE
In VIDEO OUT and SDI OUT, the center of the image is not
magnified and status indications do not appear.
FOCUSꢁBAR:ꢁ(DISPLAYꢁSETUPꢁmenu)
The length of the bar indicates whether the image is in
focus.
The FOCUS BAR extends to the far right when the
image is in focus.
Outꢁofꢁfocus
Theꢁbarꢁextendsꢁtoꢁtheꢁ
rightꢁwhenꢁtheꢁimageꢁisꢁ
inꢁfocus.
ꢆꢄ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting and setting the LCD monitor
Using the LCD Monitor
ꢁ
4
UseꢁtheꢁsubscreenꢁinꢁtheꢁmenuꢁoptionꢁLCDꢁ
SETTINGꢁinꢁtheꢁDISPLAYꢁSETUPꢁscreenꢁ
toꢁadjustꢁscreenꢁcolorꢁlevel,ꢁbrightnessꢁandꢁ
contrast.
ꢁ
TurnꢁonꢁtheꢁPOWERꢁswitchꢁofꢁtheꢁAG-
HPXꢂ00P.
1
2
For details on menu operation, refer to [Using the
menus] (page 120).
• At LCD SETTING of the DISPLAY SETUP screen,
select CHANGE.
ꢁ
SlideꢁtheꢁOPENꢁbuttonꢁinꢁtheꢁarrowꢁAꢁdirectionꢁ
toꢁopenꢁtheꢁLCDꢁmonitor.
DISPLAY SETUP
MARKER
ON
90%
SAFETY ZONE
FOCUS BAR
ON
LCD SETTING
SELF SHOOT
LCD BACKLIGHT
SYNC SCAN DISP
DATE/TIME
RETURN
CHANGE
NORMAL
sec
OFF
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
ꢁ
5
UseꢁtheꢁJOGꢁdialꢁbuttonꢁtoꢁselectꢁanꢁitem.
LCD SETTING
LCD COLOR LEVEL
[ ]
[+]
[+]
[+]
LCD BRIGHTNESS
[ ]
NOTE
The LCD monitor opens to an angle of 120 degrees.
Attempts to open it further will damage the monitor.
LCD CONTRAST
[ ]
ꢁ
3
AdjustꢁtheꢁangleꢁofꢁtheꢁLCDꢁmonitorꢁforꢁmostꢁ
convenientꢁviewing.
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
• The monitor can turn up to 180 degrees towards
the lens and up to 90 degrees towards you.
ꢁ
6
PressꢁtheꢁJOGꢁdialꢁbutton,ꢁandꢁturnꢁtheꢁJOGꢁ
dialꢁbuttonꢁtoꢁadjustꢁtheꢁselectedꢁitem.
NOTE
LCD SETTING
To prevent camera-recorder failure, do not use force
when adjusting the monitor (when open).
LCD COLOR LEVEL
[ ]
[+]
[+]
[+]
LCD BRIGHTNESS
[ ]
LCD CONTRAST
[ ]
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
NOTE
• Pressing the RESET button when a value that can be
adjusted is selected in the setting menu LCD SETTING will
return the setting to its factory default.
• When closing the LCD monitor make sure that it is shut tight.
• In an environment with sudden temperature changes,
condensation may form on the liquid crystal surface of the
monitor. If this happens, wipe off the moisture with a soft, dry
cloth.
ꢆꢅ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• When a cloth is used to wipe dew or dirt off the LCD monitor,
discoloration may appear on the screen.This is not a
malfunction.The discoloration disappears in a few minutes.
• When the camera-recorder is very cold, the video image
in the LCD monitor will appear slightly darker immediately
after the power is turned on. Once the interior of the camera-
recorder warms up, the LCD monitor delivers normal
brightness.
• The image on the LCD monitor may remain if the battery or
the power plug of an external DC power supply is removed
when the camera is on.This is normal and not a malfunction.
This image will disappear if the camera is left idle.
• Image lag may increase at low temperatures, but this is not a
malfunction.
Self-portrait Shooting
When shooting with the LCD display angled 180 degrees
towards the lens, you can set the menu option SELF
SHOOT to MIRROR, to horizontally flip the video image on
the LCD display, and allow you to view a mirror image while
shooting.
Note that only the video image on the LCD monitor is
horizontally flipped, not the actual video being recorded.
This function clears any status display, waveform and
vectorscope display on the LCD monitor. Setting menus
and thumbnail displays are not flipped horizontally.
Waveform monitor function
Assign the WFM function to a user button and press that
user button to display a waveform for an image in the
LCD monitor. Another press of the WFM button closes the
waveform display.
• The menu option WFM (Page 128) in the SW MODE
screen allows you to switch between the waveform and
vectorscope displays.
• The waveform display does not appear in the viewfinder.
• The waveform display does not appear when the focus
assist (EXPANDED) function is used.
• The waveform display cannot be recorded.
ꢆꢆ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting and Setting up the Viewfinder
Adjusting Right and Left Viewfinder
Position
Using the Viewfinder
ꢁ
ꢁ
TurnꢁonꢁtheꢁPOWERꢁswitch.
1
ꢁ
ꢁ
Loosenꢁtheꢁviewfinderꢁleft-rightꢁpositioningꢁ
rings.
1
UseꢁtheꢁsubscreenꢁinꢁtheꢁmenuꢁoptionꢁEVFꢁ
SETTINGꢁinꢁtheꢁDISPLAYꢁSETUPꢁscreenꢁtoꢁ
adjustꢁscreenꢁbrightnessꢁandꢁcontrast.
2
Slideꢁtheꢁviewfinderꢁrightꢁandꢁleftꢁtoꢁfindꢁaꢁ
positionꢁthatꢁfacilitatesꢁviewing.
2
For details on menu operations, refer to [Using the
menus] (page 120).
• Select CHANGE in the EVF SETTING.
DISPLAY SETUP
Tighten
EVF PEAK LEVEL
EVF PEAK FREQ
EVF SETTING
EVF B. LIGHT
EVF COLOR
0
LOW
RETURN
CHANGE
ON
Viewfinderꢁleft-rightꢁpositioningꢁring
ZEBRA1 DETECT
ZEBRA2 DETECT
ZEBRA2
100%
85%
SPOT
ꢁ
3
Tightenꢁtheꢁviewfinderꢁleft-rightꢁpositioningꢁ
rings.
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
ꢁ
3
UseꢁtheꢁJOGꢁdialꢁButtonꢁtoꢁselectꢁitemsꢁtoꢁset.
Diopter Adjustment
EVF SETTING
ꢁ
ꢁ
TurnꢁonꢁtheꢁPOWERꢁswitchꢁonꢁtheꢁcamera.
1
EVF BRIGHTNESS
[ ]
[+]
[+]
• Look at the image in the viewfinder.
EVF CONTRAST
[ ]
Turnꢁtheꢁdiopterꢁadjustingꢁringꢁuntilꢁyouꢁgetꢁtheꢁ
sharpestꢁpossibleꢁimageꢁinꢁtheꢁviewfinder.
2
Diopterꢁadjustingꢁring
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
ꢁ
4
PressꢁtheꢁJOGꢁdialꢁbuttonꢁtoꢁselectꢁanꢁitemꢁandꢁ
turnꢁtheꢁbuttonꢁtoꢁmakeꢁadjustments.
EVF SETTING
EVF BRIGHTNESS
[ ]
[+]
[+]
EVF CONTRAST
[ ]
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
ꢆꢇ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NOTE
• Pressing the RESET button when an adjustable value is
selected in the setting menu EVF SETTING will return that
setting to its factory default.
• The LCD monitor will appear darker than usual if the camera
recorder is cold when it is turned on.The display will return to
its normal brightness as it warms up.
• The issues described below are viewfinder phenomena that
may occur under certain conditions but do not indicate a
malfunction. Nor do they affect recording or output signals.
- Primary colors (red, blue and green) may be seen when
moving eye position in the viewfinder.
- At low temperature, the screen image may have an irregular
pink cast.
- When the camera is off, there may be black stripes across
the screen.They disappear when the camera is turned on.
• Image lag may increase at low temperatures, but this is not a
malfunction.
Emphasizing Image Outlines
Emphasizing outlines of images in the viewfinder and on
the LCD monitor makes it easier to focus.
This function does not affect video output from the camera
or video recorded by the camera.
ꢁ
1
AdjustꢁEVFꢁPEAKꢁLEVELꢁandꢁEVFꢁPEAKꢁ
FREQꢁinꢁtheꢁDISPLAYꢁSETUPꢁscreen.
DISPLAY SETUP
EVF PEAK LEVEL
EVF PEAK FREQ
EVF SETTING
EVF B. LIGHT
EVF COLOR
0
LOW
>>>
NORMAL
ON
ZEBRA1 DETECT
ZEBRA2 DETECT
ZEBRA2
100%
85%
SPOT
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
Setting the viewfinder to
monochrome mode
Set the menu option EVF COLOR to OFF in the DISPLAY
SETUP screen to change the viewfinder to monochrome
mode.
ꢆꢈ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Handling setup data
Configuration of setup data files
This camera makes it possible to save a scene file to each of the F1 to F6 positions on the SCENE FILE dial.
Use of an SD memory card makes it possible to save up to four of the F1 to F6 files on an SD card for later retrieval.
The setting menu values can be stored as a user file in the camera and up to four files can be stored on the SD memory
card.
The setting data files are configured as shown below.
AG-HPX300P
SD CARD
SCENE FILE
(Factory defaults)
SCENE FILE
(Current operating status values)
SCENE FILE
(Saved camera values)
SCENE FILE
(SD CARD)
F1
F1 Default value
F2 Default value
F3 Default value
F4 Default value
F5 Default value
F6 Default value
F1 Current value
F1 Saved value
F2 Saved value
F3 Saved value
F4 Saved value
F5 Saved value
F6 Saved value
SCENE FILE
screen INTIAL *1
SCENE FILE screen
LOAD/SAVE *1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
SCENE
FILE 1
F2 Current value
F3 Current value
F4 Current value
F5 Current value
F6 Current value
SCENE
FILE 2
SCENE
FILE 3
*1: SCENE FILE dial unit
*2: All files F1 to F6
CARD FUNCTIONS screen
SCENE FILE � LOAD/SAVE *2
SCENE
FILE 4
USER FILE
(Factory defaults)
USER FILE
(Current operating status values)
USER FILE
(Saved camera values)
USER FILE
(SD CARD)
USER FILE initial value
USER FILE1
Current USER FILE values
Saved USER FILE values
OTHER FUNCTIONS screen
USER FILE � INTIAL
OTHER FUNCTIONS screen
USER FILE � LOAD/SAVE
USER FILE2
USER FILE3
USER FILE4
CARD FUNCTIONS screen
USER FILE LOAD/SAVE
�
NOTE
• Running the menu option MENU INIT in the OTHER FUNCTIONS screen returns all current operating status values and saved
camera values in the F1 to F6 scene files as well as in the user file to their factory defaults.This function does not return the
TIMEZONE setting to its factory default.
• Setting data file operations may end in error during playback or when the menu option PC MODE is set to ON in the SYSTEM
SETUP screen. Set PC MODE to OFF before performing file operations.
ꢇ0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Data Using an SD memory card
Formatting, Writing and Reading
an SD memory card
Open the CARD FUNCTIONS screen from the setting
menu to format SD memory cards, write setting data to SD
memory cards and to read data stored on an SD memory
card.
By saving up to four files of setup menu settings on an
SD or SDHC memory card (optional accessory), you can
create a setup card that will allow you to quickly configure
camera settings before recording.
Handling SD memory cards
CARD FUNCTIONS
An SD memory card may be inserted or removed, either
before or after the power is turned on.
SCENE FILE
RETURN
CHANGE
>>>
USER FILE
SD CARD FORMAT
To insert an SD memory card
Open the slot cover, insert the SD memory card (optional
accessory) in the slot with the label side of the card facing
upwards and close the slot cover.
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
Use of SD memory cards in a non-SD/SDHC format
formatted on a device other than this camera will display
a FORMAT ERROR message at the top right of the screen.
Reformat such SD cards in the camera before use.
See [To format an SD memory card] (this page).
To format an SD memory card
NOTE
SD memory cards may be formatted via the thumbnail screen.
For more information, see [Formatting SD memory cards]
(page 115).
NOTE
ꢁ
SelectꢁSDꢁCARDꢁFORMATꢁitemꢁinꢁCARDꢁ
FUNCTIONS,ꢁthenꢁpressꢁtheꢁJOGꢁdialꢁbutton.
For details on menu operation, refer to [Using the
menus] (page 120).
1
2
• An SD memory card must be inserted with the right side
facing the slot. If the card cannot be inserted, it may the
wrong side up or back-to-front. Do not force it into the slot.
Check the card before reinserting it.
• Use only SD memory cards that conform to the SD standard
or the SDHC standard in this camera.
Be sure to read [SD memory card precautions] (page 21)
regarding SD memory handling.
ꢁ
SelectꢁEXCUTE,ꢁthenꢁpressꢁtheꢁJOGꢁdialꢁ
button.
CARD FUNCTIONS
To remove the SD memory card
SCENE FINE
>>>
>>>
USER FILE
Open the slot cover and make sure that the BUSY lamp is
not on before pushing the SD memory card further into the
slot and releasing it. This will cause the SD memory card to
pop out of the slot. Remove the SD memory card and close
the slot cover.
SD CARD FORMAT
RETURN
EXECUTE
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
SD memory cards must not be used or stored
in an environment where they may be
ꢁ
3
SelectꢁYESꢁinꢁtheꢁconfirmationꢁscreenꢁandꢁ
pressꢁtheꢁJOGꢁdialꢁbutton.
• “SD CARD FORMAT OK” appears and the SD
memory card is formatted.
• Exposed to high temperatures/humidities;
• Exposed to water droplets; or
• Electrically charged.
For storage, the SD memory card must be kept inserted
into the AG-HPX300P with the lid closed.
NOTE
Check that no important data remains on a card before
formatting since data erased by formatting cannot be
recovered.
ꢇ1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The card will not be formatted if the following message
appears when the JOG dial button is pressed:
How to Use Scene File Data
• Each position of the SCENE FILE dial stores settings for
Error message
Remedy
SD CARD FORMAT NG
NO CARD
(No SD memory card
inserted.)
specific shooting situations.
• When shooting, you can retrieve the necessary file
instantly using scene file dial.
• You can also use menu options to change set scene file
values. A modified scene file can be saved to each scene
file dial position.
Insert an SD memory card.
SD CARD FORMAT NG
ERROR
(SD memory card cannot be Replace the card.
formatted.)
The card may be defective.
SD CARD FORMAT NG
WRITE PROTECT
(SD memory card is write-
protected.)
Remove the card and
cancel the protect.
SD CARD FORMAT NG
CANNOT ACCESS
(SD memory card not
accessible).
The SD memory card is
not accessible. When the
current access operation
ends, reformat the card.
SCENEꢁFILEꢁdial
• Note that changing scene files during recording will
not change VFR and frame rate settings. To make such
changes, set the camera to recording standby status.
Factory setting
•ꢁF1:ꢁSCENE
File suitable for normal shooting.
•ꢁFꢀ:ꢁSCENEꢁFLUO.
File suitable for shooting under fluorescent lights, ie.
indoors.
•ꢁFꢂ:ꢁSCENEꢁSPARK
File suitable for SD shooting with a greater range of
resolution, coloring and contrast.
•ꢁFꢃ:ꢁSCENEꢁB-STR
File for increasing the contrast of dark areas, such as
when shooting sunsets.
•ꢁFꢄ:ꢁSCENEꢁCINEꢁV
File suitable for shooting movie-like scenes where the
contrast is to be emphasized.
•ꢁFꢅ:ꢁSCENEꢁCINEꢁD
File suitable for shooting movie-like scenes where the
dynamic range is to be emphasized.
NOTE
Changes to scene files do not affect SYSTEM MODE settings.
Use the SYSTEM SETUP screen to make such changes.
ꢇꢀ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing scene file settings
ꢁ
4
Whenꢁtheꢁscreenꢁshownꢁbelowꢁappears,ꢁuseꢁ
theꢁJOGꢁdialꢁbuttonꢁtoꢁenterꢁaꢁꢅ-characterꢁfileꢁ
name.
Example1: Change the name of the scene
file.
• Turning the JOG dial button changes the character
display in the following order: space ()
alphabet (A to Z) numerics (0 to 9) symbols (;
: < = > ? @ [ \ ] ^_-./).
• If the RESET button is pressed when the filename
has been set, the characters are cleared.
ꢁ
Turnꢁtheꢁsceneꢁfileꢁdial,ꢁthenꢁselectꢁtheꢁsceneꢁ
fileꢁtoꢁbeꢁchanged.
1
2
ꢁ
SelectꢁtheꢁmenuꢁoptionꢁNAMEꢁEDITꢁinꢁtheꢁ
SCENEꢁFILEꢁscreen,ꢁthenꢁpressꢁtheꢁJOGꢁdialꢁ
button.
NAME EDIT
SW POSITION F3
S P A R K
For details on menu operation, refer to [Using the
menus] (page 120).
SCENE FILE F3:SPARK
MATRIX
NORM1
OFF
SKIN TONE DTL
V DETAIL FREQ
NAME EDIT
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
THIN
RETURN
CHANGE
• After you finish setting the filename, press the
MENU button. This completes the NAME EDIT
change. A change that has been confirmed is
retained after a power down and is not affected by
dial position. Items set for the scene file are also
retained.
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
Example2: Save the F1 scene file to the
ꢁ
3
SelectꢁCHANGEꢁandꢁpressꢁtheꢁJOGꢁdialꢁbutton.
camera.
SCENE FILE F3:SPARK
MATRIX
NORM1
OFF
SKIN TONE DTL
V DETAIL FREQ
NAME EDIT
ꢁ
1
SelectꢁtheꢁmenuꢁoptionꢁLOAD/SAVE/INTꢁinꢁtheꢁ
SCENEꢁFILEꢁscreen,ꢁthenꢁpressꢁtheꢁJOGꢁdialꢁ
button.
THIN
RETURN
CHANGE
For details on menu operation, refer to [Using the
menus] (page 120).
SCENE FILE
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
LOAD SAVE INIT
VFR
RETURN
LOAD
FRAME RATE
SAVE
(SYNCHRO SCAN)
DETAIL LEVEL
V DETAIL LEVEL
DETAIL CORING
CHROMA LEVEL
INITIAL
0
0
0
0
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
ꢇꢂ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ꢁ
2
SelectꢁSAVEꢁandꢁpressꢁtheꢁJOGꢁdialꢁbutton.
Saving scene files and other
settings on SD memory cards
You can save up to four scene file settings or other settings
as files on an SD memory card, and you can also load
them from the card.
• Current scene file settings are automatically saved in the
camera and written to an SD memory card. When data
has been read from an SD memory card, the current
settings are rewritten at the same time as the data saved
inside the unit.
SCENE FILE
LOAD SAVE INIT
VFR
RETURN
LOAD
FRAME RATE
SAVE
(SYNCHRO SCAN)
DETAIL LEVEL
V DETAIL LEVEL
DETAIL CORING
CHROMA LEVEL
INITIAL
0
0
0
0
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
• The data in all the scene files, F1 to F6, is rewritten.
Be sure to read [Handling SD memory cards] (page 81)
regarding SD memory handling.
ꢁ
3
SelectꢁYESꢁandꢁpressꢁtheꢁJOGꢁdialꢁbutton.
• To return to the menu level above, press the
MENU button.
The following procedure shows how to save scene files.
SCENE FILE
SAVE ?
ꢁ
Setꢁtheꢁunit’sꢁPOWERꢁswitchꢁtoꢁON.
1
2
YES
NO
PUSH SET
ꢁ
SelectꢁtheꢁmenuꢁoptionꢁSCENEꢁFILEꢁinꢁtheꢁ
CARDꢁFUNCTIONSꢁscreen,ꢁthenꢁpressꢁtheꢁ
JOGꢁdialꢁbutton.
For details on menu operation, refer to [Using the
menus] (page 120).
• “PROCESSING” appears and the following
message is shown when all settings have been
completed.
ꢁ
3
SelectꢁCHANGEꢁandꢁpressꢁtheꢁJOGꢁdialꢁbutton.
• Select the menu option USER FILE for other
settings.
CARD FUNCTIONS
SCENE FILE
RETURN
CHANGE
>>>
USER FILE
SAVE
SD CARD FORMAT
COMPLETED !
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
• After changing the scene file settings, to return to the
settings to the previously saved values, select LOAD in
step 2 and perform the operation described in step 3.
• To return the scene file settings to their factory defaults,
select INITIAL in step 2 and perform the operation
described in step 3.
• To save and read user file settings or return them to
their factory defaults, open the setting menu OTHER
FUNCTIONS screen and run USER FILE in the same way
as when handling scene files.
ꢁ
4
Selectꢁtheꢁfileꢁnumberꢁ(1ꢁtoꢁꢃ)ꢁusingꢁtheꢁJOGꢁ
dialꢁbutton.
• Press the JOG dial button again to confirm the
setting.
SCENE FILE(SD CARD)
FILE SELECT
READ
1
>>>
WRITE
>>>
FILE 1
NO FILE
NO FILE
NO FILE
NO FILE
>>>
FILE 2
FILE 3
FILE 4
TITLE RELOAD
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
ꢇꢃ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To title a file
ꢁ
5
SelectꢁWRITEꢁandꢁpressꢁtheꢁJOGꢁdialꢁbutton,ꢁ
thenꢁselectꢁEXECUTEꢁandꢁpressꢁtheꢁJOGꢁdialꢁ
button.
ꢁ
Performꢁstepsꢁ1ꢁtoꢁꢄ.
1
2
SCENE FILE(SD CARD)
FILE SELECT
READ
1
ꢁ
UseꢁtheꢁJOGꢁdialꢁbuttonꢁtoꢁselectꢁcharacters,ꢁ
thenꢁpressꢁtheꢁJOGꢁdialꢁbuttonꢁtoꢁmoveꢁtoꢁtheꢁ
nextꢁcharacter.
>>>
WRITE
RETURN
EXECUTE
NO FILE
NO FILE
NO FILE
>>>
FILE 1
FILE 2
• You can input any of the following characters:
Space, A to Z, 0 to 9, : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] ^_-./
• You can erase all characters using the RESET
button.
FILE 3
FILE 4
TITLE RELOAD
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
ꢁ
ꢁ
Whenꢁallꢁentriesꢁhaveꢁbeenꢁmade,ꢁmoveꢁtheꢁ
cursorꢁtoꢁtheꢁrightꢁofꢁtheꢁenteredꢁtitle.
3
ꢁ
6
Pressꢁtheꢁcursorꢁbutton,ꢁturnꢁtheꢁJOGꢁdialꢁ
buttonꢁtoꢁmoveꢁtoꢁYESꢁandꢁagainꢁpressꢁtheꢁ
JOGꢁdialꢁbutton.
SelectꢁYESꢁandꢁpressꢁtheꢁJOGꢁdialꢁbutton.
SCENE FILE(SD CARD)
WRITE FILE 1
4
• In the following example, TITLE 1 is the filename.
• When writing is completed, WRITE OK appears.
SCENE FILE(SD CARD)
YES
NO
PUSH SET
WRITE FILE 1
YES
NO
PUSH SET
TITLE EDIT
T I T L E 1
TITLE EDIT
T I T L E 1
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
• “WRITE OK” appears when the title is written.
NOTE
To load a file
• If WRITE NG FORMAT ERROR appears, format the SD
memory card.
• If WRITE NG WRITE PROTECT appears, change the lock tab
position to enable writing.
• If WRITE NG CANNOT ACCESS appears, quit all other
operations (such as playback) before proceeding.
• If WRITE NG ERROR appears, the SD memory card may be
defective. Replace it.
Perform steps 1 to 4. Select READ in step 5, select
EXECUTE and press the JOG dial button. READ OK
appears when loading completes.
Like scene files, process user files by using the menu
option USER FILE in the CARD FUNCTION screen.
Reloading Files From an SD Memory Card
Perform steps 1 to 3, move to TITLE RELOAD so that YES
is displayed in step 5, and press the JOG dial button.
The file is reloaded.
ꢇꢄ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Preparation
Power Supply
A battery or an external DC power supply can be used as
the power supply for the camera-recorder.
ꢁ
2
Insertꢁtheꢁbatteryꢁandꢁslideꢁitꢁinꢁtheꢁdirectionꢁofꢁ
theꢁarrow.
Using a Battery
Releaseꢁlever
The following is a list of batteries that have been tested and
verified to work with the camera.
Anton/Bauer batteries
PROPAC14, TRIMPACK14
HYTRON50, HYTRON140
DIONIC90, DIONIC160
IDX batteries
NP-L7, ENDURA7, ENDURA10
Sony batteries
BP-GL65/95
PAG batteries
PAGL95
NOTE
NOTE
• Although other batteries may be used by changing the menu
setting, it is recommended that you use batteries that have
been tested and verified to work with camera.
• Charge the battery with the battery charger before using it.
(Please refer to the battery charger’s instruction manual for
information about charging.)
Removing the battery
Completely push down and hold the release lever
on the battery holder. Then, slide the battery in the
opposite direction to the arrow while holding the lever
down.
ꢁ
3
Setꢁtheꢁbatteryꢁtype.
Mounting the Battery and Setting
the Battery Type
• Select the battery type listed under BATTERY
SELECT. Select the menu option BATTERY
SELECT from the setting menu BATTERY SETUP
screen.
Using an Anton/Bauer Battery
ꢁ
1
MountꢁanꢁAnton/Bauerꢁbattery.
Powerꢁsupplyꢁoutputꢁconnectorꢁforꢁlighting
Anton/BauerꢁBattery
Lightingꢁcontrolꢁswitch
NOTE
The Anton/Bauer battery holder includes both a power
supply output connector for lighting and a lighting
control switch, which are convenient when attaching a
light. Please contact Anton/Bauer for information about
the lighting system.
ꢇꢅ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When using a V-mount type battery
When using an NP battery
Mount the V-mount adapter plate. Insert the plate and slide
it as shown below.
• To remove the plate, slide the release lever downwards.
ꢁ
MountꢁaꢁV-mountꢁadapterꢁplateꢁonꢁtheꢁcamera.ꢁ
1
2
Refer to [When using a V-mount type battery] (this
page).
ꢁ
AttachꢁaꢁholderꢁplateꢁonꢁtheꢁNPꢁbatteryꢁcase.ꢁ
• When the battery plate comes with a packing, first
insert the packing in the battery case.
(1) Remove the screw at the bottom of the cover
and remove the cover.
(2) Line up the openings in the battery case and
battery plate and use the supplied screws to
fasten the case to the plate.
(3) Tighten the power supply connector screw.
(4) Insert the removed top cover in the direction of
the arrow.
(5) Line up the openings in the lower cover (metal
part) and the case and use the securing screw
to fasten them together.
Releaseꢁlever
ꢀ
Setting the battery type
ꢁ
• Select the battery type listed under BATTERY SELECT.
Select the menu option BATTERY SELECT from the
setting menu BATTERY SETUP screen.
ꢂ
ꢃ
ꢄ
• When using a battery not listed under BATTERY SELECT:
If it is a NiCd battery, select “NiCd14(14V)” and set each
item according to the battery characteristics. If it is not a
NiCd battery, select TYPE A or TYPE B and set each item
according to the battery characteristics. For details, refer
to [BATTERY SETUP screen] (page 134).
NOTE
• For information about the V-mount adapter plate, please
contact the store where you purchased the camera-recorder.
• With the V-mount adapter plate installed, % (percent) values
cannot be displayed when using batteries that show the
remaining battery capacity.
ꢇꢆ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UseꢁofꢁexternalꢁDCꢁpowerꢁsupply
Use of the external DC power
supply
MakeꢁsureꢁthatꢁtheꢁoutputꢁvoltageꢁofꢁtheꢁexternalꢁDCꢁ
powerꢁsupplyꢁmeetsꢁtheꢁratedꢁvoltageꢁofꢁtheꢁcameraꢁbeforeꢁ
makingꢁaꢁconnection.
TheꢁoutputꢁcurrentꢁofꢁtheꢁexternalꢁDCꢁpowerꢁsupplyꢁshouldꢁ
beꢁlargeꢁenoughꢁtoꢁprovideꢁtheꢁconnectedꢁcameraꢁwithꢁitsꢁ
totalꢁamperageꢁneedsꢁwithꢁaꢁreasonableꢁmargin.
Useꢁtheꢁfollowingꢁformulaꢁtoꢁcalculateꢁtheꢁtotalꢁamperageꢁ
ofꢁtheꢁcamera.
ꢁ
1
ConnectꢁtheꢁexternalꢁDCꢁpowerꢁsupplyꢁtoꢁtheꢁ
DCꢁINꢁsocketꢁonꢁtheꢁunit.
total power consumption ÷ voltage
Whenꢁtheꢁpowerꢁisꢁturnedꢁon,ꢁaꢁrushꢁcurrentꢁoccurs.ꢁIfꢁtheꢁ
powerꢁsupplyꢁisꢁinsufficientꢁduringꢁthisꢁtime,ꢁtheꢁcameraꢁ
mayꢁbeꢁdamaged.ꢁTherefore,ꢁweꢁrecommendꢁusingꢁanꢁ
externalꢁDCꢁpowerꢁsupplyꢁthatꢁprovidesꢁatꢁleastꢁtwiceꢁ
theꢁtotalꢁpowerꢁconsumedꢁbyꢁtheꢁcameraꢁandꢁallꢁtheꢁ
devicesꢁconnectedꢁtoꢁtheꢁunitꢁthatꢁpowerꢁonꢁwhenꢁtheꢁ
cameraꢁpowersꢁonꢁ(example:ꢁlens,ꢁwirelessꢁmicrophoneꢁ
receiver).ꢁWeꢁalsoꢁrecommendꢁusingꢁtheꢁproperꢁDCꢁcableꢁ
recommendedꢁforꢁyourꢁexternalꢁDCꢁpowerꢁsupply.
DCꢁcable
DCꢁINꢁSocket
•ꢁꢁWhenꢁusingꢁanꢁexternalꢁpowerꢁsupplyꢁotherꢁthanꢁtheꢁ
ACꢁadapter,ꢁcheckꢁtheꢁDCꢁINꢁsocketꢁpinꢁinformationꢁ
toꢁensureꢁcorrectꢁpolarity.ꢁIfꢁaꢁ+1ꢀꢁVꢁpowerꢁsupplyꢁisꢁ
accidentallyꢁconnectedꢁtoꢁtheꢁGNDꢁterminal,ꢁthisꢁcouldꢁ
causeꢁaꢁfireꢁorꢁpersonalꢁinjury.
ExternalꢁDCꢁꢁ
powerꢁsupply
ꢁ
ꢁ
Turnꢁ“ON”ꢁtheꢁpowerꢁswitchꢁofꢁtheꢁexternalꢁDCꢁ
powerꢁsupply.ꢁ(Ifꢁtheꢁpowerꢁswitchꢁisꢁavailableꢁ
onꢁtheꢁexternalꢁDCꢁpowerꢁsupply)
2
PinꢁNo.
Signal
GND
—
1
ꢀ,ꢁꢂ
ꢃ
4
1
2
3
+1ꢀV
Turnꢁtheꢁcamera-recorderꢁpowerꢁswitchꢁON.
3
NOTE
• When both the battery and the external DC power supply are
connected, power is supplied from the external DC power
supply.The battery can be removed or mounted while using
an external DC power supply.
• When using an external DC power supply, make sure you
turn on the external DC power supply before turning on the
camera-recorder’s power switch. If this sequence is reversed,
the camera-recorder may malfunction due to slow rising of
the external DC power supply voltage.
• To connect a battery to the DC IN connector, select BATTERY
in the menu option EXT DC IN SEL, and select the battery
type in the menu option BATTERY SELECT in the BATTERY
SETUP screen. Note that with these settings, the “%”
indication cannot be displayed, even for batteries capable of
indicating remaining power.
ꢇꢇ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mounting and Adjusting the Lens
ꢁ
3
Lowerꢁtheꢁlensꢁleverꢁtoꢁfirmlyꢁtightenꢁtheꢁlens.
Mounting the Lens
ꢁ
1
Raiseꢁtheꢁlensꢁclampingꢁleverꢁandꢁremoveꢁtheꢁ
mountꢁcap.
LensꢁClampingꢁLever
ꢁ
4
Secureꢁtheꢁcableꢁthroughꢁtheꢁcableꢁclamp,ꢁandꢁ
plugꢁitꢁintoꢁtheꢁLENSꢁconnector.
MountꢁCap
Cableꢁ
clamp
ꢁ
2
Toꢁmountꢁtheꢁlens,ꢁalignꢁtheꢁindentationꢁatꢁtheꢁ
topꢁcenterꢁofꢁtheꢁlensꢁmountꢁwithꢁtheꢁcenterꢁ
markꢁofꢁtheꢁlens.
Mark
LENSꢁConnector
For details on the current provided by the lens
terminal, refer to page 165.
ꢁ
5
Adjustꢁtheꢁlensꢁflangeꢁback.
For details, refer to [Adjusting the Lens Flange
Back] (page 90).
NOTE
• Please refer to the lens instruction manual for
guidance on lens handling.
• When the lens is removed, install the mount cap to
protect the device.
ꢇꢈ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ꢁ
7
Setꢁtheꢁzoomꢁringꢁtoꢁtheꢁwide-angleꢁpositionꢁ
andꢁturnꢁtheꢁF.fꢁ(flangeꢁfocus)ꢁringꢁtoꢁadjustꢁ
focus.
Adjusting the Lens Flange Back
If images are not clearly focused at both telephoto and
wide-angle positions during zoom operations, adjust the
flange back (distance from the lens mounting surface to the
image formation surface).
• Do not move the distance ring during focusing.
Once adjusted, the flange back does not need to be
re-adjusted as long as the same lens is mounted on the
camera.
ꢁ
RepeatꢁStepsꢁꢄꢁtoꢁꢆꢁuntilꢁtheꢁlensꢁisꢁinꢁfocusꢁatꢁ
bothꢁtheꢁtelephotoꢁandꢁwide-angleꢁpositions.
8
9
NOTE
ꢁ
FirmlyꢁtightenꢁtheꢁF.fꢁringꢁclampingꢁscrew.
Please also refer to the lens instruction manual for directions
on adjustment and locations of individual lens parts.
ꢁ
Mountꢁtheꢁlensꢁonꢁtheꢁcamera.
1
2
• Make sure you connect the lens cable.
ꢁ
Setꢁtheꢁlensꢁirisꢁtoꢁmanual,ꢁandꢁfullyꢁopenꢁtheꢁ
iris.
Approximatelyꢁꢂꢁm
ꢁ
ꢁ
Placeꢁtheꢁflangeꢁbackꢁadjustmentꢁchartꢁaboutꢁ
ꢂꢁmꢁfromꢁtheꢁlensꢁandꢁadjustꢁtheꢁlightingꢁonꢁ
theꢁchartꢁtoꢁobtainꢁanꢁappropriateꢁvideoꢁoutputꢁ
level.
3
• If the video level is too high, use the filters or the
shutter.
LoosenꢁtheꢁF.fꢁ(Flangeꢁfocus)ꢁringꢁclampingꢁ
screw.
4
NOTE
F.b (Flange back) may be indicated on some lenses.
ꢁ
ꢁ
Setꢁtheꢁzoomꢁringꢁtoꢁtheꢁtelephotoꢁposition,ꢁ
eitherꢁmanuallyꢁorꢁbyꢁelectricꢁdrive.
5
Shootꢁtheꢁflangeꢁbackꢁadjustmentꢁchartꢁandꢁ
turnꢁtheꢁdistanceꢁringꢁtoꢁadjustꢁfocus.
6
ꢈ0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
White Shading Adjustment
White Shading Compensation
The camera can use DEFAULT (fixed value) and three user
adjustable functions (USER1, USER2, USER3) to store
white shading compensation data.
Select SHADING SELECT in the setting menu LENS SETUP
screen to set compensation data. Selecting OFF turns off
shading compensation.
NOTE
Coloring may occur in the vertical direction near the open
setting of the lens iris even when the white shading has been
adjusted.This is an optical characteristic and not indicative of
a failure.
ꢁ
1
Placeꢁtheꢁcameraꢁinꢁtheꢁadjustmentꢁmode.
Selecting White Shading Compensation
Data
(1) Mount a lens on the camera.
• Do not forget to connect the lens cable.
(2) Turn the shutter switch off and set 0 dB gain.
(3) If the lens comes with an extender, disengage it.
(4) Open the setting menu LENS SETUP screen
and select USER1, USER2 or USER3 under
SHADING SELECT.
(5) Use the JOG dial button to select SHADING
(USER), select EXECUTE and press the JOG dial
button.
ꢁ
1
SelectꢁSHADINGꢁSELECTꢁinꢁLENSꢁSETUP,ꢁ
thenꢁpressꢁtheꢁJOGꢁdialꢁbutton.
For details on menu operation, refer to [Using the
menus] (page 120).
LENS SETUP
• The message “CHECK LUMINANCE LEVEL
ZEBRA ON VF” appears.
SHADING SELECT
SHADING(USER)
CAC
DEFAULT
>>>
ON
LENS SETUP
CAC PROPERTY
CAC CARD READ
CAC FILE DELETE
CAC FILE INIT
IRIS ADJUST
>>>
>>>
>>>
>>>
>>>
SHADING SELECT
SHADING(USER)
CAC
USER1
RETURN
EXECUTE
>>>
CAC PROPERTY
CAC CARD READ
CAC FILE DELETE
CAC FILE INIT
IRIS ADJUST
>>>
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
>>>
>>>
>>>
ꢁ
2
UseꢁtheꢁJOGꢁdialꢁbuttonꢁtoꢁselectꢁDEFAULT,ꢁ
USER1,ꢁUSERꢀ,ꢁUSERꢂꢁorꢁOFFꢁandꢁpressꢁtheꢁ
JOGꢁdialꢁbutton.ꢁ
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
• To adjust the white shading, select USER1, USER2
or USER3.
CHECK LUMINANCE LEVEL
ZEBRA ON VF
• The USER1, USER2 or USER3 settings do not
contain any compensation data by default.
• DEFAULT stores compensation data that suits
XT17x4.5BRM-K14. For lenses other than those
above, perform the “White Shading Adjustment”
described below.
SHADING: USER1 SET OK?
YES
NO
PUSH SET
LENS SETUP
SHADING SELECT
SHADING(USER)
CAC
DEFAULT
USER1
USER2
USER3
OFF
CAC PROPERTY
CAC CARD READ
CAC FILE DELETE
CAC FILE INIT
IRIS ADJUST
>>>
>>>
>>>
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
ꢈ1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ꢁ
2
Setꢁtheꢁimage.
ꢁ
Ifꢁtheꢁlensꢁisꢁprovidedꢁwithꢁanꢁextender,ꢁturnꢁonꢁ
theꢁextenderꢁfunctionꢁandꢁperformꢁstepsꢁꢀꢁtoꢁꢄꢁ
again.ꢁ
6
(1) Shoot a solid white sheet of paper.
(2) Set the lens iris to manual and adjust the iris so
that a zebra pattern fills the entire viewfinder
screen.
• When the piece of paper is unevenly lit, the
zebra pattern will not cover the entire screen.
Adjust as required.
• Make sure that the white paper is not exposed
to multiple light sources (example, fluorescent
lighting or halogen lamps) of different color
temperatures.
• The white shading adjustment need not be
readjusted when the extender is later turned off.
Setting Chromatic Aberration
Compensation (CAC)
The CAC function of the camera corrects the registration
error caused by the slight chromatic aberration that the
lens cannot compensate for. This minimizes color bleeding
into the surrounding image areas.
Lenses compatible with the CAC function whose CAC data
is registered in the camera will automatically start CAC
operation.
CAC data for the following lenses have been stored in the
camera as default values.
CHECK LUMINANCE LEVEL
ZEBRA ON VF
SHADING: USER1 SET OK?
YES
NO
PUSH SET
Model numbers of
compatible lenses
Camera indication
XT17X4.5BRM-K14
XT17x4.5BRM-K14
NOTE
NOTE
• Adjust the white shading in sunlight, under halogen
lamp light or other light source that does not flicker.
Fluorescent light and mercury lamps tend to flicker
and should not be used for this adjustment.
• Adjust the light source if the lens iris is out of the
range between F4 and F11.
• One of the lens model number appearing in the menu
represents the lens group.
• The CAC function in this camera operates in horizontal
direction only.
• The CAC function does not operate at +24 dB.
• The CAC function may not operate normally in macro
shooting.
• Make sure the electronic shutter is set to off.
• After the release of this camera, visit our Web site at the
address given below for details on new lenses compatible
with this function and any changes in this function.
https://eww.pavc.panasonic.co.jp/pro-av/
ꢁ
3
Adjustꢁwhiteꢁandꢁblackꢁbalance.
(1) Set the WHITE BAL switch to A or B and use the
AUTO W/B BAL switch to make an automatic
white balance adjustment.
(2) Use the AUTO W/B BAL switch to make an
automatic black balance adjustment.
Checking CAC Operating Status
When the menu is not open, the CAC indication at the top
right of the screen indicates that the CAC function is on.
(3) Again, use the AUTO W/B BAL switch to make
an automatic white balance adjustment.
ꢁ
ꢁ
Repeatꢁtheꢁoperationꢁinꢁstepꢁꢀ-(ꢀ).ꢁ
4
Adjustꢁwhiteꢁshading.
5
(1) Use the JOG dial button to select YES and press
the JOG dial button.
(2) The message “SHADING ACTIVE” appears on
the screen during adjustment.
(3) When the adjustment ends after a few seconds,
the message “SHADING OK” appears.
• When an error message such as “SHADING NG
LEVEL OVER” or “SHADING NG LOW LIGHT”
appears, adjust the iris.
• The adjusted value is automatically stored in
memory (USER1, USER2, USER3).
ꢈꢀ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking CAC data number and CAC data Loading CAC File From an SD Card
during operation
ꢁ
1
OpenꢁtheꢁLENSꢁSETUPꢁscreen.
For details on menu operation, refer to [Using the
menus] (page 120).
ꢁ
OpenꢁtheꢁLENSꢁSETUPꢁscreen.ꢁ
1
2
For details on menu operation, refer to [Using the
menus] (page 120).
ꢁ
2
UseꢁtheꢁJOGꢁdialꢁbuttonꢁtoꢁselectꢁCACꢁCARDꢁ
READ.ꢁThenꢁselectꢁEXECUTEꢁtoꢁopenꢁtheꢁCACꢁ
CARDꢁREADꢁscreen.
ꢁ
TurnꢁtheꢁJOGꢁdialꢁbuttonꢁtoꢁselectꢁCACꢁ
PROPERTYꢁandꢁselectꢁDISPLAYꢁtoꢁopenꢁtheꢁ
CACꢁPROPERTYꢁscreen.ꢁ
LENS SETUP
• The CAC property list appears.
SHADING SELECT
SHADING(USER)
CAC
DEFAULT
>>>
LENS SETUP
ON
SHADING SELECT
SHADING(USER)
CAC
DEFAULT
>>>
CAC PROPERTY
CAC CARD READ
CAC FILE DELETE
CAC FILE INIT
IRIS ADJUST
>>>
RETURN
EXECUTE
>>>
ON
CAC PROPERTY
CAC CARD READ
CAC FILE DELETE
CAC FILE INIT
IRIS ADJUST
RETURN
DISPLAY
>>>
>>>
>>>
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
>>>
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
ꢁ
3
UseꢁtheꢁJOGꢁdialꢁbuttonꢁtoꢁselectꢁtheꢁCACꢁfileꢁ
toꢁload.ꢁThenꢁselectꢁYESꢁandꢁpressꢁtheꢁJOGꢁ
dialꢁbutton.
CAC Property
a
CAC CARD READ
ZT17X4.5BRM-K1
CAC PROPERTY
ACTIVE CAC FILE NO : 1
FILE NO : 1
b
c
MAKER
TYPE
: FUJINON
:
XT17X4.5BRM-K14
VERSION : 1.00-00-0.00
DATA ERROR
PLEASE READ CAC CARD
d
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
CAC FILE READ
a
b
Current CAC data number
CAC FILE NO:1
READ?
Data number of CAC you wish to check
Turn the JOG dial to select.
YES
NO
PUSH SET
c
d
CAC data of the specified file (b)
Error messages
The file cannot be used if an error message appears.
Initialize the CAC data or reload the CAC file from an
SD card.
For details, see [Initializing CAC File] (page 94) or
[Loading CAC File From an SD Card] (this page).
ꢈꢂ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NOTE
• The camera can load up to 8 files.
Initializing CAC File (Returning Data to
Their Factory Defaults)
When an attempt is made to load a new file while 8 files have
already been loaded, “READ NG CAC FILE FULL” appears.To
load a new file, delete an existing file before loading the new
file.
For details, see [Deleting CAC File] (this page).
• “READ NG FORMAT ERROR” indicates the file cannot be
used and will not be loaded. Make sure the file is in a format
the camera supports and that the file on the SD card is not
corrupted.
ꢁ
OpenꢁtheꢁLENSꢁSETUPꢁscreen.ꢁ
1
2
For details on menu operation, refer to [Using the
menus] (page 120).
ꢁ
UseꢁtheꢁJOGꢁdialꢁbuttonꢁtoꢁselectꢁCACꢁFILEꢁ
INIT,ꢁselectꢁEXECUTEꢁandꢁpressꢁtheꢁJOGꢁdial.
Deleting CAC File
LENS SETUP
SHADING SELECT
SHADING(USER)
CAC
DEFAULT
>>>
ꢁ
OpenꢁtheꢁLENSꢁSETUPꢁscreen.ꢁ
1
2
ON
For details on menu operation, refer to [Using the
menus] (page 120).
CAC PROPERTY
CAC CARD READ
CAC FILE DELETE
CAC FILE INIT
IRIS ADJUST
>>>
>>>
>>>
RETURN
EXECUTE
ꢁ
UseꢁtheꢁJOGꢁdialꢁbuttonꢁtoꢁselectꢁCACꢁFILEꢁ
DELETE,ꢁselectꢁEXECUTEꢁandꢁpressꢁtheꢁJOGꢁ
dial.ꢁ
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
LENS SETUP
ꢁ
3
SelectꢁYESꢁinꢁtheꢁconfirmationꢁscreenꢁandꢁ
pressꢁtheꢁJOGꢁdialꢁbutton.ꢁ
SHADING SELECT
SHADING(USER)
CAC
DEFAULT
>>>
ON
• CAC FILE INIT PROCESSING COMPLETED
(these three appear in succession) to indicate that
initialization has been completed.
• The LENS SET UP screen appears after
completion.
CAC PROPERTY
CAC CARD READ
CAC FILE DELETE
CAC FILE INIT
IRIS ADJUST
>>>
>>>
RETURN
EXECUTE
>>>
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
CAC FILE INIT
CAC FILE INITIAL?
YES
NO
PUSH SET
ꢁ
3
UseꢁtheꢁJOGꢁdialꢁtoꢁselectꢁtheꢁCACꢁfileꢁtoꢁbeꢁ
deleted.ꢁThenꢁselectꢁYESꢁandꢁpressꢁtheꢁJOGꢁ
dialꢁbutton.ꢁ
“-----” is indicated when deletion ends.
CAC FILE DELETE
1:XT17X4.5BRM-K14
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
NOTE
This operation deletes all files loaded into the camera and
returns the four CAC data files to their factory defaults.
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
CAC FILE DELETE
CAC FILE NO:1
DELETE?
YES
NO
PUSH SET
ꢈꢃ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preparing for Audio Input
Take the following steps to prepare the camera for
connecting audio input devices.
ꢁ
4
SetꢁtheꢁAUDIOꢁINꢁswitchꢁtoꢁ[FRONT]ꢁ
dependingꢁonꢁtheꢁaudioꢁchannelꢁtoꢁbeꢁ
recorded.
When Using the Front Microphone
The AG-MC200G microphone kit (optional) includes a
microphone that can be mounted on the camera.
ꢁ
1
Openꢁtheꢁmicrophoneꢁholder.
Viewfinder
AUDIOꢁINꢁSwitch
Microphoneꢁholder
Using a wireless receiver
ꢁ
2
Mountꢁtheꢁmicrophoneꢁandꢁtightenꢁtheꢁclampingꢁ
screw.
ClampingꢁScrew
ꢁ
1
Removeꢁtheꢁlid,ꢁinstallꢁtheꢁwirelessꢁreceiverꢁandꢁ
screwꢁitꢁdown.ꢁ
ꢁ
3
ConnectꢁtheꢁmicrophoneꢁcableꢁtoꢁtheꢁMICꢁINꢁ
jackꢁonꢁtheꢁcamera.
MICꢁINꢁJack
ꢈꢄ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ꢁ
2
SetꢁtheꢁAUDIOꢁINꢁswitchꢁtoꢁW.L.ꢁforꢁtheꢁaudioꢁ
channelsꢁthatꢁwillꢁbeꢁrecorded.ꢁ
AUDIOꢁINꢁSwitch
• Set the menu option WIRELESS TYPE in the
AUDIO SETUP screen to DUAL for a 2-channel
wireless receiver.
When Using Audio Devices
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
ConnectꢁtheꢁaudioꢁdeviceꢁtoꢁtheꢁAUDIOꢁINꢁjackꢁ
withꢁtheꢁXLRꢁcable.
1
2
3
SetꢁtheꢁAUDIOꢁINꢁswitchꢁtoꢁ[REAR]ꢁforꢁtheꢁ
channelꢁtoꢁwhichꢁtheꢁXLRꢁcableꢁisꢁconnected.
SetꢁtheꢁLINE/MIC/+ꢃꢇVꢁselectorꢁswitchꢁonꢁtheꢁ
rearꢁpanelꢁtoꢁ[LINE].
LINE/MIC/+ꢃꢇVꢁSelectorꢁSwitch
AUDIOꢁINꢁJack
AUDIOꢁINꢁSwitch
ꢈꢅ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Attaching Accessories
Removing the Camera from the Tripod
Adapter
Mounting the Camera on a Tripod
Use an optional (SHAN-TM700) tripod adapter to place the
While holding the red lever down, move the black lever in
the direction of the arrow, and slide the camera backward
to remove it.
camera on a tripod.
ꢁ
1
Attachꢁtheꢁtripodꢁadapterꢁtoꢁtheꢁtripod.
Tripodꢁadapter
RedꢁLever
BlackꢁLever
NOTE
If the tripod adapter’s pin does not return to its original
position after the camera has been removed, hold the red lever
down and move the black lever in the direction of the arrow
again, in order to return the pin to its original position.
Please note that the camera cannot be mounted if the pin
remains in the center.
Panꢁhead
NOTE
Use the holes in the tripod adapter that will make
it possible to position the camera over the tripod
adapter’s center of gravity.
Also, make sure that the diameter of the selected hole
matches the diameter of the pan head screw.
Attaching the Shoulder Strap
Attach the shoulder strap to the shoulder strap bracket.
To detach the shoulder strap, first open the hooks, then
detach the strap.
ShoulderꢁStrap
ꢁ
2
Attachꢁtheꢁcameraꢁtoꢁtheꢁtripodꢁadapter.
• Slide the camera forward along the grooves until
you hear a “click”.
Pressꢁtoꢁopenꢁtheꢁ
hook.
NOTE
Makeꢁsureꢁthatꢁtheꢁshoulderꢁstrapꢁisꢁsecurelyꢁattached.
ꢈꢆ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Attaching the Rain Cover
Attaching the Eye Cup
Attach the eye cup by aligning the projections on the eyepiece
and the eye cup.
When using the SHAN-RC700 Rain Cover
Projectionsꢁ(ꢃ)ꢁ
Tightenꢁtheꢁcord
Eyepiece
Eyeꢁcup
Secureꢁwithꢁtheꢁsurfaceꢁfastener
Secureꢁwithꢁtheꢁsurfaceꢁfastener
Attaching the FRONT AUDIO LEVEL
Control Knob
If you use the FRONT AUDIO LEVEL control frequently,
attach the accessory knob so that it can be easily
operated.
FRONTꢁAUDIOꢁLEVELꢁControl
Knobꢁ(Accessory)
Screw
Marks
Screwꢁ(Accessory)
Remove the screw in the center of the FRONT AUDIO
LEVEL control, and attach the accessory knob using the
screw (included). When attaching the knob, be sure to
align the marks on the control with the marks on the knob.
ꢈꢇ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DC OUT Connector and External REC Start/Stop Switch Connection
The DC OUT connector on the camera can output a 1.5 A
current.
Connecting an external switch to this connector enables
REC Start and Stop control.
An LED can be connected and used as a tally lamp, which
is convenient when the camera is mounted on a crane
during recording.
DCꢁOUTꢁconnector
(Connection example)
Cableꢁconnector
HR10A-ꢆP-ꢃP(ꢆꢂ)
4
3
1
2
HiroseꢁElectricꢁCo.
(For details on connecting
the connector, refer to
page 164.)
LED
Resist-
ance
REC
Start/Stop
1: GND
2: TALLY OUT
The AG-HPX300P has open collector output
TALLY ON:
Low impedance
TALLY OFF:
High impedance
3: REC Start/Stop switch
This pin is connected in parallel with the REC button
and the lens VTR button.
4: +12 V
NOTE:
Be sure to check polarity before connecting an external device
as incorrect connection could lead to damage.
ꢈꢈ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting the AJ-RC10G Remote Controller
• Some functions can be remote-controlled when the
remote control unit AJ-RC10G (optional accessory) is
connected to the camera.
• When the AJ-RC10G is connected, the camera
automatically enters remote control mode after the power
switches of both the camera and the AJ-RC10G are
turned ON.
REMOTEꢁconnector
AJ-RC10G
NOTE
•ꢁꢁBeꢁsureꢁtoꢁturnꢁtheꢁPOWERꢁswitchesꢁonꢁtheꢁcameraꢁandꢁ
theꢁAJ-RC10Gꢁoffꢁbeforeꢁconnectingꢁorꢁdisconnectingꢁtheꢁ
controllerꢁcable.
•ꢁꢁUseꢁonlyꢁdesignatedꢁcablesꢁorꢁoptionalꢁcablesꢁtoꢁconnectꢁ
theꢁAJ-RC10G.ꢁUseꢁofꢁotherꢁcablesꢁcouldꢁresultꢁinꢁ
equipmentꢁdamage.
•ꢁꢁTheꢁUSERꢁbuttonsꢁandꢁMENUꢁbuttonꢁdoꢁnotꢁworkꢁwhenꢁ
theꢁAJ-RC10Gꢁisꢁconnected.
•ꢁꢁReferꢁtoꢁtheꢁOperatingꢁInstructionsꢁofꢁtheꢁAJ-RC10Gꢁ
includedꢁinꢁtheꢁsuppliedꢁCD-ROM.
•ꢁꢁForꢁdetailsꢁonꢁtheꢁcurrentꢁprovidedꢁbyꢁtheꢁREMOTEꢁ
terminal,ꢁreferꢁtoꢁpageꢁ1ꢅꢃ.
100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails
A clip is a data group that includes the images and sounds created from one shooting session, together with additional
information such as text memos and meta data.
The following manipulations can be performed using the cursor and SET buttons, while checking the images displayed on
the LCD monitor:
• Playback, delete, copy or restore the clip.
• Add or delete a shot mark and a text memo on the clip thumbnail.
• Copy part of a clip by using the text memo.
• Use a text memo to change thumbnail images
• Format P2 cards and SD memory cards.
• Uploading and editing clip metadata from the SD memory card
Thumbnail Operations
Thumbnail Manipulations Overview
Thumbnail screens are configured as follows:
THUMBNAIL
OPERATION
PROPERTY
ALLꢁCLIP
DELETE
FORMAT
REPAIRꢁCLIP
RE-CONNECTION
COPY
CLIPꢁPROPERTY
SAMEꢁFORMATꢁCLIPS
SELECTEDꢁCLIPS
MARKEDꢁCLIPS
TEXTꢁMEMOꢁCLIPS
EXCH.ꢁTHUMBNAIL
DEVICEꢁSETUP
EXIT
CARDꢁSTATUS
SLOTꢁCLIPS
SETUP
EXIT
INDICATOR
DATAꢁDISPLAY
DATEꢁFORMAT
THUMBNAILꢁSIZE
PLAYBACKꢁRESUME
THUMBNAILꢁINIT
EXIT
DEVICES
PROPERTYꢁSETUP
EXIT
HDD
METAꢁDATA
LOAD
EXPORT
EXPLORE
SETUP
EXIT
RECORD
USERꢁCLIPꢁNAME
INITIALIZE
PROPERTY
EXIT
101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SLOT n: This indicates a specific clip on the P2 card.
(n: slot number 1 or 2)
UPDATING..:
Indicated when the unit is updating the
screen or reading data. When the screen is
being updated, the rotating icon is indicated.
For details, refer to [Switching the Thumbnail Display]
(page 105).
Thumbnail Screen
Press the THUMBNAIL button to display the thumbnail
screen on the LCD monitor. Pressing the THUMBNAIL
button again returns the display to the regular display.
When switching is done from the regular screen display to
the thumbnail screen display, all the clips will be displayed
on the thumbnail screen.
2
Slot numbers and HDD status
Pressing the THUMBNAIL MENU button allows you to
navigate the thumbnail menu.
This function indicates on which P2 card the selected
clip is recorded. The number of the slot that contains
the appropriate P2 card is indicated in yellow. If the
clip is recorded on more than one P2 card, then the
numbers of all slots that contain the appropriate cards
are indicated. The numbers of the other slots are shown
in white if they contain P2 cards.
NOTE
When the TCG switch is set to “SET” to set the time code and
user bits or when the camera menu is open, the THUMBNAIL
button does not work.
1
2
When the following P2 card is inserted, the slot number
is displayed with a pink frame.
RUN DOWN CARD
(A P2 card on which the maximum number of
overwrites has been exceeded.)
DIR ENTRY NG CARD
(A P2 card on which the directory structure is not
supported.)
3
The USB HDD section is indicated as follows:
Other than the USB HOST mode: gray
Not connected in USB HOST mode: gray
HDD recognized and usable in USB HOST mode:
white
4
5
6
8
7
HDD recognized and thumbnails shown in USB
HOST mode: yellow
9 10
HDD recognized and data unable to be copied in
USB HOST: red
3
Time Display
You can set this to display the time code at the start
of clip recording, the user bits at the start of clip
recording, the shooting time, the shooting date, the
shooting date and time or USER CLIP NAME.
4
5
6
7
Recording mode
The recording mode for the clip on which the pointer is
located is indicated.
11 12 13 14 15
System mode
The format for the clip on which the pointer is located is
indicated.
1
Display Mode
Displays thumbnail types and other information
screens.
Duration
ALL:
SAME FORMAT:
Display all clips.
The duration of the clip on which the pointer is located
is indicated.
The clips in the same format as the system
format are shown. To check the format,
consult system mode and REC FORMAT
indicated on the STATUS screen of the
viewfinder.
USB HOST mode indicator
Indicated when the mode has been switched to USB
HOST.
For details, see [Viewfinder Screen Status
Displays] (page 65).
SELECT: The clips selected with the SET button are
shown.
MARKER:
Display clips with shot marks.
TEXT MEMO:
Display clips with text memo data.
10ꢀ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8
9
Clip Number
The numbers set by the camera for all the clips
recognized correctly by the P2 card. These numbers
are allocated in chronological order, by shooting dates
and times.
If clips cannot be played because of different recording
formats, they are displayed in red.
X
?
Defective Clip Indicator and
Unknown Clip indicator
This marker is displayed for defective clips, which may
result from a variety of causes, e.g., powering-down
during recording.
Clip with yellow defective clip indicators can be
restored in some cases. Please refer to [Restoring
Clips] (page 109) for more information.
A clip displayed with a red defective clip indicator
cannot be restored and must be deleted. If the clip
cannot be deleted, format the P2 card.
?
is displayed for clips such as those which differ in
format from the P2 standard.
!
10
11
Incomplete Clip Indicator
Indicates that although a clip is recorded across
multiple P2 cards, one of these cards is not inserted
into a P2 card slot.
M
Shot Mark Indicator
This marker is displayed for a clip with a shot mark
attached. For details, refer to [Shot Marker (SHOT
MARK) Recording Function] (page 41).
P
12
13
Indicator for clips with proxy
This marker is displayed for clips with proxy attached.
T
Text Memo Indicator
This marker is displayed for a clip with a text memo
attached.
E
14
Edit Copied Clip Indicator
In models which support edit copying, such as the AJ-
HPM110, this marker is displayed on clips which have
undergone edit copying. For more information about
edit copying, see the instruction manual for a model
that supports edit copying.
W
15
Wide Clip Indicator
This marker is displayed for clips recorded with the 16:9
aspect ratio. However, it does not accompany clips in
HD format.
10ꢂ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Selecting Thumbnails
Playing back Clips
Multiple thumbnails can be randomly selected in the
thumbnail screen.
ꢁ
PressꢁtheꢁTHUMBNAILꢁbutton.
1
• The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD
monitor.
ꢁ
ꢁ
Useꢁtheꢁcursorꢁbuttonsꢁtoꢁmoveꢁtheꢁpointerꢁ
(yellowꢁframe)ꢁtoꢁtheꢁdesiredꢁclipꢁandꢁpressꢁtheꢁ
SETꢁbutton.ꢁ
1
ꢁ
Useꢁtheꢁcursorꢁbuttonsꢁtoꢁmoveꢁtheꢁpointerꢁoverꢁ
theꢁdesiredꢁclip.
2
3
• The frame around the selected thumbnail changes
to a blue frame. Press the SET button again to
deselect the clip.
ꢁ
PressꢁtheꢁPLAY/PAUSEꢁbutton.
• The clip at pointer position is played back on the
LCD monitor.
• After the clip at the cursor location has been
played, subsequent clips are played back in order.
When the last clip has been played, the thumbnail
screen appears.
Additionalꢁclipsꢁcanꢁbeꢁselectedꢁbyꢁrepeatingꢁ
stepꢁ1.
2
It is possible to display only the selected thumbnails in the
thumbnail screen for playback. Please refer to [Switching
the Thumbnail Display] (page 105) for more information.
NOTE
• When playing back clips, it is not necessary to
“select” the clips (blue frames around the thumbnails).
• Clips with clip numbers displayed in red cannot be
played.
NOTE
• To move the pointer to the first or last clip, hold down the
SHIFT button and press the up and down cursor ([/])
buttons.
• To select a sequence of clips, select the first clip and move
the pointer to another clip.Then hold down the SHIFT button
and press the SET button.This will select all clips from the
clip selected first to the clip at the pointer and all clips in
between.
• During playback, pressing the REW button starts 4X
speed reverse playback, and the FF button starts 4X
speed fast playback. Press the PLAY/PAUSE button to
return to normal playback.
• To cancel selected clips, hold down the SHIFT button while
pressing the EXIT button.
• During clip playback, pressing the PLAY/PAUSE button
will temporarily stop (pause) the process.
During a pause, pressing the REW button moves the
pause position to the beginning of the clip. Pressing
the REW button again moves the pause position to the
beginning of the previous clip.
During a pause, pressing the FF button moves the pause
position to the beginning of the next clip.
• Pressing the STOP button during clip playback stops the
playback and returns the display to the thumbnail screen.
NOTE
• When playback is stopped, the position of the pointer moves
to the clip that was being played back, regardless of where
playback started.
a
• When the PLAY/PAUSE button is pressed again, playback will
start from the beginning of the clip on which the pointer is
positioned.To begin playback from the last stop position, set
PLAYBACK RESUME to on. Refer to [Setting the Thumbnail
Display Mode] (page 115) for further details.
• After closing the thumbnail screen by pressing the
THUMBNAIL button, pressing the PLAY/PAUSE button plays
back the first clip (i.e., the clip with the earliest recording
date and time), not the clip on which the pointer was last
positioned.
b c d e f
a
b
c
d
LCD monitor
THUMBNAIL button
EXIT button
e q r wcursor buttons
g SET button
e
f
THUMBNAIL MENU button
SHIFT button
10ꢃ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ꢁ
3
SelectꢁTHUMBNAILꢁfromꢁtheꢁthumbnailꢁmenu.ꢁ
Switching the Thumbnail Display
The display can be switched so that only those clips
matching the specified conditions are displayed in the
thumbnail screen.
• Switch the thumbnail display by selecting one of
the following items:
ꢁ
PressꢁtheꢁTHUMBNAILꢁbutton.
1
2
• The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD
monitor.
ꢁ
PressꢁtheꢁTHUMBNAILꢁMENUꢁbutton.ꢁ
• The thumbnail menu opens.
ALL CLIP:
Display all clips.
SAME FORMAT CLIPS:
Displays clips of the current system
format.
SELECTED CLIPS:
Display randomly selected clips.
MARKED CLIPS:
Display clips with shot marks attached.
TEXT MEMO CLIPS:
Display clips with text memo data
attached.
SLOT CLIPS:
Display clips recorded in the P2 card
inserted in the specified slot. When this
item is selected, “SLOT1” to “SLOT2”
are displayed as a sub-menu. Select the
desired slot to display the clips.
SETUP: Please refer to [Setting the Thumbnail
Display Mode] (page 115) for information
about this item.
a
a
THUMBNAIL MENU button
EXIT:
Close the sub-menu.
10ꢄ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NOTE
Changing thumbnails
Display clip properties by selecting PROPERTY CLIP
PROPERTY on the thumbnail menu to confirm the position of
the thumbnail (the number of frames from the top of the
clip). Since thumbnails come generally from the top of the clip,
“0” is displayed.
It is possible to replace thumbnails with images that
include previously attached text memos while images are
recorded or played back.
ꢁ
1
Addꢁtextꢁmemosꢁtoꢁimagesꢁthatꢁyouꢁintendꢁtoꢁ
change.
Shot Mark
A shot mark can be added to a clip thumbnail to
• For details on how to add text memos, refer to
[Text Memo Recording Function] (page 41).
distinguish this clip from other clips.
ꢁ
SelectꢁTHUMBNAILꢁꢁTEXTꢁMEMOꢁCLIPSꢁtoꢁ
displayꢁthumbnailsꢁofꢁtheꢁclipsꢁwithꢁtextꢁmemos.
2
3
ꢁ
ꢁ
PressꢁtheꢁTHUMBNAILꢁbutton.
1
• The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD
monitor.
ꢁ
Placeꢁtheꢁpointerꢁonꢁtheꢁclipꢁofꢁtheꢁthumbnailꢁ
thatꢁyouꢁintendꢁtoꢁchange,ꢁandꢁthenꢁpressꢁ
SETꢁbutton.ꢁMoveꢁtheꢁpointerꢁtoꢁtheꢁtextꢁmemoꢁ
displayꢁonꢁtheꢁlowerꢁrow.
Useꢁtheꢁcursorꢁbuttonsꢁtoꢁmoveꢁtheꢁpointerꢁ
overꢁtheꢁclipꢁtoꢁwhichꢁyouꢁwantꢁtoꢁattachꢁaꢁshotꢁ
mark.
2
ꢁ
4
Selectꢁtheꢁthumbnailꢁthatꢁyouꢁintendꢁtoꢁ
replace,ꢁplaceꢁtheꢁpointerꢁonꢁit,ꢁandꢁthenꢁselectꢁ
OPERATIONꢁꢁEXCH.ꢁTHUMBNAILꢁonꢁtheꢁ
thumbnailꢁmenu.
ꢁ
3
PressꢁtheꢁUSERꢁbuttonꢁorꢁRETꢁbuttonꢁtoꢁwhichꢁ
theꢁshotꢁmarkꢁfunctionꢁhasꢁbeenꢁassigned.ꢁ
• This adds a shot mark to the thumbnail of the
clip at the pointer position.
To delete a shot mark, place the pointer on the
clip a second time and press the USER button or
RET button to which the shot mark function has
been assigned.
ꢁ
5
PressꢁSETꢁbutton.ꢁWhenꢁtheꢁYES/NOꢁ
confirmationꢁwindowꢁisꢁdisplayed,ꢁselectꢁYESꢁ
byꢁusingꢁtheꢁcursorꢁbuttonꢁandꢁtheꢁSETꢁbutton.ꢁ
USERꢁMAIN,ꢁUSER1ꢁandꢁUSERꢀꢁbuttons
• The menu closes and the thumbnail for the clip is
replaced.
NOTE
• A shot mark can be attached during recording.
• Adding shot marks after recording stops, attaches the shot
mark to the most recently recorded clip.
Please refer to [Shot Marker (SHOT MARK) Recording Function]
(page 41) for more information.
• When adding a shot mark to (or deleting the shot mark from)
a clip recorded across multiple P2 cards, do this with all
these P2 cards inserted into P2 card slots.
10ꢅ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing back a clip at the position where
a text memo is recorded
Text Memo
During recording or playback, you can add text memos to
clips. Text memos can be used to play back clips at some
point or break clips into chunks and copy the necessary
portions.
ꢁ
PressꢁtheꢁTHUMBNAILꢁbutton.
1
2
• The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD
monitor.
Adding a text memo
Text memos can be added in one of the following ways.
Press the USER button or RET button to which the text
memo function has been assigned during recording or
playback.
ꢁ
PressꢁtheꢁTHUMBNAILꢁMENUꢁbuttonꢁandꢁ
selectꢁTHUMBNAILꢁꢁTEXTꢁMEMOꢁCLIPSꢁ
fromꢁtheꢁthumbnailꢁmenu.
This adds text memos where respective button was
pressed.
Pressing the USER button or RET button to which the text
memo function has been assigned when a thumbnail
screen is open, adds a text memo at the beginning of a
clip.
• The clip thumbnails with text memos attached
are displayed in the upper section of the LCD
monitor. The lower section of the LCD monitor
shows information about the text memo on the clip
selected by the pointer.
Thumbnailꢁdisplay
USERꢁMAIN,ꢁUSER1ꢁandꢁUSERꢀꢁbuttons
Showsꢁtheꢁstillꢁimageꢁthatꢁtheꢁtextꢁ
memoꢁisꢁrelatedꢁto.
Showsꢁtheꢁtotalꢁnumberꢁofꢁtextꢁmemosꢁ
attachedꢁtoꢁtheꢁclip.
NOTE
One clip can have up to 100 text and voice memos in
combination. Note that the unit is not capable of adding or
showing voice memos.
ꢁ
3
Moveꢁtheꢁpointerꢁoverꢁtheꢁclipꢁthatꢁcontainsꢁtheꢁ
desiredꢁtextꢁmemoꢁtoꢁplaybackꢁandꢁpressꢁtheꢁ
SETꢁbutton.
• The pointer moves to the lower part of the LCD
monitor.
Theꢁpointerꢁmovesꢁdown.
10ꢆ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using a text memo to break a clip and
copy the necessary portion
ꢁ
4
Withꢁtheꢁpointerꢁlocatedꢁinꢁtheꢁlowerꢁpart,ꢁmoveꢁ
theꢁpointerꢁtoꢁtheꢁdesiredꢁtextꢁmemoꢁnumberꢁ
usingꢁtheꢁcursorꢁrightꢁandꢁleftꢁbuttonsꢁ(p/o).ꢁ
Then,ꢁpressꢁtheꢁPLAY/PAUSEꢁbutton.
ꢁ
Selectꢁtheꢁdesiredꢁtextꢁmemoꢁinꢁaꢁclipꢁbyꢁ
carryingꢁoutꢁstepsꢁ1-ꢂꢁforꢁ[Playingꢁbackꢁaꢁclipꢁ
atꢁtheꢁpositionꢁwhereꢁaꢁtextꢁmemoꢁisꢁrecorded]ꢁ
(pageꢁ10ꢆ).
1
2
• Playback will start from the time code position of
the text memo where the pointer is located.
If the STOP button is pressed during playback
or playback finishes at the end of the clip, the
thumbnail screen appears again with the pointer
located on the text memo where playback started.
• Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button to select
EXIT or press the EXIT button to return the pointer
to the upper part of the thumbnail screen.
ꢁ
Moveꢁtheꢁpointerꢁtoꢁtheꢁdesiredꢁtextꢁmemo,ꢁandꢁ
thenꢁpressꢁtheꢁSETꢁbutton.ꢁ
• You can select more than one text memo.
NOTE
ꢁ
PressꢁtheꢁTHUMBNAILꢁMENUꢁbuttonꢁtoꢁselectꢁ
OPERATIONꢁꢁCOPY.
3
4
• Pressing the REC button in the text memo screen will not
start recording.
• Text memo thumbnails for AVC-Intra format clips that cannot
be played back appear in gray.
ꢁ
UseꢁtheꢁcursorꢁbuttonsꢁandꢁtheꢁSETꢁbuttonꢁtoꢁ
selectꢁtheꢁslotꢁtoꢁcopyꢁtoꢁandꢁselectꢁYES.
Deleting a text memo
• Copying starts.
• The portion between the selected text memo and
the next one is copied. If no text memo is found
after the selected memo, then the remainder of the
clip after the selected text memo is copied.
• If multiple text memos are selected, the selected
sections are copied.
ꢁ
1
Selectꢁtheꢁdesiredꢁtextꢁmemoꢁbyꢁcarryingꢁoutꢁ
stepsꢁ1-ꢂꢁforꢁ[Playingꢁbackꢁaꢁclipꢁatꢁtheꢁpositionꢁ
whereꢁaꢁtextꢁmemoꢁisꢁrecorded]ꢁ(pageꢁ10ꢆ).
• When the clip is being copied, the unit indicates
the progress of the copy process and cancellation
status. To discontinue the copy process, press the
SET button. Then, a YES/NO confirmation screen
is displayed. Use the cursor buttons and SET
button to select YES.
ꢁ
Moveꢁtheꢁpointerꢁtoꢁtheꢁdesiredꢁtextꢁmemo,ꢁandꢁ
thenꢁpressꢁtheꢁSETꢁbutton.
2
3
ꢁ
PressꢁtheꢁTHUMBNAILꢁMENUꢁbuttonꢁtoꢁselectꢁ
OPERATIONꢁꢁDELETEꢁfromꢁtheꢁthumbnailꢁ
menu.
NOTE
In clip division and copying using the text memo function, the
area copied may be automatically modified depending on the
recording format of the clip.
•YES and NO appear to confirm deletion. Use the
cursor buttons and the SET button to select YES.
The text memo is deleted.
Deleting Clips
ꢁ
ꢁ
PressꢁtheꢁTHUMBNAILꢁbutton.
1
• The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD
monitor.
Useꢁtheꢁcursorꢁbuttonsꢁtoꢁmoveꢁtheꢁpointerꢁtoꢁ
theꢁclipꢁtoꢁbeꢁdeletedꢁandꢁpressꢁtheꢁSETꢁbuttonꢁ
toꢁselectꢁtheꢁclip.ꢁ
2
ꢁ
3
PressꢁtheꢁTHUMBNAILꢁMENUꢁbuttonꢁandꢁ
selectꢁOPERATIONꢁꢁDELETEꢁfromꢁtheꢁ
thumbnailꢁmenu.
10ꢇ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ꢁ
4
Theꢁfollowingꢁscreenꢁappears.ꢁUseꢁtheꢁcursorꢁ
buttonsꢁandꢁtheꢁSETꢁbuttonꢁtoꢁselectꢁYES.
Reconnection of Incomplete Clips
Incomplete clips may be generated when clips recorded
on multiple P2 cards (connected clips) are separately
copied to different cards. The reconnection function
generates one clip (the original, connected clip) from
incomplete clips.
ꢁ
PressꢁtheꢁTHUMBNAILꢁbutton.
1
2
• The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD
monitor.
ꢁ
UseꢁtheꢁcursorꢁandꢁSETꢁbuttonꢁtoꢁselectꢁ
incompleteꢁclipsꢁtoꢁreconnect.
• The clip is deleted. All selected clips (in blue
frames) are deleted by this operation.
• Usually, thumbnails of incomplete clips (clips with
marker) are displayed in line.
NOTE
Toꢁinterruptꢁdeleting,ꢁpressꢁtheꢁSHIFTꢁandꢁEXITꢁbuttonsꢁorꢁ
theꢁSETꢁbuttonꢁtoꢁcancelꢁtheꢁoperation.ꢁ
Partiallyꢁdeletedꢁclipsꢁcannotꢁbeꢁrestoredꢁbyꢁcanceling.ꢁ
ꢁ
3
PressꢁtheꢁTHUMBNAILꢁMENUꢁbuttonꢁandꢁ
selectꢁOPERATIONꢁꢁRE-CONNECTIONꢁfromꢁ
theꢁthumbnailꢁmenu.
• When a confirmation screen asks you to confirm
that you want to reconnect the clip, use a cursor
button and the SET button to select YES if you
want to reconnect the clip.
Restoring Clips
Restores clips that are defective as a result of sudden
powering-down during recording, or removal of the P2 card
being accessed.
NOTE
Clips that are connected as a group must be grouped together
or they will be displayed as incomplete clips.
NOTE
Only those clips with yellow defective clip indicators can be
restored. Delete the clips with red defective clip indicators. If
the clip cannot be deleted, format the P2 card.
During restoration of the clips, however, the defective-clip
indicator may change from yellow to red, resulting in inability
to restore the clips.
Copying Clips
Selected clips can be copied to the P2 card in the desired
slot or SD memory card.
ꢁ
PressꢁtheꢁTHUMBNAILꢁbutton.
ꢁ
ꢁ
PressꢁtheꢁTHUMBNAILꢁbutton.
1
2
1
• The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD
monitor.
• The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD
monitor.
ꢁ
Useꢁtheꢁcursorꢁbuttonsꢁtoꢁmoveꢁtheꢁpointerꢁoverꢁ
theꢁclipꢁyouꢁwantꢁtoꢁrestoreꢁ(defectiveꢁclipsꢁareꢁ
indicatedꢁbyꢁdefectiveꢁclipꢁindicators).ꢁ
Useꢁtheꢁcursorꢁbuttonsꢁtoꢁmoveꢁtheꢁpointerꢁtoꢁ
theꢁdesiredꢁclipꢁandꢁpressꢁtheꢁSETꢁbutton.
2
PressꢁtheꢁSETꢁbuttonꢁtoꢁselectꢁtheꢁclip.
ꢁ
3
PressꢁtheꢁTHUMBNAILꢁMENUꢁbutton,ꢁandꢁ
selectꢁOPERATIONꢁꢁREPAIRꢁCLIPꢁfromꢁtheꢁ
thumbnailꢁmenu.
• When a confirmation screen asks you to confirm
that you want to repair the clip, use a cursor button
and the SET button to select YES if you want to
restore the clip.
10ꢈ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ꢁ
3
PressꢁtheꢁTHUMBNAILꢁMENUꢁbuttonꢁandꢁ
selectꢁOPERATIONꢁꢁCOPYꢁfromꢁtheꢁ
thumbnailꢁmenu.ꢁ
Setting of Clip Meta Data
Information such as the name of the person who shot the
video, the name of the reporter, the shooting location, or a
text memo can be read from the SD memory card, and can
be recorded as Clip Meta Data.
• Select slot 1-2 or SD memory card as the
destination.
Reading the SD memory card that
contains the Clip Meta Data (metadata
upload file).
ꢁ
InsertꢁtheꢁSDꢁmemoryꢁcardꢁthatꢁcontainsꢁtheꢁ
ClipꢁMetaꢁDataꢁ(metadataꢁuploadꢁfile).
1
2
ꢁ
PressꢁtheꢁTHUMBNAILꢁbutton.
• The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD
monitor.
• When a confirmation screen asks you to confirm
that you want to copy the clip, use a cursor button
and the SET button to select YES if you want to
copy the clip.
NOTE
Press the THUMBNAIL button while pressing DISP/
MODE CHK button when a thumbnail is displayed to
move to step 4.
ꢁ
3
PressꢁtheꢁTHUMBNAILꢁMENUꢁbuttonꢁandꢁ
SelectꢁMETAꢁDATAꢁꢁLOADꢁfromꢁtheꢁthumbnailꢁ
menu,ꢁandꢁpressꢁtheꢁSETꢁbutton.
NOTE
• Do not turn off the power or remove a P2 card while data is
being copied. Otherwise the P2 card may fail or defective
clips may be generated. Delete any defective clips that are
generated and copy them again.
• When clips are copied to P2 cards, all the information on the
clips is copied. However, when they are copied to the SD
memory card*1, video and sound information is not copied,
only thumbnails, clip metadata, icons, voice memo, text
memo, proxy, and real-time metadata.
• When there is insufficient recording capacity on the
destination, the message “LACK OF REC CAPACITY!” is
displayed, and copying will not proceed. When clips selected
for copying contain defective clips, the message “CANNOT
COPY” appears and copying will not proceed. If the selected
clips include clips already on the destination P2 card,
copying will not proceed.
• To interrupt copying, press the SHIFT and EXIT buttons or the
SET button.The clip that was being copied is deleted at the
destination.
• When identical clips exist on the destination card, the
“OVERWRITE?” is displayed. Select “YES” or “NO”.
*1 Regarding SD memory cards to be used, see [SD memory
card precautions] (page 21).
ꢁ
4
Namesꢁofꢁmetadataꢁuploadꢁfilesꢁstoredꢁonꢁ
theꢁSDꢁmemoryꢁcardꢁareꢁdisplayedꢁ*ꢀ.ꢁSelectꢁ
theꢁdesiredꢁfilesꢁusingꢁtheꢁcursorꢁbuttons,ꢁandꢁ
chooseꢁYES.
• Uploading starts.
• Uploaded metadata is retained even if the power
is turned off.
• For more information on confirmation of uploaded
data, see [Checking and modifying read
metadata] (page 111).
*2 Press the cursor button (o) to display the full
name of the file, up to 100 characters, at the
cursor position. Press the cursor button (p) to
return to the previous location.
110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THUMBNAIL:
Displays the location of the frame (frame offset)
Clip Meta Data items
Clip Meta Data includes the following items: Underlined
items can be set by reading the metadata upload file on
the SD memory card. Other items are set automatically
during shooting. Using the latest update version of P2
Viewer, metadata upload files can be written to SD memory
cards using a PC. Download the latest update version of P2
Viewer from the following URL and install it on your PC:
https://eww.pavc.panasonic.co.jp/pro-av/
and the size (height and width) of the image
selected as the thumbnail image.
*1 The USER CLIP NAME recording method is selectable.
For details, refer to [Selecting the USER CLIP NAME
recording method] (page 112).
*2 During recording, the camera does not automatically set
altitude, latitude and longitude of the shoot.
Such data can be set in the property of a recorded clip.
*3 Be sure to enter [TEXT] when entering MEMO. It is not
possible to record only [PERSON] or [OFFSET].
Regarding SD memory cards to be used, see [SD memory
card precautions] (page 21).
NOTE
NOTE
Files edited using software other than P2 Viewer are displayed
as “UNKNOWN DATA!”, and may not be read.
GLOBAL CLIP ID:
Displays the global clip ID, which indicates the
shooting status of the clip.
USER CLIP NAME:
• This unit only displays printable ASCII characters.
Checking and modifying read metadata
The unit allows you to check details of metadata read from
SD memory cards.
Displays the clip name specified by the user.*1
VIDEO: Displays [FRAME RATE] (frame rate of the clip),
[PULL DOWN], and [ASPECT RATIO].
AUDIO: [SAMPLING RATE] (sampling frequency of
recorded sound) and [BITS PER SAMPLE]
(digitized bit[s] of recorded sound).
ACCESS: Displays [CREATOR] (person who recorded the
clip), [CREATION DATE] (date when the clip was
recorded), [LAST UPDATE DATE] (date of the
latest update of the clip), and [LAST UPDATE
PERSON] (person who made the latest update of
the clip).
ꢁ
PressꢁtheꢁTHUMBNAILꢁbutton.
1
2
• The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD
monitor.
ꢁ
PressꢁtheꢁTHUMBNAILꢁMENUꢁbuttonꢁtoꢁselectꢁ
METAꢁDATAꢁꢁPROPERTYꢁfromꢁtheꢁthumbnailꢁ
menu.ꢁ
• Then the screen shown below appears.
DEVICE: Displays [MANUFACTURER] (name of the
device manufacturer), [SERIAL NO.] (serial
number of the device) and [MODEL NAME]
(model name of the device).
SHOOT*2:Displays [SHOOTER] (name of the person who
shot the video), [START DATE] (start date of
shooting), [END DATE] (end date of shooting),
and [LOCATION] ALTITUDE/LONGITUDE/
LATITUDE/SOURCE/PLACE NAME (altitude,
longitude, latitude, and source of the information
and name of the location).
SCENARIO:
Displays [PROGRAM NAME], [SCENE NO], and
[TAKE NO].
NEWS: Displays [REPORTER] (name of the reporter),
[PURPOSE] (purpose of shooting), and
[OBJECT] (object of shooting).
MEMO*3: Displays [NO.] (the number of the text memo),
[OFFSET] (location of the frame with added text
memo in relation to the beginning of the clip),
[PERSON] (person who recorded the text memo
added to the clip), and [TEXT] (contents of the
text memo).
111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Selecting the USER CLIP NAME recording
method
ꢁ
3
Useꢁtheꢁcursorꢁbuttonsꢁtoꢁmoveꢁtheꢁpointerꢁtoꢁ
theꢁitemꢁtoꢁconfirmꢁandꢁpressꢁtheꢁSETꢁbutton.
• Use this function to check loaded metadata
settings.
Select META DATA USER CLIP NAME from the thumbnail
menu to select the recording method. Two options are
available: TYPE1 and TYPE2.
TYPE1(Factoryꢁdefaults)
USER CLIP NAME to be
recorded
If clip metadata has been
Uploaded data
read in
If no clip metadata has been
read in or if the setting for
recording clip metadata has
been turned off
Same as GLOBAL CLIP ID
(UMID data)
TYPEꢀ
USER CLIP NAME to be
recorded
If clip metadata has been
read in
If no clip metadata has been
read in or if the setting for
recording clip metadata has
been turned off
Uploaded data + COUNT
ꢁ
4
Whileꢁviewingꢁmetadataꢁsettings,ꢁuseꢁtheꢁcursorꢁ
buttonsꢁtoꢁmoveꢁtheꢁpointerꢁtoꢁtheꢁdesiredꢁ
option.ꢁThen,ꢁpressꢁtheꢁSETꢁbutton.ꢁ
value*1
Same as CLIP NAME
• A soft keyboard screen is displayed, allowing you
to modify the setting.
*1 The COUNT value is indicated as a four-digit number.
The COUNT value is incremented each time a new clip
is captured if clip metadata has been read in and TYPE2
has been selected as the recording method.
The COUNT value can be reset using the following
procedure.
Select META DATA PROPERTY from the thumbnail
menu, then select USER CLIP NAME to display the
menu shown below. Select “COUNT RESET” with the
cursor and press the SET button to reset the COUNT
value to 1.
To set whether or not the uploaded
metadata is recorded
Set “ON”/“OFF” in META DATA RECORD from the
thumbnail menu. The factory setting is “OFF”.
NOTE
When an 8 GB or larger capacity P2 is used and the recording
session exceeds the prescribed duration (DVCPRO HD and
the AVCIntra100: about 5 minutes; AVC-Intra50: about 10
minutes) or spans more than one P2 card, the recording will
automatically be split into separate clips. At this time, each clip
will be provided with its own COUNT value.
11ꢀ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Exampleꢁofꢁrecordingꢁ(DVCPROꢁHD)ꢁaꢁclipꢁonꢁoneꢁPꢀꢁcard:
Recordingꢁstart Recordingꢁpause
Recordingꢁdurationꢁ=ꢁApprox.ꢆꢁmin
Clipꢁ1ꢁ
COUNTꢁvalueꢁ
=ꢁ0001
Clipꢁꢀꢁ
COUNTꢁvalueꢁ
=ꢁ000ꢀ
Approx.ꢁꢄꢁmin
Approx.ꢁꢀꢁmin
ExampleꢁofꢁrecordingꢁaꢁclipꢁonꢁtwoꢁPꢀꢁcards:
Recordingꢁstart Recordingꢁpause
Clipꢁ1ꢁ
COUNTꢁvalueꢁ
=ꢁ000ꢂ
Clipꢁꢀꢁ
COUNTꢁvalueꢁ
=ꢁ000ꢃ
ꢀndꢁcard
1stꢁcard
If the clip thumbnails are displayed as shown in the
example above or their properties are indicated using a P2
device, the thumbnail and COUNT value of clip 1 will be
displayed.
Clearing uploaded metadata
Select META DATA INITIALIZE from the thumbnail
menu, and press the SET button. Select YES when the
confirmation screen is displayed.
11ꢂ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting of Proxy (optional)
Formatting a P2 Card
Installing the video encoder card (AJ-YAX800G, optional
accessory) in P2 card slot 2 makes it possible to set up the
proxy recording function.
The video encoder card is not recognized when inserted if
the power for the unit is turned on. Insert the video encoder
card after turning off the power for the unit.
Select OPERATION DEVICE SETUP PROXY from the
thumbnail menu to specify the setting.
For details on how to install and set up the video encoder
card, refer to the User’s Guide of the video encoder card.
ꢁ
ꢁ
PressꢁtheꢁTHUMBNAILꢁbutton.
1
• The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD
monitor.
PressꢁtheꢁTHUMBNAILꢁMENUꢁbuttonꢁandꢁ
selectꢁOPERATIONꢁꢁFORMATꢁfromꢁtheꢁ
thumbnailꢁmenu.ꢁ
2
• When the screen shown below appears, select the
slot number of the P2 card you want to format and
press the SET button.
NOTE
When “PROXY CARD ERROR” is indicated in the viewfinder,
either check the video encoder card or set the unit so that
proxy recording is not performed.
• Select EXIT if formatting is not required.
ꢁ
3
Theꢁfollowingꢁscreenꢁappears.ꢁUseꢁtheꢁcursorꢁ
buttonsꢁandꢁtheꢁSETꢁbuttonꢁtoꢁselectꢁYES.
• The selected P2 card is formatted.
NOTE
Check that no important data remains on a card before
formatting since data erased by formatting cannot be
recovered.
11ꢃ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Formatting SD memory cards
SD memory cards can also be formatted from the
thumbnail screen. With an SD memory card inserted into
the unit, perform the following operation:
Setting the Thumbnail Display
Mode
The thumbnail display mode can be customized to suit
your preferences.
ꢁ
PressꢁtheꢁTHUMBNAILꢁbutton.
1
2
ꢁ
ꢁ
PressꢁtheꢁTHUMBNAILꢁbutton.
1
• The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD
monitor.
• The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD
monitor.
ꢁ
PressꢁtheꢁTHUMBNAILꢁMENUꢁbuttonꢁandꢁ
selectꢁOPERATIONꢁꢁFORMATꢁfromꢁtheꢁ
thumbnailꢁmenu.ꢁ
PressꢁtheꢁTHUMBNAILꢁMENUꢁbuttonꢁandꢁ
selectꢁTHUMBNAILꢁꢁSETUPꢁfromꢁtheꢁ
thumbnailꢁmenu.ꢁ
2
• Select “SD CARD” and press the SET button when
the screen shown below appears.
• The following screen appears.
• Select “EXIT” if formatting is not required.
INDICATOR:
Select which indicators you want to show on
thumbnails and which you want to hide.
• ALL HIDE:
ꢁ
3
Theꢁfollowingꢁscreenꢁappears.ꢁUseꢁtheꢁcursorꢁ
buttonsꢁandꢁtheꢁSETꢁbuttonꢁtoꢁselectꢁYES.
ON:
OFF:
No indicators are displayed.
Indication/No indication will be set
depending on the following menu.
The factory settings are as follows.
• MARKER:
Switches the shot mark marker between
indication and no indication (ON/OFF). The
factory setting is ON (indication).
• TEXT MEMO:
Switches the text memo marker between
indication and no indication (ON/OFF). The
factory setting is ON (indication).
• WIDE:
Switches the wide marker between indication
and no indication (ON/OFF). The factory
setting is ON (indication).
• The SD memory card is formatted.
NOTE
•You can also use the menu option SD CARD FORMAT in the
CARD FUNCTIONS screen to format SD memory cards.
For details, refer to [Formatting, Writing and Reading an SD
memory card] (page 81).
• Check that no important data remains on a card before
formatting since data erased by formatting cannot be
recovered.
• PROXY:
Switches the proxy marker between
indication and no indication (ON/OFF). The
factory setting is ON (indication).
DATA DISPLAY:
The time display field of the clip offers a choice
of Time Code (TC), User Bits (UB), Shooting
Time (TIME), Shooting Date (DATE), Shooting
Date and Time (DATE/TIME) or USER CLIP
NAME. The factory setting is Time Code.
11ꢄ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DATE FORMAT:
Properties
Properties display clip properties and P2 card status.
It is possible to edit and rewrite recorded clip metadata
while clip properties are displayed.
You can specify the display order for the
shooting date as either Year/Month/Day (Y-M-
D), Month/Day/Year (M-D-Y) or Day/Month/ Year
(D-M-Y).
The factory setting is Month/Day/Year.
This setting is reflected in the recording date
shown in the clip property and the shooting date
shown when DATE is selected under the item
DATA DISPLAY.
Clip Property
From the thumbnail menu, select PROPERTY CLIP
PROPERTY. The following screen appears.
THUMBNAIL SIZE:
1
2
3
For the size of thumbnails displayed on one
screen, either LARGE (3 X 2 thumbnails
displayed) or NORMAL (4 X 3 thumbnails
displayed) can be selected. The factory default
value is NORMAL.
PLAYBACK RESUME:
Selecting a position to restart playback after
stopping playback on the thumbnails screen
using the STOP button.
ON:
OFF:
Playback starts from the stop position.
Playback starts from the beginning of
the clip indicated by the pointer.
Note that if the pointer is moved after stopping
playback, the playback will restart from the
beginning of the clip indicated by the pointer
regardless of this setting. Also, attempting to
play back from the end of all the available clips
will cause the screen to flash momentarily,
indicating that the there are no more clips which
can be played back.
4
5
1
2
3
Clip Number
Thumbnail
Clip Information
Indicates the indicators added to the clip and the
number of text and voice memos added to the clip.
mark appears if the clip is recorded on a write-
protected P2 card.
THUMBNAIL INIT:
The
Returns the above thumbnail display settings
to their factory default values. Move the cursor
to this option, and press the SET button. Select
YES in the confirmation screen that appears.
NOTE
The unit is not capable of recording or playing back voice
memos.
EXIT:
Returns to the previous menu.
4
Clip Information
Displays detailed information about the clip.
CLIP NAME:
Display clip names.
START TC:
The time code value at the start of the recording.
START UB:
The user bit value at the start of the recording.
DATE:
The date of the recording.
TIME:
The time at the start of the recording.
DURATION:
The time length of the clip.
V_FORMAT:
The recording format for the clip.
FRAME RATE:
The frame rate for the playback.
11ꢅ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REC RATE:
The recording frame rate is displayed. (Only
ꢁ
4
PressꢁOKꢁonꢁtheꢁkeyboardꢁtoꢁwriteꢁtheꢁmodifiedꢁ
metadataꢁonꢁtheꢁclipꢁandꢁreturnꢁtoꢁtheꢁmetadataꢁ
window.
displayed for clips recorded using native recording
with the VFR function.)
5
Clip Meta Data
NOTE
Displays more detailed data about the clip. Use the
cursor buttons to move the pointer, and press the
SET button to check the detailed content. For more
information on displayed metadata, see [Setting of Clip
Meta Data] (page 110).
• LOCATION (recording location data) data for a SHOOT cannot
be deleted independently.Thus by setting ALTITUDE to empty
will also delete the LONGITUDE and LATITUDE settings.
!
• The metadata for a clip with the
incomplete clip indicator
cannot be modified. Metadata on clips recorded on multiple
P2 cards must be modified when all P2 cards that contain the
data are inserted.
Modification of recorded clip metadata
• Any MEMO with 101 characters or more cannot be modified.
ꢁ
Displayꢁtheꢁwindowꢁforꢁdetailedꢁclipꢁmetadataꢁ
thatꢁyouꢁintendꢁtoꢁmodifyꢁinꢁtheꢁclipꢁpropertiesꢁ
window.
P2 Card Status Display
1
2
P2 Card Status Display Settings
Select PROPERTY CARD STATUS from the thumbnail
menu to set the desired indication mode (remaining free
space or used memory capacity) for the P2 card status
display.
ꢁ
Placeꢁtheꢁcursorꢁonꢁtheꢁitemꢁtoꢁbeꢁmodifiedꢁ
usingꢁtheꢁcursorꢁbutton.ꢁ
• The metadata that can be modified are shown like
[CREATOR] in the following figure.
ꢁ
PressꢁtheꢁTHUMBNAILꢁbutton.
1
2
• The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD
monitor.
ꢁ
PressꢁtheꢁTHUMBNAILꢁMENUꢁbuttonꢁandꢁ
selectꢁPROPERTYꢁꢁPROPERTYꢁSETUPꢁꢁ
PꢀꢁCARDꢁCAPꢁfromꢁtheꢁthumbnailꢁmenu.
• The following screen appears. Select the P2 card
status display settings from the P2 CARD CAP
menu option.
ꢁ
3
PressꢁtheꢁSETꢁbutton.
• The input window (soft keyboard) for modifying
metadata is displayed.
• Use the keyboard to modify the metadata.
REMAIN:
Show remaining free space on the P2 card as
the P2 card status display. (Factory setting)
USED:
Show used memory capacity on the P2 card as
the P2 card status display.
Use the keyboard operations described in
[Checking and modifying read metadata]
(page 111).
11ꢆ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DIR ENTRY NG CARD:
Contents of P2 Card Status Display
The directory structure on the P2 card is not
supported.
For details on P2 card status indications, refer to [2. P2
Card Status (remaining free space)].
Settings
From the thumbnail menu, select PROPERTY CARD
STATUS. The following screen appears.
Whenꢁ“REMAIN”ꢁisꢁselected:
Whenꢁ“USED”ꢁisꢁselected:
1
2
1
2
3
3
5
4
5
4
1
Write-protect Mark
The mark appears if the P2 card is write-protected.
1
Write-protect Mark
The mark appears if the P2 card is write-protected.
2
P2 Card Status (remaining free space)
2
P2 Card Status (used memory capacity)
The remaining memory capacity of the P2 card is indicated
by a bar graph and percentage. The bar graph indicator
moves to the left as the remaining free space decreases.
The following indications may appear, depending on the
card status:
The used memory capacity of the P2 card is indicated
by a bar graph and a percentage figure. The bar
graph indicator moves to the right as the used memory
capacity increases.
The following indications may appear, depending on
the card status:
FORMAT ERROR!:
An unformatted P2 card is inserted.
FORMAT ERROR!:
NOT SUPPORTED!:
An unformatted P2 card is inserted.
An unsupported card is inserted in the camera.
NOT SUPPORTED!:
NO CARD!:
An unsupported card is inserted in the camera.
No P2 cards are inserted.
NO CARD!:
Use the cursor button to place the cursor on the P2
card for data you want to access and press the SET
button to display detailed information about the P2
card to check individual information such as the serial
number and the user ID.
P2 cards are not inserted.
Use the cursor button to place the cursor on the P2
card for data you want to access and press the SET
button to display detailed information about the P2
card to check individual information such as the serial
number and the user ID.
3
P2 Card Remaining Capacity/Total Capacity
Displays the P2 card remaining capacity and total
capacity in minutes. The total remaining capacity for
each P2 card will not show actual capacity since only
time in minutes is displayed.
3
P2 Card used memory capacity/Total Capacity
Displays the used memory capacity on a P2 card and
the total capacity, in minutes. Because fractions are
truncated, the figure shown for used memory capacity
on a P2 card may differ from the figure for total capacity.
The used memory capacity of a write-protected P2 card
is displayed as 100%.
Note that the indicated capacity will vary according to
the frame rate in native recording with VFR operation.
4
5
Total remaining free space for the slot
Displays the total remaining free space for both slots.
Please note that the remaining capacity of a write-
protected P2 card is not included in the total remaining
capacity.
Note that the indicated capacity will vary according to
the frame rate in native recording with VFR operation.
4
5
Total used memory capacity for all slots
Displays the total used memory capacity for both slots.
Warning symbol
Inserting the following type of P2 cards will display the
Warning symbol
Inserting the following type of P2 cards will display the
(
) symbol.
(
) symbol.
RUN DOWN CARD:
RUN DOWN CARD:
The maximum number of overwrites on the P2 card
has been exceeded.
The maximum number of overwrites on the P2 card
has been exceeded.
11ꢇ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DIR ENTRY NG CARD:
The directory structure on the P2 card is not
supported.
For details on P2 card status indications, refer to [2. P2
Card Status (used memory capacity)]
SD memory card Status Display
The status display enables a confirmation of the SD
memory card formatted condition, available memory
capacity etc. From the thumbnail menu, select PROPERTY
DEVICES SD CARD.
If the format is compatible with SD standards, the message
SD STANDARD : SUPPORTED
If the format is not compatible with SD standards, the
message
SD STANDARD : NOT SUPPORTED
is displayed. If this is the case, writing or reading will
not be successful. Format the card with the unit. For
more information on formatting SD memory cards, see
[Formatting SD memory cards] (page 115).
NOTE
The indication of remaining capacity on an SD memory card
(PROXY REM) provides only a rough estimate of remaining
capacity and may differ from actual remaining capacity. SD and
SDHC cards with Speed Class Ratings may indicate recording
times that are significantly lower than actual capacity,
especially when used for recording a large number of short
video clips.The remaining capacity is displayed only when
proxy recording is set up to record on an SD memory card. For
details on setup procedures, refer to the User’s Guide of the
video encoder card (AJ-YAX800G, an optional accessory).
Video Encoder Card Status Display
(optional)
Attaching the video encoder card (AJ-YAX800G, optional),
select PROPERTY DEVICES PROXY from the
thumbnail menu.
The slot in which the video encoder card is inserted, and
version information is displayed.
11ꢈ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 Menu Operations
Viewfinder and LCD Menus
Using the menus
Use the setup menus to change the settings to suit the
scenes you are shooting or what you are recording.
• If the thumbnail menu is displayed, press the
THUMBNAIL button to clear the display.
• The menu items indicated in the blue characters cannot
be used.
ꢁ
2
UseꢁtheꢁJOGꢁdialꢁbuttonꢁ(orꢁtheꢁUpꢁandꢁDownꢁ
cursorꢁbuttons)ꢁtoꢁhighlightꢁtheꢁfunctionꢁyouꢁ
wantꢁtoꢁchange.
MAIN MENU
1.SCENE FINE
2.SYSTEM SETUP
3.SW MODE
4.RECORDING SETUP
5.AUDIO SETUP
6.OUTPUT SEL
7.DISPLAY SETUP
8.BATTERY SETUP
PUSH MENU TO EXIT
ꢁ
3
PressꢁtheꢁJOGꢁdialꢁbuttonꢁtoꢁdisplayꢁtheꢁitems.
a
SW MODE
LOW GAIN
MID GAIN
HIGH GAIN
ATW
0dB
6dB
12dB
OFF
ATW TYPE
W.BAL.PRESET
USER MAIN
USER1
1
3.2K
Y GET
BACK LIGHT
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
b
ꢁ
ꢀ4
UseꢁtheꢁJOGꢁdialꢁbuttonꢁtoꢁhighlightꢁtheꢁitemꢁ
youꢁwantꢁtoꢁchange.
a
b
JOG dial button
MENU button
SW MODE
LOW GAIN
MID GAIN
HIGH GAIN
ATW
0dB
6dB
ꢁ
1
PressꢁtheꢁMENUꢁbuttonꢁtoꢁendꢁanyꢁmodeꢁotherꢁ
thanꢁrecording.
12dB
OFF
ATW TYPE
W.BAL.PRESET
USER MAIN
USER1
1
• Hold down the MENU button for about 1 second.
• The function screen appears in the viewfinder and
on the LCD screen.
3.2K
Y GET
BACK LIGHT
MAIN MENU
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
1.SCENE FINE
2.SYSTEM SETUP
3.SW MODE
4.RECORDING SETUP
5.AUDIO SETUP
6.OUTPUT SEL
7.DISPLAY SETUP
8.BATTERY SETUP
PUSH MENU TO EXIT
1ꢀ0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Initializing user files and scene files
simultaneously
ꢁ
5
UseꢁtheꢁJOGꢁdialꢁbuttonꢁtoꢁchangeꢁtheꢁsettingꢁ
value.
You can return the user files and the six scene files to their
factory defaults by selecting YES in the menu option MENU
INIT in the OTHER FUNCTIONS screen.
SW MODE
LOW GAIN
MID GAIN
HIGH GAIN
ATW
0dB
6dB
12dB
OFF
ATW TYPE
W.BAL.PRESET
USER MAIN
USER1
1
3.2K
5.6K
BACK LIGHT
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
ꢁ
ꢁ
Toꢁchangeꢁotherꢁsettings,ꢁrepeatꢁstepsꢁꢃꢁandꢁꢄ.
6
• When you finish, press the MENU button to return
to the function screen.
Toꢁchangeꢁotherꢁfunctions,ꢁrepeatꢁstepsꢁꢀꢁtoꢁꢄ.
7
• To exit the function screen and return to the normal
screen, press the MENU button again.
NOTE
Direct close function
When the MENU button is pressed and held down after making
a menu setting, the setting menu screen closes without first
returning to the previous setting menu.
Tꢀo quickly change settings (MASTER PED and H PHASE
only)
• Fast UP
Hold down the JOG dial button while turning it upwards
and maintain this position.
• Fast DOWN
Hold down the JOG dial button while turning it downwards
and maintain this position.
Initializing the menu settings
The menu settings contain both the user file settings and
the scene file settings. You can initialize them separately.
To initialize scene files (i.e. all the
settings other than the scene file
settings)
Select INITIAL in USER FILE of the OTHER FUNCTIONS
screen. The current menu settings of user file will return to
the factory settings.
To initialize the scene file
From the 6 scene files, select the one you want to initialize
with the SCENE FILE dial. Then in the SCENE FILE screen,
LOAD/SAVE/INIT, select INITIAL.
The settings for only the selected scene file are returned to
the factory settings.
• This does not affect the other scene files.
1ꢀ1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setup menu structure
MAIN MENU
SCENE FILE
(page 124)
LOAD/SAVE/INIT
VFR
SYSTEM MODE
REC SIGNAL
REC FORMAT
CAMERA MODE
SCAN REVERSE
ASPECT CONV
SETUP
FRAME RATE
(SYNCHRO SCAN)
DETAIL LEVEL
V DETAIL LEVEL
DETAIL CORING
CHROMA LEVEL
CHROMA PHASE
COLOR TEMP Ach
COLOR TEMP Bch
MASTER PED
A.IRIS LEVEL
DRS EFFECT
GAMMA
SYSTEM SETUP
(page 126)
PC MODE SELECT
PC MODE
SW MODE
(page 128)
LOW GAIN
MID GAIN
HIGH GAIN
ATW
KNEE
MATRIX
SKIN TONE DTL
V DETAIL FREQ
NAME EDIT
ATW TYPE
W.BAL.PRESET
USER MAIN
USER1
USER2
RET SW
WFM
FRONT VR CH1
FRONT VR CH2
MIC LOWCUT CH1
MIC LOWCUT CH2
MIC LOWCUT CH3
MIC LOWCUT CH4
LIMITER CH1
AUTO KNEE SW
RECORDING SETUP
(page 129)
REC FUNCTION
ONE SHOT TIME
INTERVAL TIME
START DELAY
PREREC MODE
TC MODE
LIMITER CH2
AUTO LEVEL CH3
AUTO LEVEL CH4
25M REC CH SEL
TEST TONE
UB MODE
AUDIO SETUP
(page 130)
F.MIC POWER
R.MIC POWER
OUTPUT SEL
(page 132)
SDI SELECT
SDI META DATA
SDI EDH
MONITOR SELECT
F.MIC LEVEL
R.MIC CH1 LEVEL
R.MIC CH2 LEVEL
HEADROOM
DOWNCON MODE
VIDEO OUT CHAR
VIDEO OUT ZEBRA
TC OUT
WIRELESS WARN
WIRELESS TYPE
1394 AUDIO OUT
TC VIDEO SYNCRO
DISPLAY SETUP
(page 132)
EVF PEAK LEVEL
EVF PEAK FREQ
EVF SETTING
EVF B. LIGHT
EVF COLOR
ZEBRA1 DETECT
ZEBRA2 DETECT
ZEBRA2
EXT DC IN SEL
BATTERY SELECT
BATTERY MODE
PROPAC14 NEAR
TRIMPAC14 NEAR
HYTRON50 NEAR
HYTRON140 NEAR
DIONIC90 NEAR
DIONIC160 NEAR
NP-L7 NEAR
MARKER
SAFETY ZONE
FOCUS BAR
LCD SETTING
SELF SHOOT
LCD BACKLIGHT
SYNC SCAN DISP
DATE/TIME
ENDURA7 NEAR
ENDURA10 NEAR
ENDURA-D NEAR
PAG L95 NEAR
BP-GL65/95 NEAR
NiCd14 NEAR
LEVEL METER
ZOOM
NiCd14 END
CARD/BATT
TYPE A FULL
P2CARD REMAIN
OTHER DISPLAY
MENU BACK
REC COUNTER
TYPE A NEAR
TYPE A END
TYPE B FULL
TYPE B NEAR
TYPE B END
BATTERY SETUP
(page 134)
NEAR END CANCEL
1ꢀꢀ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CARD FUNCTIONS
(page 136)
SCENE FILE
SHADING SELECT
SHADING (USER)
CAC
USER FILE
SD CARD FORMAT
CAC PROPRETY
CAC CARD READ
CAC FILE DELETE
CAC FILE INIT
IRIS ADJUST
LENS SETUP
(page 136)
OTHER FUNCTIONS
(page 137)
USER FILE
1394 CONTOROL
1394 CMD SEL
ACCESS LED
ALARM
CLOCK SETTING
TIME ZONE
GL PHASE
H PHASE
VERSION
MENU INIT
MODEL NAME
SERIAL NO.
OPERATION
DIAGNOSTIC
(page 138)
OPTION MENU*1
(page 138)
1394 STATUS
1394 CONFIG
*1 To open the OPTION MENU, hold down the DISP/MODE CHK button and press the MENU button.
1ꢀꢂ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setup menu list
SCENE FILE screen
Item
Setting
Notes
LOAD/SAVE/INIT
Loads, saves and initializes settings of the scene file • A change in scene files affects only
assigned to the current scene dial position (one F1
– F6 scene file).
the scene file at the current scene dial
position.
LOAD: Loads data stored in camera memory.
SAVE: Saves current values in camera memory.
INITIAL: Returns settings to their factory defaults.
VFR
Enables or disables variable frame rate (VFR) mode at • Available only in 720P system mode.
720P.
ON: VFR operation
OFF: VFR off
(This message does not appear in
modes other than 720P.)
• This setting cannot be made when
REC SIGNAL is 1394.
FRAME RATE
Adjusts the frame rate and exposure time at 720P
when VFR is on.
• Available only in 720P system mode
and when VFR is set to ON.
12, 15, 18, 20, 21, 22, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 30, 32, 34,
36, 40, 44, 48, 54, 60 FRAME
(This message does not appear in
modes other than 720P.)
• This setting cannot be made when
REC SIGNAL is 1394.
• A change to 24 fps may cause the
screen to flicker momentarily.
• Displayed in blue when not set to
synchro scan mode and when the
SYNCHRO SCAN switch settings are
not available.
(SYNCHRO SCAN)
Displays synchro scan shutter speeds to enable the
operator to synchronize the camera to computer
monitors.
• This function only displays the shutter speeds. Use
the SYNCHRO SCAN switch to set a shutter speed.
• Set values (displayed values) are assigned to the
current scene file and manipulated using the LOAD,
SAVE and INIT functions.
For details, refer to [Placing the Camera-recorder in
SYNCHRO SCAN Mode] (page 51).
1/60.0
DETAIL LEVEL
Adjusts the level of image outline correction (in
horizontal and vertical directions).
–7 ... 0*1... +7
V DETAIL LEVEL
DETAIL CORING
Adjusts the level of correction in vertical direction.
–7 ... 0*1 ... +7
Adjusts the level of noise reduction of the detail signal.
–7 ... +5*1 ... +7
• Adjust towards – for a clearer image. Noise
increases slightly.
• Adjust towards + for less noise.
Adjusts the chroma level.
CHROMA LEVEL
CHROMA PHASE
COLOR TEMP Ach
–7 ... 0*1 ... +7
Makes fine adjustments to the chroma phase.
–7 ... 0*1 ... +7
Makes fine adjustments to the color temperature (after
Ach white balance adjustment).
–7 ... 0*1 ... +7
COLOR TEMP Bch
Makes fine adjustments to the color temperature (after
Bch white balance adjustment).
–7 ... 0*1 ... +7
*1 The factory default when the SCENE FILE dial is set to F1.
____ indicates the factory setting
1ꢀꢃ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Item
Setting
Notes
MASTER PED
Adjusts the black master pedestal that serves as the • Hold down the JOG dial button and
video reference.
–100 ... 0*1 ... +100
turn it downwards or upwards and
maintain this position to quickly
change values.
• When a remote controller (AJ-RC10G)
is connected, use the M-PED control
on the remote controller to adjust.
A. IRIS LEVEL
DRS EFFECT
Sets the AUTO IRIS target value.
–10 ... 0*1 ... +10
Sets the compression level in high-brightness areas of • Not available at 1080/30P or 1080/24P.
the DRS (dynamic range stretcher) function.
This function compresses the video signal level to
extend the dynamic range making it possible to
correctly render highlight areas without overexposure
and loss of detail that would otherwise occur.
1, 2, 3*1
• Higher numbers mean a higher compression level of
high-brightness areas and more noise in dark areas.
GAMMA
Selects the gamma curve.
• A change in settings during DRS
operation will not change video quality.
HD NORM*1: Gamma setting for HD recording.
LOW: Applies a gently rising gamma curve to low-
brightness areas for a balanced look.
SD NORM: Normal video setting inherited from the
DVX100 series.
HIGH: Applies a steep gamma curve to low brightness
areas to expand the tonality of dark areas for video
with greater brightness. Contrast softens as a result.
B.PRESS: Produces sharper contrast than LOW.
CINE-LIKE D: Applies a gamma curve to produce
video with a cine-like feel.
CINE-LIKE V: Applies a gamma curve to produce
high-contrast video with a cine-like feel.
• A lens aperture set lower than normal video level
(approx. 1/2) is recommended when using cine-like
gamma to enjoy the full benefit of the function.
Sets the compression level (knee point) of the high
brightness video signals received through the MOS
sensor to avoid overexposure.
KNEE
• A change in settings during DRS
operation will not change video quality.
HIGH: High setting (compression starts at approx.
100%)
MID: Medium setting (compression starts at approx.
90%)
LOW*1: Low setting (compression starts at approx.
80%)
MATRIX
Selects the MATRIX table to reproduce color during
shooting.
NORM1*1: Ensures proper color rendition when
shooting out in the open or under halogen lighting.
NORM2: Produces more vivid colors than NORM1.
FLUO: Ensures proper color rendition when shooting
indoors under fluorescent lighting.
CINE-LIKE: Produces a tone similar to movie film. .
Turns the skin tone detail on or off.
SKIN TONE DTL
When on, reduces detail to hide any skin blemishes.
ON, OFF*1
*1 The factory default when the SCENE FILE dial is set to F1.
____ indicates the factory setting
1ꢀꢄ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Item
Setting
Notes
V DETAIL FREQ
Sets vertical detail.
THIN: Produces fine detail.
MID: Produces less detail and wider edging.
THICK: Produces even less detail and the widest
edging effect.
• Progressive recording made at THIN or MID cause
horizontal lines or oblique lines that are almost
horizontal to flicker when viewed on a normal
monitor TV (60i: Interlace). THIN and MID settings
will produce higher resolution video than THICK
when shooting progressive footage that will later be
edited.
NAME EDIT
Edits the name of scene files selected using the
SCENE FILE dial.
SYSTEM SETUP screen
Item
Setting
Notes
SYSTEM MODE
Specifies the signal format used by this camera.
1080-59.94i, 720-59.94P, 480-59.94i
• When a setting is changed, the message “TURN
POWER OFF” appears. Then turn the power off and
turn it back on again.
• Not available in USB DEVICE mode.
REC SIGNAL
Selects the input signal in the DVCPRO format.
CAMERA: Records the camera recording signal.
1394: Records signals input to the DVCPRO/DV
connector.
• Not available when the menu option
REC FORMAT is set to AVC-Intra or
DVCPRO HD during native recording.
• This function is always set to CAMERA when the
power is turned on.
REC FORMAT
Selects the recording codec as well as shooting and • Not available when 1080i or 720P
recording modes.
(when SYSTEM MODE is 1080-59.94i)
AVC-I100/60i, AVC-I100/30PN,
is set in SYSTEM MODE and REC
SIGNAL is 1394.
• Not available in USB DEVICE mode.
AVC-I100/24PN: Uses the AVC-I 100 codec for
recording. Shooting and recording at 60i, 30PN (native
recording) and 24PN (native recording).
AVC-I 50/60i, AVC-I 50/30PN,
AVC-I 50/24PN: Uses the AVC-I 50 codec for
recording. Shooting and recording at 60i, 30PN (native
recording) and 24PN (native recording).
DVCPROHD/60i: Uses the DVCPRO HD codec
for recording. Use CAMERA MODE options to set
shooting mode. Recording is locked to 60i.
(when SYSTEM MODE is 720-59.94P)
AVC-I100/60P, AVC-I100/30PN,
AVC-I100/24PN: Uses the AVC-I 100 codec for
recording. Shooting and recording at 60i, 30PN (native
recording) and 24PN (native recording).
AVC-I 50/60P, AVC-I 50/30PN,
AVC-I 50/24PN: Uses the AVC-I 50 codec for
recording. Shooting and recording at 60i, 30PN (native
recording) and 24PN (native recording).
(Continued on the next page)
____ indicates the factory setting
1ꢀꢅ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Item
Setting
Notes
REC FORMAT
(Continued from the previous page)
• Not available when 1080i or 720P
is set in SYSTEM MODE and REC
SIGNAL is 1394.
DVCPRO HD/60P, DVCPRO HD/30PN,
DVCPRO HD/24PN: Uses the DVCPRO HD codec
for recording. Shooting and recording at 60P, 30PN
(native recording) and 24PN (native recording).
(when SYSTEM MODE is 480 – 59.94i)
DVCPRO50/60i, DVCPRO/60i, DV/60i: These use
DVCPRO50, DVCPRO and DV codecs, respectively.
Use CAMERA MODE options to set shooting mode.
Recording is locked at 60i.
• Not available in USB DEVICE mode.
CAMERA MODE
Sets the shooting mode of the camera during
DVCPRO HD codec at 1080-59.94i or during
480-59.94i.
• Does not appear when SYSTEM
MODE is set to 720-59.94P.
• Not available in the following
conditions.
60i, 30P, 24P, 24PA
- When the REC SIGNAL option is set
to 1394.
- When SYSTEM MODE is set to 1080-
59.94i and REC FORMAT is set to
something other than DVCPROHD/
60i.
SCAN REVERSE
ASPECT CONV
Cancels the image inversion that occurs with film
lenses and anamorphic lenses.
ON, OFF
Selects the aspect ratio for recording at 480i.
SIDE CROP: Crops the right and left edges of the
image.
• Not available when SYSTEM MODE is
set to 1080-59.94i or 720-59.94P.
LETTER BOX: Adds black bands at the top and
bottom of the image.
SQUEEZE: Compresses the image horizontally.
Selects the setup level for the 480i video signal.
0%: Setup is switched to 0% for both VIDEO OUT
output and recording.
SETUP
7.5% A: Setup is switched to 7.5% for VIDEO OUT
output and 0% for recording.
PC MODE SELECT
Sets camera operating mode when PC MODE is set to • Not available when PC MODE is set
ON and an external device is connected via USB.
USB HOST: Selects USB 2.0 for connecting an
external hard disk drive. (For details, refer to
page 140.)
to ON.
USB DEVICE: Makes it possible to connect the
camera to a computer via USB 2.0 to enable use
of a P2 card as mass storage. (For details, refer to
page 139.)
PC MODE
Operates the camera according to mode selected
using PC MODE SELECT.
ON: Operates in PC MODE.
OFF: Terminates PC MODE and returns the camera to
normal operation.
• This function is always set to OFF when the power is
turned on.
____ indicates the factory setting
1ꢀꢆ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SW MODE screen
Item
Setting
Notes
LOW GAIN
Sets the gain value assigned to the L position of the
GAIN switch.
–3dB, 0dB, 3dB, 6dB, 9dB, 12dB
Sets the gain value assigned to the M position of the
GAIN switch.
MID GAIN
–3dB, 0dB, 3dB, 6dB, 9dB, 12dB
HIGH GAIN
ATW
Sets the gain value assigned to the H position of the
GAIN switch.
–3dB, 0dB, 3dB, 6dB, 9dB, 12dB
Allows you to assign the ATW (Auto Tracking White
Balance) function to the WHITE BAL switch. (For
details, refer to page 49.)
• A USER button to which ATW has
been assigned cannot be used to turn
ATW off when the WHITE BAL switch is
set to B position and this menu is set
to Bch.
Bch: Controls the ATW function when the WHITE BAL
switch is set to B position.
OFF: Does not assign the ATW function to the WHITE
BAL switch.
ATW TYPE
Selects type of ATW (Auto Tracking White Balance)
function operation.
1: Standard ATW operation
2: Further restricts the color of the light source range
that is tracked than setting 1.
ATW operation reduces the risk of miscalculating light
sources.
W.BAL.PRESET
USER MAIN
Sets the color temperature assigned to the PRST
position of the WHITE BAL switch.
3.2K, 5.6K
Sets the function assigned to the USER MAIN button. • When a remote controller (AJ-RC10G)
REC REVIEW, SPOTLIGHT, BACKLIGHT, ATW,
ATWLOCK, GAIN: 24 dB,Y GET, DRS,TEXT MEMO,
SLOT SEL, SHOT MARK, MAG A. LVL, PRE REC,
PC MODE, WFM, FBC
is connected, the SPOTLIGHT
and BACKLIGHT functions are not
available.
For details, refer to [Assigning functions to USER
buttons] (page 53).
USER1
USER2
Sets a function assigned to the USER1 button. The
functions that can be assigned to this button are the
same as for the USER MAIN button.
BACKLIGHT (factory default setting)
For details, refer to [Assigning functions to USER
buttons] (page 53).
Sets a function assigned to the USER2 button. The
functions that can be assigned to this button are the
same as for the USER MAIN button.
TEXT MEMO (factory default setting)
For details, refer to [Assigning functions to USER
buttons] (page 53).
RET SW
WFM
Sets the function assigned to the RET button on the
lens.
REC REVIEW,TEXT MEMO, SHOT MARK
Selects the waveform displayed in the LCD monitor
when the user button to which WFM has been
assigned is pressed.
WAVE: Displays a waveform.
VECTOR: Vectorscope display
WAVE/VECT: Each press of the button, switches
the settings in the following order: OFF WAVE
(waveform) VECTOR OFF.
____ indicates the factory setting
1ꢀꢇ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Item
Setting
Notes
AUTO KNEE SW
Selects the function of the OUTPUT/AUTO KNEE.
ON: Setting AUTO KNEE to ON turns on the AUTO
KNEE function.
OFF: The AUTO KNEE function is not available even
when AUTO KNEE is set to ON.
• In the following conditions, selecting
DRS results in the same operation
mode as when ON is selected.
- When set to 1080/30PN, 1080/24PN
mode.
DRS: Setting AUTO KNEE to ON turns on the DRS
(Dynamic Range Stretcher) function. (For details, refer
to page 9.)
- When set to 1080/60i mode with the
1/15, 1/30 shutter speed.
RECORDING SETUP screen
Item
REC FUNCTION
Setting
Sets special recording modes.
Notes
• Not available in the following
NORMAL: The special recording modes are not used. conditions.
INTERVAL: Sets interval recording.
ONE SHOT: Sets one-shot recording.
LOOP: Sets loop recording.
- When REC SIGNAL is set to 1394
- When REC FORMAT is set to native
recording.
For details, refer to [Special Recording Modes]
(page 38).
• This function is always set to NORMAL when the
power is turned on.
- When SYSTEM MODE is set to
1080-59.94i or 480-59.94i; and
CAMERA MODE is set to 24P or
24PA.
ONE SHOT TIME
INTERVAL TIME
Sets the time interval for one-shot recording.
1frm, 2frm, 4frm, 8frm, 16frm, 1s
For details, refer to [One shot recording (ONE SHOT
REC)] (page 39).
Sets the time interval of interval recording.
2frm, 4frm, 8frm, 16frm, 1s, 2s, 5s, 10s, 30s, 1min,
5min, 10min
• Available only when REC FUNCTION
is set to ONE SHOT.
• Available only when REC FUNCTION
is set to INTERVAL.
For details, refer to [Interval recording (INTERVAL
REC)] (page 39).
START DELAY
This delays the start of interval and one-shot recording • Available only when REC FUNCTION
by about 1 second.
is set to INTERVAL or ONE SHOT.
ON, OFF
PREREC MODE
Sets PRE REC.
ON, OFF
• Not available in the following
conditions.
For details, refer to [Pre-recording (PRE REC)]
(page 38).
- When REC SIGNAL is set to 1394
- When SYSTEM MODE is set to 720-
59.94P and VFR is set to ON.
- When REC FORMAT is set to native
recording.
- When SYSTEM MODE is set to 1080-
59.94i or 480-59.94i; and CAMERA
MODE is set to 24P or 24PA.
- When REC FUNCTION is set to
something other than NORMAL.
• Not available when operating at 24P,
24PA and 24PN. Then NDF is counted
at all times.
TC MODE
UB MODE
Sets count correction when using the internal time
code generator.
DF: Drop frame time code
NDF: Non drop frame time code
For details, refer to [Setting the Time Code] (page 60).
Sets the data recorded in the camera user bits.
USER,TIME, DATE, EXT,TCG, FRM.RATE
For details, refer to [Setting user bits] (page 58).
____ indicates the factory setting
1ꢀꢈ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUDIO SETUP screen
Item
Setting
Notes
FRONT VR CH1
Enables/disables Front Audio Level control of CH1
input.
FRONT: Enables Front Audio Level control of
microphone input to CH1.
W.L.: Enables Front Audio Level control of audio from
a wireless receiver input to CH1.
• When the AUDIO SELECT CH1 switch
is set to AUTO and auto adjustment
mode is active, the Front Audio Level
control is disabled regardless of these
settings.
REAR: Enables Front Audio Level control of rear input
that is input to CH1.
ALL: Enables Front Audio Level control when front,
wireless, rear and other inputs are input to CH1.
OFF: Disables Front Audio Level control of CH1.
Enables/disables Front Audio Level control of CH2
input.
FRONT VR CH2
• When the AUDIO SELECT CH2 switch
is set to AUTO and auto adjustment
mode is active, the Front Audio Level
control is disabled regardless of these
settings.
Same setting as FRONT VR CH1.
OFF (factory default setting)
MIC LOWCUT CH1*1
Sets the CH1 microphone low-cut filter.
FRONT: Operates for the front microphone input.
W.L.: Operates for wireless receiver input.
REAR: Operates for the rear microphone input.
OFF: Turns off the filter for all inputs.
Sets the CH2 microphone low-cut filter.
Same setting as MIC LOWCUT CH1.
OFF (factory default setting)
Sets the CH3 microphone low-cut filter.
Same setting as MIC LOWCUT CH1.
OFF (factory default setting)
Sets the CH4 microphone low-cut filter.
Same setting as MIC LOWCUT CH1.
OFF (factory default setting)
MIC LOWCUT CH2*1
MIC LOWCUT CH3*1
MIC LOWCUT CH4*1
LIMITER CH1
Sets the CH1 limiter.
ON, OFF
• When the AUDIO SELECT CH1 switch
is set to AUTO and auto adjustment
mode is active, the limiter is disabled
regardless of these settings.
LIMITER CH2
Sets the CH2 limiter.
ON, OFF
• When the AUDIO SELECT CH2 switch
is set to AUTO and auto adjustment
mode is active, the limiter is disabled
regardless of these settings.
AUTO LEVEL CH3
Selects the method for setting CH3 level.
ON: Engages the auto adjustment mode. The limiter is
not available.
OFF: Locks the level. The limiter operates on all inputs
except the line input of the rear.
AUTO LEVEL CH4
Selects the method for setting CH4 level.
Same setting as AUTO LEVEL CH3.
ON (factory default setting)
*1 The frequency characteristics for a microphone low-cut filter is 200 Hz – 10 kHz.
____ indicates the factory setting
1ꢂ0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Item
25M REC CH SEL
Setting
Notes
• Not available in the following
conditions.
Selects the audio channels to be recorded in the
DVCPRO and DV formats.
2CH: Only recorded on CH1 and CH2.
4CH: Records on all four channels.
- When SYSTEM MODE is 1080i-59.94i
or 720-59.94P.
- When SYSTEM MODE is set to 480-
59.94i and REC FORMAT is set to the
DVCPRO50 codec.
- REC SIGNAL is set to 1394
(operation depends on 1394 input
status).
TEST TONE
Selects the test signal.
NORMAL: Outputs test tones to channels 1, 2, 3 and
4 when the OUTPUT/AUTO KNEE selector switch is
set to BARS and the AUDIO IN switch CH1 is set to
FRONT.
ALWAYS: Outputs test tones to channels 1, 2, 3 and
4 at all times when the OUTPUT/AUTO KNEE selector
switch is set to BARS.
CHSEL: Outputs test tones to channels selected by
setting the AUDIO IN switch CH1 or CH2 to FRONT
and the OUTPUT/AUTO KNEE selector switch is set to
BARS. (Test tones are not output to CH3 and CH4.)
OFF: Does not output a test tone.
Turns on and off the phantom power supply for the
front microphone.
F.MIC POWER
R.MIC POWER
ON, OFF
Turns on and off the phantom power supply for the
rear microphone.
ON: Turns on the phantom power supply to the
microphone when the rear LINE/MIC/+48V switch is
set to +48V.
OFF: Does not supply phantom power to the
microphone even when the rear LINE/MIC/+48V switch
is set to +48V.
MONITOR SELECT
Switches the output signal to AUDIO OUT, earphones
and speaker when the MONITOR SELECT switch is
set to ST.
STEREO, MIX
F.MIC LEVEL
Selects the input level for the front microphone.
–40dB, –50dB, –60dB
R.MIC CH1 LEVEL
Selects the input level for the rear microphone
connected to CH1.
–50dB, –60dB
R.MIC CH2 LEVEL
Selects the input level for the rear microphone
connected to CH2.
–50dB, –60dB
HEADROOM
Sets the headroom (standard level).
18dB, 20dB
WIRELESS WARN
Sets whether a warning should be output when
wireless receiver reception is poor.
ON, OFF
WIRELESS TYPE
1394 AUDIO OUT
Selects wireless receiver type.
SINGLE: 1-channel receiver
DUAL: 2-channel receiver
• When DUAL is selected for a 1-channel wireless
receiver, CH2 and CH4 will stay mute.
Selects audio channel output to 1394 OUT in DVCPRO • Available only when SYSTEM MODE is
or DV mode.
CH1/CH2, CH3/CH4
set to 480-59.94i and REC FORMAT is
set to DVCPRO or DV.
____ indicates the factory setting
1ꢂ1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OUTPUT SEL screen
Item
Setting
Notes
SDI SELECT
Sets the signal format type output from the SDI OUT
connector.
AUTO: Depends on SYSTEM MODE setting.
1080i*1: Outputs 1080-59.94i also when SYSTEM
MODE setting is 720-59.94P.
• Not available when SYSTEM MODE is
set to 480-59.94i. Then 480i is output
at all times.
480i: Output is locked to 480-59.94i regardless of
SYSTEM MODE setting.
SDI METADATA
SDI EDH
Sets metadata (UMID) superimposition onto SDI OUT.
ON: Superimposes metadata.
OFF: Does not superimpose metadata.
Sets EDH superimposition when SDI OUT is an SD
signal (480i).
ON: Superimposes EDH.
OFF: Does not superimpose EDH.
DOWNCON MODE
VIDEO OUT CHAR
Sets downconverter output (VIDEO OUT and 480i SDI • Not available when SYSTEM MODE is
OUT) in HD mode (1080i, 720P).
set to 480-59.94i.
SIDE CROP, LETTER BOX, SQUEEZE
Specifies whether or not characters are superimposed • This setting is disabled when RC10
on VIDEO OUT signals.
ON: Superimposes characters.
(remote controller) is connected
in which case RC10 settings have
priority.
OFF: Does not superimpose characters.
Specifies whether or not zebra pattern is
superimposed on VIDEO OUT signals.
ON: Displays a zebra pattern also on images output
via the VIDEO OUT connector.
VIDEO OUT ZEBRA
OFF: The zebra pattern is not displayed in video
output from the VIDEO OUT connector.
Sets the time code type output from the TC OUT
connector.
TC OUT
TCG: Outputs the time code generator value of the
camera at all times.
TCG/TCR: Outputs time code generator value during
camera recording and outputs the played back time
code during video playback.
TC VIDEO SYNCRO
Sets the delay of time code output from the TC OUT
connector.
TC IN: Does not delay output of input to TC IN
connector.
VIDEO OUT: Outputs the time code in line with delay
of video output from the VIDEO OUT connector.
*1 Use 1080i selected in a SYSTEM MODE setting of 720-59.94P for checking video.
DISPLAY SETUP screen
Item
EVF PEAK LEVEL
Setting
Adjusts the peaking level of the viewfinder and the
LCD monitor.
Notes
–7 ... 0 ... 7
EVF PEAK FREQ
Adjusts the peaking frequency of the viewfinder and
the LCD monitor.
HIGH, LOW
____ indicates the factory setting
1ꢂꢀ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Item
EVF SETTING
Setting
Adjusts viewfinder brightness and contrast on a
subscreen.
Notes
(Subscreen)
EVF BRIGHTNESS
EVF CONTRAST
EVF B.LIGHT
EVF COLOR
Adjusts viewfinder backlight brightness.
HIGH, NORMAL, LOW
Selects whether the viewfinder image will be displayed
in color or monochrome.
ON: Color display
OFF: Monochrome display
ZEBRA1 DETECT
ZEBRA2 DETECT
ZEBRA2
Sets the level of the right-leaning zebra pattern 1.
50% ... 70% ... 109%
Sets the level of the left-leaning zebra pattern 2.
50% ... 85% ... 109%
Selects ZEBRA2 type. (For details, refer to page 74.)
ON, SPOT, OFF
MARKER
Turns center marker displayed in the viewfinder and
on the LCD monitor on and off. (For details, refer to
page 73.)
ON, OFF
SAFETY ZONE
Sets the safety zone displayed in the viewfinder and
on the LCD monitor. (For details, refer to page 73.)
90%, 4:3, 13:9, 14:9, OFF
• The safety zone is not displayed when
4:3, 13:9 or 14:9 is selected when
SYSTEM MODE is set to 480-59.94i
and ASPECT CONV is set to SIDE
CROP or LETTER BOX.
FOCUS BAR
The length of the focus bar indicates accuracy of
focusing.
• This function is not interlocked with the
FOCUS ASSIST button.
ON: Displays the focus bar.
OFF: Does not display the focus bar.
Makes it possible to set video color level, brightness
and contrast displayed in the LCD monitor in a
subscreen.
LCD SETTING
(Subscreen)
LCD COLOR LEVEL
LCD BRIGHTNESS
LCD CONTRAST
SELF SHOOT
Sets the LCD screen display when taking self portraits.
NORMAL: The LCD image is not inverted sideways.
MIRROR: The LCD image is inverted sideways.
• LCD monitor status displays do not appear when this
function is set to MIRROR to shoot self portraits.
Adjusts LCD monitor backlight brightness.
HIGH, NORMAL, LOW
Selects synchro scan shutter display.
sec: Indicates shutter speed in fractions.
deg: Provides a shutter angle indication.
Sets the date and time display.
TIME: Hours, minutes and second display
DATE: Year, month and day display
TIME&DATE: Hours, minutes, seconds and year,
month and day display
LCD BACKLIGHT
SYNC SCAN DISP
• Brightness may change when settings
are modified.
DATE/TIME
OFF: Not displayed
LEVEL METER
ZOOM
Sets the Audio Level Meter display.
ON, OFF
Sets the lens zoom value display.
ON, OFF
CARD/BATT
Sets the remaining P2 card capacity and battery
charge.
ON, OFF
____ indicates the factory setting
1ꢂꢂ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Item
Setting
Notes
P2CARD REMAIN
Determines how remaining P2 card capacity is
displayed.
TOTAL: Displays value for both cards.
ONE-CARD: Indicates the remaining capacity of the
card that is being recorded.
OTHER DISPLAY
MENU BACK
Sets display of other data.
PARTIAL: Displays some of the data.
ALL: Displays all data.
OFF: Not displayed
Select whether to lower the transparency of the
background to make menu text easier to read.
ON: Lowers background transparency. (However, the
transparency of LCD SETTING and EVF SETTING is
not lowered.)
OFF: Does not lower background transparency.
Selects counter operation during recording.
TOTAL: Provides a continuous count until reset by
pressing the COUNTER RESET button.
CLIP: Clears the count value at start of recording and
counts time of recording.
REC COUNTER
BATTERY SETUP screen
Item
Setting
Notes
EXT DC IN SEL
Selects external DC power supply type.
AC ADAPTER: AC adapter
BATTERY: Battery
BATTERY SELECT
Sets the battery type.
PROPAC14,TRIMPAC14, HYTRON50, HYTRON140,
DIONIC90, DIONIC160, NP-L7, ENDURA7,
ENDURA10, ENDURA-D, PAG L95, BP-GL65/95,
NiCd14,TYPE A,TYPE B
BATTERY MODE
Sets near end.
AUTO: Automatically selects one of the battery types
selected in BATTERY SELECT.
MANUAL: Manually sets the near end voltage.
Sets the near end voltage for PROPAC14. (Adjustable
in 0.1 V units.)
11.0 V ... 13.5 V ... 15.0 V
Sets the near end voltage for PROPAC14. (Adjustable
in 0.1 V units.)
PROPAC14 NEAR
TRIMPAC14 NEAR
HYTRON50 NEAR
HYTRON140 NEAR
DIONIC90 NEAR
DIONIC160 NEAR
NP-L7 NEAR
11.0 V ... 13.4 V ... 15.0 V
Sets the near end voltage for HYTRON50. (Adjustable
in 0.1 V units.)
11.0 V ... 13.4 V ... 15.0 V
Sets the near end voltage for HYTRON140.
(Adjustable in 0.1 V units.)
11.0 V ... 13.1 V ... 15.0 V
Sets the near end voltage for DIONIC90. (Adjustable
in 0.1 V units.)
11.0 V ... 13.7 V ... 15.0 V
Sets the near end voltage for DIONIC160. (Adjustable
in 0.1 V units.)
11.0 V ... 13.3 V ... 15.0 V
Sets the near end voltage for NP-L7. (Adjustable in 0.1
V units.)
11.0 V ... 13.6 V ... 15.0 V
____ indicates the factory setting
1ꢂꢃ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Item
ENDURA7 NEAR
Setting
Sets the near end voltage for ENDURA7. (Adjustable
in 0.1 V units.)
Notes
11.0 V ... 13.4 V ... 15.0 V
ENDURA10 NEAR
ENDURA-D NEAR
PAG L95 NEAR
BP-GL65/95 NEAR
NiCd14 NEAR
NiCd14 END
Sets the near end voltage for ENDURA10. (Adjustable
in 0.1 V units.)
11.0 V ... 13.4 V ... 15.0 V
Sets the near end voltage for ENDURA-D. (Adjustable
in 0.1 V units.)
11.0 V ... 13.4 V ... 15.0 V
Sets the near end voltage for PAG L95. (Adjustable in
0.1 V units.)
11.0 V ... 13.8 V ... 15.0 V
Sets the near end voltage for BP-GL65/95. (Adjustable
in 0.1 V units.)
11.0 V ... 13.4 V ... 15.0 V
Sets the near end voltage for NiCd14. (Adjustable in
0.1 V units.)
11.0 V ... 13.5 V ... 15.0 V
Sets the end voltage for NiCd14. (Adjustable in 0.1 V
units.)
11.0 V ... 13.1 V ... 15.0 V
TYPE A FULL
Sets the full voltage for TYPE A. (Adjustable in 0.1 V
units.)
12.0 V ... 15.7 V ... 17.0 V
TYPE A NEAR
TYPE A END
Sets the near end voltage for TYPE A. (Adjustable in
0.1 V units.)
11.0 V ... 13.7 V ... 15.0 V
Sets the end voltage for TYPE A. (Adjustable in 0.1 V
units.)
11.0 V ... 13.3 V ... 15.0 V
TYPE B FULL
Sets the full voltage for TYPE B. (Adjustable in 0.1 V
units.)
12.0 V ... 16.0 V ... 17.0 V
TYPE B NEAR
TYPE B END
Sets the near end voltage for TYPE B. (Adjustable in
0.1 V units.)
11.0 V ... 13.1 V ... 15.0 V
Sets the end voltage for TYPE B. (Adjustable in 0.1 V
units.)
11.0 V ... 12.8 V ... 15.0 V
NEAR END CANCEL
Sets to cancel battery near end warning. ON, OFF.
ON, OFF
• When set to ON, pressing the DISP/MODE CHK
button stops the flashing of warning and tally lamps.
____ indicates the factory setting
1ꢂꢄ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CARD FUNCTIONS screen
Item
Setting
Notes
SCENE FILE
Reads/writes scene files from/onto the SD memory
card.
FILE SELECT: Selects scene files (1 to 4).
READ: Reads the selected scene file (1 – 4) settings
stored on the SD memory card.
WRITE: Saves the current scene file (1 – 4) settings to
the SD memory card.
TITLE RELOAD: Reloads title list.
Reads/writes user files (files other than SCENE FILES)
from/onto the SD memory card.
USER FILE
FILE SELECT: Selects user files (1 to 4).
READ: Reads the user file (1 – 4) settings stored on
the SD memory card.
WRITE: Saves the current user file (1 – 4) settings to
the SD memory card.
TITLE RELOAD: Reloads title list.
Formats SD memory cards.
SD CARD FORMAT
• Setting data file operations may end in error during playback or when the menu option PC MODE is set to ON in the
SYSTEM SETUP screen. Set the menu option PC MODE to OFF before making file operations.
LENS SETUP screen
Item
Setting
Sets one of the following shading compensation
parameters.
Notes
SHADING SELECT
DEFAULT: Standard lens setting
USER1: User setting 1
USER2: User setting 2
USER3: User setting 3
OFF: Sets shading compensation to OFF.
Selects whether or not to set shading parameters to
SHADING SELECT USER 1, 2 and 3.
Determines whether or not to use the lens chromatic
aberration compensation (CAC) function.
ON: Uses CAC
SHADING (USER)
CAC
Not available when SHADING SELECT
is set to DEFAULT or OFF.
OFF: Does not use CAC.
CAC PROPERTY
Displays currently used CAC file number and CAC file
data loaded in the camera.
CAC CARD READ
CAC FILE DELETE
Loads CAC file data from the SD card.
Displays a list of CAC files loaded in the camera and
delete selected files.
CAC FILE INIT
IRIS ADJUST
Returns the CAC files loaded in the camera to their
factory default settings.
Forcibly sets the iris.
F2.8, F16
____ indicates the factory setting
1ꢂꢅ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OTHER FUNCTIONS screen
Item
Setting
Notes
USER FILE
Saves user files to camera memory, loads them into
camera memory or initializes them. (For details, refer
to page 80.)
• Not available when PC MODE SELECT
is set to USB DEVICE and PC MODE
is set to ON.
LOAD, SAVE, INITIAL
• This does not affect options in the SCENE FILE
screen.
1394 CONTROL
Selects the method the camera uses for controlling
external devices connected to the DVCPRO/DV
connector. (For details, refer to page 145.)
EXT: Controls only the external device, but does not
transfer data to the camera for recording.
BOTH: Controls both the external device and the
camera, and also records.
• Not available in AVC-Intra mode and
DVCPRO HD native mode.
• Not available during interval, one-shot
and loop recording.
CHAIN: When there is no more space left for recording
in the camera, recording is automatically made to the
external device.
OFF: No control
1394 CMD SEL
ACCESS LED
Determines how recording is stopped when the
camera controls an external device connected to the
DVCPRO/DV connector.
REC_P: Engages REC/PAUSE status.
STOP: Stops recording.
• Not available in AVC-Intra mode and
DVCPRO HD native mode.
• Not available during interval, one-shot
and loop recording.
Determines whether or not the P2 CARD ACCESS LED
should light.
ON, OFF
ALARM
Sets the alarm sound output when an alarm occurs.
HIGH, LOW, OFF
CLOCK SETTING
Sets the internal calendar (date)
For details, see [Setting Date and Time of Internal
Clock] (page 26).
TIME ZONE
GL PHASE
Sets the time difference relative to Greenwich Mean
Time (GMT).
–12:00 ... 0:00 ... +13:00
For details, see [Setting Date and Time of Internal
Clock] (page 26).
Selects the output signal whose phase is locked to
the signal input to the GENLOCK IN connector in HD
(1080i, 720P) mode. (For details, refer to page 64.)
HD SDI: The HD SDI is locked to the genlock input.
COMPOSITE: The down-converted composite signal
(VIDEO OUT or SDI OUT 480i signal) is locked to the
genlock input.
• This setting cannot be initialized by
performing the MENU INIT option and
the INITIAL option in USER FILE.
• Not available when SYSTEM MODE is
set to 480-59.94i.
H PHASE
Adjusts the horizontal phase when phase is locked to • Hold down the JOG dial button and
the signal input to the GENLOCK IN connector.
–512 ... 0 ... +511
turn it downwards or upwards and
maintain this position to quickly
change values.
MENU INIT
Restores all setting menu values including all scene
files F1 to F6 and the user file to their factory defaults.
• Not available when PC MODE SELECT
is set to USB DEVICE and PC MODE
is set to ON.
____ indicates the factory setting
1ꢂꢆ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DIAGNOSTIC screen
Item
Setting
Notes
VERSION
Indicates the version of the firmware used in this
camera.
A subscreen provides details on which firmware
versions are used.
(Subscreen)
CAM SOFT: Camera microprocessor software
SYSCON SOFT: Software for system control
microprocessor
P2CS BL2-1: Boot program 1 for P2 control
microprocessor
P2CS BL2-2: Boot program 2 for P2 control
microprocessor
P2CS KR: P2 control microprocessor kernel
P2CS AP: P2 control microprocessor application
VUP: System software used for updating all camera
firmware
VUP FS: File system for updating the camera
DM FPGA: Main FPGA configuration ROM
Indicates the model name of this camera.
Indicates serial number of this camera.
Indicates the time of the camera has been on.
MODEL NAME
SERIAL NO.
OPERATION
OPTION MENU screen
Open this menu by holding down the DISP/MODE CHK button and when shooting status appears press the front MENU
button. Use this function to check connection status during nonlinear editing.
Item
1394 STATUS
Setting
Notes
Opens the subscreen that shows 1394 status.
(Subscreen)
FORMAT: Format of input or output signals
RATE: Transfer rate of input or output signals
60/50: Signal system of input or output signals
CH: Channel of input or output signals
SPEED: Transfer rate of input or output signals
STATUS: Status of signals output or input via the
IEEE1394 digital interface
VIDEO: Status of input or output video signals
AUDIO: Status of input or output audio signals
Opens a menu for configuring 1394 functionality.
DFLT, 1-255
1394 CONFIG
• Use DFLT for normal operation.
____ indicates the factory setting
1ꢂꢇ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 Connecting to External Devices
Functionality Provided by Connections to USB 2.0 Connector
NOTE
Connecting to a computer in USB
device mode
A USB 2.0 connection to a computer or other device allows
you to use P2 cards in the camera as mass storage.
You can use the menu option USER MAIN/USER1/
USER2 in the SW MODE screen to assign PC MODE
settings to a user button.
Note that the USER button functions are not available
when the menu is open.
To make a USB connection, you must first install the P2
software on the supplied CD-ROM on the computer. Select
the “AG-HPX300” driver. This USB driver supports only
Procedures for making connections to a
computer
the Windows operating system. For details, refer to the
installation manual.
ꢁ
1
ConnectꢁaꢁUSBꢁcableꢁtoꢁtheꢁUSBꢁꢀ.0ꢁconnector.ꢁ
NOTE
• A USB driver must be installed on the computer.
• Use a computer that supports USB 2.0 since the camera
supports only USB 2.0.
• Connect only one camera to a computer via USB.
• Do not remove P2 cards when the camera is connect to a
computer via USB.
• In a USB connection, the P2 CARD ACCESS LED is on only
when the card is accessed.
• In USB device operation, recording, playback and clip
thumbnail operations are not available.
NOTE
• A USB 2.0 cable is not supplied with the AG-HPX300P.
Use a commercially available USB cable (with
shielding or other noise-reduction measures) that
supports USB 2.0.
• The camera supports USB cable lengths up to 5
meters. However, we recommend use of a USB cable
shorter than 3 meters.
• When a USB device is running, the remaining capacity of P2
cards is not indicated. Audio is not output through the SDI
OUT or DVCPRO/DV connector and the AUDIO level meters
do not appear.
• The USB lamp on the camera lights during USB
connection and USB DEVICE CONNECT appears in the
center of the viewfinder. If a normal connection cannot
be established, the USB lamp blinks and DISCONNECT
appears in the viewfinder.
USBꢁLED
USBꢁꢀ.0ꢁConnectorꢁ(DEVICE)
ꢁ
2
SetꢁtheꢁmenuꢁoptionꢁPCꢁMODEꢁSELECTꢁinꢁtheꢁ
SYSTEMꢁSETUPꢁscreenꢁtoꢁUSBꢁDEVICEꢁandꢁ
setꢁPCꢁMODEꢁtoꢁON.ꢁ
For details on menu operation, refer to [Using the
menus] (page 120).
SYSTEM SETUP
SYSTEM MODE
REC SIGNAL
REC FORMAT
CAMERA MODE
SCAN REVERSE
ASPECT CONV
SETUP
1080-59.94i
CAMERA
AVC-I100/60i
60i
(Viewfinderꢁdisplay)
OFF
SIDE CROP
0%
USB DEVICE
CONNECT
PC MODE SELECT USB DEVICE
PUSH MENU TO EXIT
1ꢂꢈ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ꢁ
3
TerminatingꢁUSBꢁmode
ꢁ
2
PressꢁtheꢁTHUMBNAILꢁbutton.ꢁ
Use one of the following three methods.
• Set the camera POWER switch to OFF.
• Set the PC MODE option in the SYSTEM SETUP
screen to OFF.
• Press the USER button to which PC MODE has
been assigned.
• The thumbnail screen opens.
• Make sure that USB HOST appears at the bottom
right of the screen.
• When the camera is connected to a hard disk
drive, the HDD icon appears at the top right of
the screen. If the icon lights red this indicates that
data cannot be copied to or from the hard disk.
Check hard disk drive type.
USB host mode
This mode allows you to connect the camera to a hard
disk drive that supports USB 2.0 to save card data, view
thumbnails of the stored clips and write data back to P2
cards.
For details on hard disk drives, refer to [Thumbnail
Screen] (page 102).
Switching to USB Host Mode
ꢁ
1
SetꢁtheꢁmenuꢁoptionꢁPCꢁMODEꢁSELECTꢁinꢁtheꢁ
SYSTEMꢁSETUPꢁscreenꢁtoꢁUSBꢁHOSTꢁandꢁsetꢁ
PCꢁMODEꢁtoꢁON.ꢁ
• This engages the USB host mode.
• The USB LED on the camera lights in USB host
mode and USB HOST CONNECT appears in
the center of the viewfinder. When a normal
connection cannot be established with the hard
disk, the USB LED flashes and DISCONNECT
appears in the viewfinder.
• When PC MODE is assigned to a user button,
press that user button to switch between USB host
mode and normal mode. However, a user button
cannot be used for switching in the thumbnail
mode.
NOTE
The USB host mode allows playback of P2 cards but
not recording of camera video or external input.
And clips on the hard disk must be written back to a P2
card before they can be played back.
For details, refer to [Writing back data to P2 cards]
(page 143).
ꢁ
3
TerminatingꢁUSBꢁhostꢁmode.
Use one of the following three methods.
• Set the camera POWER switch to OFF.
• Close the thumbnail screen and set the menu
option PC mode in the SYSTEM SETUP screen to
OFF.
For details, refer to [Assigning functions to USER
Buttons] (page 53).
• Press the USER button to which PC MODE has
been assigned. *1
*1 In thumbnail mode, pressing a user button will
not terminate USB host mode.
Using USB host mode
Supportedꢁhardꢁdisks
• A hard disk drive that supports the USB 2.0 interface
• P2 STORE (the optional AJ-PCS060G hard drive)
NOTE
• This camera supports USB bus power (5 V, 0.5A) but some
hard disks may not be able to use USB bus power. Such hard
disk drives should be provided with a separate power supply.
• Do not connect a hard disk to hubs or other connections
that involve multiple units even if it is not powered on. Do
not connect other devices to the hard disk drive via a hub or
other device.
• This unit does not support hard disk drives that are 2 TB or
larger.
1ꢃ0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FAT formatted hard disk
Viewing hard disk drive data
Use the following procedures to view data on a hard disk
drive connected via USB.
1
2
ꢁ
1
SwitchꢁtoꢁUSBꢁhostꢁmode.
3
4
For details, refer to [Switching to USB Host Mode]
(page 140).
ꢁ
ConnectꢁaꢁhardꢁdiskꢁdriveꢁviaꢁUSB.ꢁ
2
3
ꢁ
PressꢁtheꢁTHUMBNAILꢁbutton.ꢁOpenꢁtheꢁ
thumbnailꢁscreen.ꢁ
1
PARTITION
Use this function to view hard disk drive type.
Operations differ depending on hard disk drive type.
Hard disk
drive type
Supported
functions
ꢁ
PressꢁtheꢁTHUMBNAILꢁbuttonꢁandꢁselectꢁHDDꢁ
ꢁEXPLOREꢁinꢁtheꢁthumbnailꢁmenu.ꢁ
4
Features
This format allows
thumbnail display,
loading and write
back of data in
card units, and
write back of data
and formatting in
clip units.
A special format that
permits high-speed
loading and write
back of data in card
units.
This is the format
used by the camera.
• This opens a screen that shows hard disk drive
data.
TYPE S
P2STORE
FAT
TYPE S or P2 STORE
7
8
9
This format
This is the P2 STORE displays
(AJ-PCS060G) hard thumbnails, write
back data in card
Cannot be used for units and write
1
2
3
disk drive.
writing data.
back data in clip
units.
Display
thumbnails, write
back video data
by the clip and
formatting
* Handled as a
“TYPE S” hard disk
after formatting.
4
5
6
The basic primary
partition on a PC is
FAT 16 or FAT 32.
The root directory of
such a partition must
contain a CONTENTS
directory.
ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ PressꢁtheꢁSETꢁbutton.ꢁꢁ ꢁ PressꢁtheꢁEXITꢁbutton.
Hard disk other than
those above
* This refers to file
systems where root Format
does not contain
a directory called
“CONTENTS” or a
NTFS file system
other than FAT16 or
FAT32.
* Handled as a
“TYPE S” hard disk
after formatting.
OTHER
10
11
12
2
3
4
5
VENDOR
Indicates hard disk drive vendor.
MODEL
Indicates hard disk drive model.
SIZE
Indicates the total capacity of the hard disk drive.
USED
Indicates the size of used space on the hard disk drive
(units: GB) and used P2 card area (units: cards).
1ꢃ1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6
7
REMAIN
9
DATE/TIME
Indicates remaining capacity (units: GB) on the hard
disk drive.
Indicates the date and time data was recorded on the
partition.
Partition number
Indicates the number of partitions (in units of P2 cards)
on the hard disk drive.
10 SERIAL
Indicates the serial number of P2 card that originally
recorded the data in the partition.
11 VERIFY
NOTE
Indicates verify settings and results when data was
recorded to a partition.
ON:FINISHED:
Runned verify and verify results were matched.
ON:FAILED:
The screen can show up to 10 partitions. When there are 11
or more partitions, use the cursor button (]) to move down
to display the remaining partitions.
8
MODEL
Indicates the model of P2 card that originally recorded
the data in the partition.
Runned verify but verify results could not be
matched.
OFF:
NOTE
Did not run verify.
– – –:
Press the cursor button (o) to switch to PARTITION NAME.
Use the cursor button (p) to return to the previous model.
No verify information available.
NOTE
• Hard disk drives formatted using FAT can handle up to
1000 clips. Any clips beyond that limit cannot be opened.
• Only the first partition of a hard disk drive formatted
using FAT can display information.
• An invalid partition on P2 STORE (AJ-PCS060G) is
indicated in gray.
12 NAME
Indicates the PARTITION NAME.
Formatting Hard Disks
When hard disk drive thumbnails are displayed,
select CHANGE PARTITION NAME in the OPERATION
menu to enter the PARTITION NAME on the software
keyboard. (up to 20 characters)
ꢁ
1
SwitchꢁtoꢁtheꢁUSBꢁhostꢁmode.
For details, refer to [Switching to USB Host Mode]
(page 140).
ꢁ
ConnectꢁaꢁhardꢁdiskꢁdriveꢁviaꢁUSB.ꢁ
2
3
ꢁ
PressꢁtheꢁTHUMBNAILꢁbuttonꢁtoꢁopenꢁtheꢁ
thumbnailꢁscreen.ꢁ
ꢁ
4
PressꢁtheꢁTHUMBNAILꢁbuttonꢁandꢁselectꢁHDDꢁ
ꢁEXPLOREꢁinꢁtheꢁthumbnailꢁmenu.ꢁ
• This opens a screen that shows hard disk drive
data.
1ꢃꢀ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NOTE
ꢁ
5
SelectꢁOPERATIONꢁꢁFORMATꢁ(HDD)ꢁinꢁtheꢁ
menuꢁandꢁuseꢁaꢁcursorꢁbuttonꢁandꢁtheꢁSETꢁ
buttonꢁtoꢁselectꢁYES.ꢁ
•ꢁꢁAꢁTYPEꢁSꢁhardꢁdiskꢁdriveꢁcanꢁwriteꢁdataꢁinꢁcardꢁunits.ꢁUpꢁ
toꢁꢀꢂꢁPꢀꢁcardsꢁcanꢁbeꢁsavedꢁtoꢁaꢁhardꢁdiskꢁdrive.ꢁꢁ
TheꢁPꢀꢁcardꢁdataꢁrecordedꢁonꢁaꢁhardꢁdiskꢁdriveꢁareꢁ
recognizedꢁasꢁseparateꢁdrives.ꢁ
•ꢁꢁToꢁwriteꢁPꢀꢁcardsꢁwithꢁbadꢁclips,ꢁitꢁisꢁaꢁgoodꢁideaꢁtoꢁrepairꢁ
theseꢁclipsꢁbeforeꢁwritingꢁthemꢁtoꢁaꢁhardꢁdiskꢁdrive.ꢁ
•ꢁꢁEndingꢁaꢁrecordingꢁduringꢁtheꢁverifyꢁphaseꢁwillꢁendꢁwritingꢁ
ofꢁdataꢁfromꢁtheꢁPꢀꢁcardꢁtoꢁtheꢁhardꢁdiskꢁdrive.ꢁ
• Select YES in the confirmation message that
appears again to start hard disk drive formatting.
• Handled as a “TYPE S” hard disk drive after
formatting.
NOTE
All data on a hard disk drive is deleted when the disk is
formatted. It is not possible to select part of a partition
to delete.
Writing back data to P2 cards
This allows you to select a clip from the hard disk drive and
write it back to a P2 card.
Writing to hard disk drive
ꢁ
1
SwitchꢁtoꢁtheꢁUSBꢁhostꢁmode.
For details, refer to [Switching to USB Host Mode]
(page 140).
ꢁ
SwitchꢁtoꢁtheꢁUSBꢁhostꢁmode.
1
2
For details, refer to [Switching to USB Host Mode]
(page 140).
ꢁ
ConnectꢁaꢁhardꢁdiskꢁdriveꢁviaꢁUSB.ꢁ
2
3
ꢁ
ConnectꢁaꢁhardꢁdiskꢁdriveꢁviaꢁUSB.ꢁ
If the hard disk drive has not been formatted by
the camera, format it according to the instructions
provided in [Formatting Hard Disks] (page 142).
ꢁ
InsertꢁtheꢁPꢀꢁcardꢁtoꢁwhichꢁdataꢁwillꢁbeꢁwrittenꢁ
backꢁto.ꢁ
ꢁ
4
PressꢁtheꢁTHUMBNAILꢁbutton,ꢁselectꢁHDDꢁꢁ
EXPLOREꢁfromꢁtheꢁthumbnailꢁmenu,ꢁmoveꢁtoꢁ
theꢁpartitionꢁwithꢁtheꢁdataꢁthatꢁwillꢁbeꢁreadꢁandꢁ
pressꢁtheꢁSETꢁbutton.ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
InsertꢁaꢁPꢀꢁcard.
3
PressꢁtheꢁTHUMBNAILꢁbuttonꢁtoꢁopenꢁtheꢁ
thumbnailꢁscreen.ꢁ
4
ꢁ
SelectꢁtheꢁclipꢁtoꢁbeꢁwrittenꢁtoꢁtheꢁPꢀꢁcardꢁfromꢁ
theꢁthumbnailꢁonꢁtheꢁhardꢁdiskꢁdrive.ꢁ
5
6
ꢁ
PressꢁtheꢁTHUMBNAILꢁbuttonꢁandꢁselectꢁHDDꢁ
ꢁEXPORTꢁfromꢁtheꢁthumbnailꢁmenuꢁandꢁ
specifyꢁtheꢁslotꢁofꢁtheꢁPꢀꢁcardꢁwithꢁtheꢁdataꢁyouꢁ
wantꢁtoꢁwriteꢁtoꢁtheꢁhardꢁdiskꢁdrive.ꢁ
5
6
ꢁ
PressꢁtheꢁTHUMBNAILꢁbutton,ꢁselectꢁ
OPERATIONꢁꢁIMPORTꢁꢁSELECTEDꢁCLIPSꢁ
fromꢁtheꢁthumbnailꢁmenuꢁandꢁselectꢁtheꢁslotꢁofꢁ
theꢁPꢀꢁcardꢁtoꢁwriteꢁtheꢁdataꢁto.ꢁ
ꢁ
SelectꢁYES.ꢁ
• This starts the write process.
• A progress bar appears during the write process.
To interrupt writing, press the SET button.
Selecting YES in the cancel confirmation that
appears will stop the write process.
• COPY COMPLETED! announces the end of the
write process.
ꢁ
7
SelectꢁYES.ꢁ
• This starts the data write to the P2 card.
• When the write process ends, “COPY
COMPLETED!” appears.
NOTE
NOTE
• To turn off the verify phase in a write operation, select
HDD SETUP in the thumbnail menu and set VERIFY
to OFF. This speeds up the write time but does not
verify the written data.
• When clips are selected for writing, verify is not performed.
• Selecting ALL SLOT writes the data on all inserted P2
cards inserted in the camera to the hard disk drive.
1ꢃꢂ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A TYPE S and P2 STORE hard disk drive allows you to write
back data in card units.
Hard disk drive precautions
• Use hard disk drives (including P2 STORE (AJ-
PCS060G)) according to the following conditions.
- Operate hard disk drives within their operating
specifications (temperature, etc.).
- Do not use hard disk drives in locations that are
unstable or exposed to vibration.
Format the P2 card to prepare for write back.
ꢁ
1
SwitchꢁtoꢁtheꢁUSBꢁhostꢁmode.
For details, refer to [Switching to USB Host Mode]
(page 140).
• Some hard disk drives may not operate normally.
• SATA (serial ATA) or PATA (parallel ATA) interface hard
disk drives connected using a USB conversion cable may
not be recognized.
• Use hard disk drives with plenty of capacity for copying
data.
• During formatting and copying, do not disconnect cables
or remove a P2 card that is involved in these activities
and do not power off this camera and the hard disk drive,
as the camera and hard disk drive will otherwise have to
be rebooted.
• A hard disk drive is a precision instrument whose
read and write functions may fail in some operating
environments.
ꢁ
ꢁConnectꢁaꢁhardꢁdiskꢁdriveꢁviaꢁUSB.ꢁ
2
3
ꢁ
InsertꢁtheꢁPꢀꢁcardꢁtoꢁwhichꢁdataꢁwillꢁbeꢁwrittenꢁ
backꢁto.ꢁ
ꢁ
4
PressꢁtheꢁTHUMBNAILꢁbutton,ꢁselectꢁHDDꢁꢁ
EXPLOREꢁfromꢁtheꢁthumbnailꢁmenu,ꢁmoveꢁtoꢁ
theꢁpartitionꢁwithꢁtheꢁdataꢁthatꢁwillꢁbeꢁwrittenꢁ
andꢁpressꢁtheꢁSETꢁbutton.ꢁ
• Please note that Panasonic accepts no liability
whatsoever for data loss or other losses either direct or
indirect arising from hard disk damage or other defects.
• When data from this camera is copied to a hard disk and
is edited on another computer, the data may no longer
work in this unit and the hard disk data may become
corrupted.
• Use of the drive mount converter distributed by the below
URL allows you to mount specific folders when a hard
disk drive is connected.
ꢁ
SelectꢁOPERATIONꢁꢁIMPORTꢁꢁALLꢁfromꢁ
theꢁthumbnailꢁmenuꢁandꢁselectꢁaꢁslotꢁwithꢁanꢁ
emptyꢁPꢀꢁcardꢁforꢁwritingꢁto.ꢁ
5
6
ꢁ
SelectꢁYES.ꢁ
• This starts the write process to the card.
• COPY COMPLETED! announces the end of the write
back process.
https://eww.pavc.panasonic.co.jp/pro-av/
NOTE
• It is not possible to import data by the partition between P2
cards with different model numbers. Import data in clip units
from cards with a different model number.
• To turn off the verify phase in a write back operation, select
HDD SETUP in the thumbnail menu and set VERIFY to OFF.
This speeds up the write back time but does not verify the
written data.
• When a clip is written back to a P2 card it was not originally
on may make that clip an incomplete clip. Should this happen,
reconnect it.
Refer to [Reconnection of Incomplete Clips] (page 109).
1ꢃꢃ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections to the DVCPRO/DV Connector
Time Code and User Bits
• When input from the IEEE1394 interface is selected,
the time code or user bits input to the TC IN connector
cannot be recorded on a P2 card.
Recording signals input to the
DVCPRO/DV connector
• When input from the IEEE1394 interface is selected,
time code output from the TC OUT connector is not
synchronized to the video signal output from the VIDEO
OUT connector.
ꢁ
Connectꢁaꢁ1ꢂꢈꢃꢁcableꢁ(DVꢁcable).
1
2
For details, see [Precautions in 1394 Connections]
(page 146).
• Make sure that the signal format of the camera
and the connected device is the same.
Subcode area time codes and user bits
• When input from the IEEE1394 interface is selected and
the TCG switch is set to F-RUN, the time code of the
subcode area input from the DVCPRO/DV connector can
be recorded on the P2 card.
• To record user bits input from the DVCPRO/DV connector
on a P2 card, set the menu option UB MODE in
RECORDING SETUP to EXT.
ꢁ
ToꢁrouteꢁinputsꢁviaꢁtheꢁIEEE1ꢂꢈꢃꢁinterface,ꢁsetꢁ
theꢁmenuꢁoptionꢁRECꢁSIGNALꢁinꢁtheꢁSYSTEMꢁ
SETUPꢁscreenꢁtoꢁ1ꢂꢈꢃ.ꢁꢁ
• To use HD (1080i, 720P) set the menu option
REC FORMAT in the SYSTEM SETUP screen to
DVCPRO HD/60i or DVCPRO HD/60P.
The AVC-Intra format and DVCPRO HD native
recording do not allow input via the IEEE1394
interface.
VAUX area time codes and user bits
When input from the IEEE1394 interface is selected,
time code and user bits of the VAUX area input from
the DVCPRO/DV connector is recorded on a P2 card
regardless of camera menu settings and switch positions.
NOTE
• Signals that have the same format as that set in the menu
options SYSTEM MODE and REC FORMAT in the SYSTEM
SETUP screen should be input to the IEEE1394 interface. A
signal in a different format will not be correctly recorded on
a P2 card. Video and audio recording and EE type video and
audio of signal inputs other than 1x speed playback signals
may not work.
For details, see [Warning and Error Display for Thumbnail
Operation and USB HOST MODE] (page 153).
• Audio signal inputs are input signals from the DVCPRO/DV
connector.
Recording UMID (Unique Material
Identifier) data
When input from the IEEE1394 interface is selected, UMID
data input via the DVCPRO/DV connector is recorded on
a P2 card. When no UMID data is available, the camera
generates and records such data.
UMID data is not recorded when the camera is operating in
the DV mode.
• 32 kHz/4CH (12 bit) audio signals input via the IEEE1394
interface are recorded as 48 kHz/4CH (16 bit) on a P2 card.
• It is not possible to use the GENLOCK IN connector to
synchronize to an external reference signal.
• Signals output from the VIDEO OUT or AUDIO OUT
connectors differ from actual input signals. Use such signals
for monitoring.
• The following functions do not operate.
• Pre-recording function
• Loop recording function
• Interval recording and one-shot recording function
1ꢃꢄ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Control of external devices through
1394 connection
ꢅ-pinꢁtype
Connecting an external device for backup recording to the
DVCPRO/DV connector allows the operator to control start
and stop recording from the camera.
ꢃ-pinꢁtype
• AV signals may be disrupted when connected devices
are turned on and off or when the interface cable is
connected or disconnected.
• It may take the system a few seconds to stabilize
after switching input signals or changing modes. Start
recording after the system has stabilized.
• The AUDIO LEVEL control does not work in recordings
that involve IEEE1394 interface input or output signals.
• Observe the following precautions when controlling a
P2 memory card camera-recorder using PC application
software (editing software).
• Recording cannot be inserted to a portion within a clip.
It can only be appended to the end of the newest clip.
• Do not open the thumbnail screen during application
software operation as this may prevent normal software
operation.
• Unprocessed video and audio signals are output via
the IEEE1394 interface during special playback. When
monitored on another device, these video and audio
signals may sound different than when played back on
this unit.
• A DV or DVCPRO output format makes it possible to
select audio channel CH1/CH2 or CH3/CH4 output from
the IEEE1394 interface in the menu option 1394 AUDIO
OUT in the AUDIO SETUP screen.
ꢁ
Connectꢁaꢁ1ꢂꢈꢃꢁcableꢁ(DVꢁcable).ꢁ
1
2
For details, see [Precautions in 1394 Connections]
(this page).
• Set 1394 CONTROL in the setting menu OTHER
FUNCTIONS screen to BOTH.
ꢁ
Useꢁtheꢁsettingꢁmenuꢁ1ꢂꢈꢃꢁCMDꢁSELꢁ(OTHERꢁ
FUNCTIONS)ꢁtoꢁselectꢁtheꢁcommandꢁforꢁ
terminatingꢁrecordingꢁthatꢁexternalꢁdevicesꢁ
receive.
For details on menu operation, refer to [Using the
menus] (page 120).
NOTE
• When the camera is set to REC RUN to perform backup
recording on a connected external device, the advance of
time code from the DVCPRO/DV connector will stop when
all P2 cards have been fully recorded regardless of whether
backup recording continues.
• It may not be possible for an external device to back
up recording when quick transitions are made between
recording and stopping.
• When the AVC-Intra format or DVCPRO HD native recording
format is selected, control of an external device via a 1394
connection is not possible.
• Interval recording, one-shot recording and loop recording do
not allow control of an external device via 1394.
Precautions in 1394 Connections
• The camera does not supply power via the cable.
• Observe the following in connections using a 1394 cable.
• Connect this unit to only one other device.
• Do not expose the DVCPRO/DV connector to excessive
force when connecting a 1394 cable to avoid
damaging the connector.
• If an error (1394 INITIAL ERROR) should occur when
making a connection, reinsert the 1394 cable or turn
the camera off and then turn it back on again.
• Make sure that the camera and all connected devices
are connected to ground (or connected to a common
ground). If the equipment cannot be connected
to ground, turn off all connected devices before
connecting or disconnecting an IEEE1394 cable.
• When connecting the unit to a device with a 4-pin
connector, connect the cable to the 6-pin connector on
the camera first.
• Be sure to properly connect the 1394 cable to the
DVCPRO/DV connector on a computer with a 6-pin
connector. Note that inserting the plug the wrong way
round may damage the connector.
1ꢃꢅ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 Maintenance and Inspections
Inspections Before Shooting
Make sure you check that the system is operating normally
before embarking on a shoot. We recommend using a
colour video monitor to check the image.
Inspecting the Camera Unit
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
Setꢁtheꢁzoomꢁtoꢁelectricꢁzoomꢁmodeꢁandꢁcheckꢁ
theꢁzoomꢁoperation.
1
2
3
Preparing for Inspections
• Check that the image changes to telephoto and
wide angle.
ꢁ
ꢁ
Mountꢁaꢁchargedꢁbattery.
1
Setꢁtheꢁzoomꢁtoꢁmanualꢁzoomꢁmodeꢁandꢁcheckꢁ
theꢁzoomꢁoperation.
TurnꢁtheꢁPOWERꢁswitchꢁtoꢁONꢁtoꢁcheckꢁtheꢁ
batteryꢁremainingꢁlevelꢁinꢁtheꢁviewfinder.ꢁ
2
• Turn the manual zoom lever to check that the
image changes to telephoto and wide angle.
• When battery capacity is low, replace it with a fully
charged battery.
1 9 9 9 min B 9 0%
D I ONC 1 6 0 U S E R - 1
C A C
Setꢁtheꢁirisꢁtoꢁautomaticꢁadjustmentꢁmodeꢁandꢁ
aimꢁtheꢁlensꢁatꢁobjectsꢁwithꢁdifferentꢁdegreesꢁ
ofꢁbrightness,ꢁtoꢁcheckꢁthatꢁtheꢁautomaticꢁirisꢁ
adjustmentꢁoperatesꢁnormally.
ꢁ
Setꢁtheꢁirisꢁtoꢁmanualꢁadjustmentꢁmodeꢁandꢁ
turnꢁtheꢁirisꢁring,ꢁtoꢁcheckꢁtheꢁmanualꢁirisꢁ
adjustment.
4
5
ꢁ
3
InsertꢁaꢁPꢀꢁcardꢁinꢁtheꢁcardꢁslotꢁandꢁcloseꢁtheꢁ
slotꢁcover.ꢁ
• Confirm that the P2 CARD ACCESS LED for the
inserted card slot lights up in orange. When P2
cards are installed in both card slots, the P2 CARD
ACCESS LED for the first inserted card (that was
first accessed) will light orange while the P2 CARD
ACCESS LED for a subsequently inserted card will
light green.
• If the access LED for the P2 card slot in which a
P2 card is inserted keeps blinking in green, or if
there is no display, recording is not possible on
that particular P2 card.
ꢁ
Returnꢁtheꢁirisꢁtoꢁautomaticꢁadjustmentꢁmodeꢁ
andꢁchangeꢁtheꢁGAINꢁswitchꢁsettingꢁtoꢁL,ꢁM,ꢁ
andꢁH,ꢁtoꢁcheckꢁtheꢁfollowingꢁitems:
• The iris is adjusted for objects with the same
brightness according to the switch setting.
• The gain value displayed on the viewfinder screen
changes according to the switch setting.
ꢁ
6
Whenꢁaꢁlensꢁwithꢁanꢁextenderꢁisꢁmounted,ꢁsetꢁ
theꢁextenderꢁtoꢁtheꢁoperatingꢁpositionꢁtoꢁcheckꢁ
thatꢁtheꢁextenderꢁoperatesꢁproperly.
1
2
1ꢃꢆ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Inspecting the Audio Level Automatic
Adjustment
Inspecting the Memory Recording
Functions
Make sure you successively carry out the inspections from
[Inspecting the P2 Card Recording] to [Inspecting the
Earphone and Speaker].
ꢁ
1
SetꢁtheꢁAUDIOꢁSELECTꢁCH1ꢁandꢁCHꢀꢁ
switchesꢁtoꢁ[AUTO].
Inspecting the P2 Card Recording
ꢁ
SetꢁtheꢁAUDIOꢁINꢁswitchꢁtoꢁ[FRONT].
2
3
ꢁ
Checkꢁonꢁtheꢁdisplayꢁinsideꢁtheꢁviewfinderꢁthatꢁ
theꢁremainingꢁPꢀꢁcardꢁrecordingꢁcapacityꢁisꢁ
sufficient.ꢁ
1
2
ꢁ
AimꢁtheꢁmicrophoneꢁconnectedꢁtoꢁtheꢁMICꢁINꢁ
jackꢁatꢁanꢁappropriateꢁsoundꢁsource.ꢁThen,ꢁ
checkꢁthatꢁtheꢁlevelꢁdisplaysꢁforꢁbothꢁCH1ꢁandꢁ
CHꢀꢁchangeꢁaccordingꢁtoꢁtheꢁsoundꢁlevel.
For details, refer to [Screen displays] (page 66).
ꢁ
Pressꢁtheꢁcamera’sꢁRECꢁbuttonꢁtoꢁcheckꢁtheꢁ
followingꢁitems:
Inspecting the Audio Level Manual
Adjustment
• The P2 access LED blinks in orange.
• The REC indication in the viewfinder lights.
• System warnings do not appear inside the
viewfinder.
ꢁ
SetꢁtheꢁAUDIOꢁINꢁswitchꢁtoꢁ[FRONT].
1
2
ꢁ
SetꢁtheꢁAUDIOꢁSELECTꢁCH1ꢁandꢁCHꢀꢁ
switchesꢁtoꢁ[MAN].
ꢁ
Pressꢁtheꢁcamera’sꢁRECꢁbuttonꢁagain.
3
4
5
• Check that the P2 access LED lights orange and
that REC indication in the viewfinder clears.
ꢁ
3
TurnꢁtheꢁAUDIOꢁLEVELꢁCH1ꢁandꢁCHꢀꢁcontrols.
• Check that the level display increases when the
controls are turned to the right.
ꢁ
UsingꢁtheꢁRECꢁbuttonꢁonꢁtheꢁhandle,ꢁrepeatꢁ
Stepsꢁꢀꢁtoꢁꢂꢁtoꢁcheckꢁtheꢁsameꢁoperation.
• Check the VTR button on the lens in the same way.
Inspecting the Earphone and Speaker
ꢁ
PressꢁtheꢁTHUMBNAILꢁbuttonꢁtoꢁswitchꢁ
theꢁthumbnailꢁscreenꢁtoꢁplayꢁbackꢁcurrentlyꢁ
recordedꢁclipꢁfromꢁthumbnail.ꢁ
ꢁ
TurnꢁtheꢁMONITORꢁcontrolꢁtoꢁcheckꢁthatꢁtheꢁ
speakerꢁvolumeꢁchanges.
1
2
• Check that playback is operating normally.
ꢁ
ConnectꢁanꢁearphoneꢁtoꢁtheꢁPHONESꢁjack.
ꢁ
6
UseꢁtheꢁUSERꢁbuttonꢁtoꢁwhichꢁtheꢁSLOTꢁSELꢁ
functionꢁhasꢁbeenꢁassignedꢁtoꢁselectꢁPꢀꢁcardsꢁ
forꢁrecordingꢁwhenꢁmoreꢁthanꢁoneꢁPꢀꢁcardꢁisꢁ
insertedꢁinꢁtheꢁcardꢁslots.ꢁ
• Check that the speaker is turned off and the
microphone sound can be heard from the
earphone.
• Repeat the operations in Steps 2 to 3 and 5
to check that recording and playback operate
properly.
ꢁ
3
TurnꢁtheꢁMONITORꢁcontrolꢁtoꢁcheckꢁthatꢁtheꢁ
earphoneꢁvolumeꢁchanges.
1ꢃꢇ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Inspection for Using an External
Microphone
Inspection of the clock, time code, and
user bits
ꢁ
ConnectꢁanꢁexternalꢁmicrophoneꢁtoꢁtheꢁREARꢁ1ꢁ
andꢁREARꢁꢀꢁconnectors.
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
Setꢁtheꢁuserꢁbitsꢁasꢁrequired.
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Please refer to [Setting user bits] (page 58) for the
setting procedures.
ꢁ
SetꢁtheꢁAUDIOꢁINꢁswitchꢁtoꢁ[REAR].
2
3
Setꢁtheꢁtimeꢁcode.
Please refer to [Setting the Time Code] (page 60) for
the setting procedures.
ꢁ
SetꢁtheꢁLINE/MIC/+ꢃꢇVꢁselectorꢁswitchesꢁonꢁ
theꢁrearꢁpanelꢁtoꢁ[MIC]ꢁorꢁ[+ꢃꢇV],ꢁdependingꢁ
onꢁtheꢁpowerꢁsupplyꢁtypeꢁofꢁtheꢁexternalꢁ
microphone.
SetꢁtheꢁTCGꢁswitchꢁtoꢁR-RUN.
• Press the COUNTER button to display the time
code on the LCD monitor or in the viewfinder.
• MIC: For a microphone with internal power supply.
• +48V: For a microphone with external power
supply.
PressꢁtheꢁRECꢁbutton.
• Check that the counter display number changes
as recording progresses.
ꢁ
4
Aimꢁtheꢁmicrophoneꢁatꢁtheꢁsoundꢁsourceꢁandꢁ
checkꢁthatꢁtheꢁsoundꢁlevelꢁindicationꢁinꢁtheꢁLCDꢁ
orꢁviewfinderꢁvariesꢁwithꢁchangesꢁinꢁsoundꢁ
intensity.
PressꢁtheꢁRECꢁbuttonꢁagain.
• Check that recording stops and the counter
display number stops changing.
• The channels can also be checked separately by
connecting a single microphone to each channel.
SetꢁtheꢁTCGꢁswitchꢁtoꢁF-RUN.
• Check that the counter display number changes
regardless of recording status.
HoldꢁdownꢁtheꢁDISP/MODEꢁCHKꢁbuttonꢁtoꢁ
checkꢁtheꢁdateꢁandꢁtimeꢁonꢁtheꢁLCDꢁmonitorꢁorꢁ
inꢁtheꢁviewfinder.ꢁ
• Adjust the date and time setting if the DATE, TIME
and time zone is not correctly displayed.
For details, see [Setting Date and Time of Internal
Clock] (page 26).
NOTE
Note that date and time data set for DATE,TIME, and
time zone is recorded in clips, and affects the playback
sequence, etc. at the time of thumbnail manipulations.
1ꢃꢈ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance
Eyepiece Care
Cleaning Inside the Viewfinder
Detach the eyepiece to remove dust from the LCD screen
When the outer lens is soiled
inside the viewfinder.
Remove surface dust using a soft brush or blower
brush before cleaning with a commercially available
lens cleaner (or lens cleaning paper).
For details, refer to [Detaching the eyepiece] (this page).
Use a soft brush or blower brush to remove dust from the
LCD screen.
When dust adheres to internal lenses or
NOTE
the interior of the eyepiece
Do not use thinner or other mineral solvents to remove dust or
soiling.
Detach the eyepiece to remove the dust.
Use a soft brush or blower brush to remove surface
dust.
Charging the internal battery
The internal battery preserves the date and time settings.
NOTE
Do not use thinner or other mineral solvents to remove dust or
soiling.
If the camera is left unused for half a year or longer, the
internal battery may become depleted and the
(battery
Outerꢁlens
icon) may appear in the viewfinder and on the LCD monitor.
Should this happen, connect an external DC power supply
or battery and let the power stay on for about four hours
to fully charge the internal battery. Then reset the time and
date.
Eyepiece
Eyepieceꢁlockꢁbutton
Replace the internal battery if
Consult your distributor.
appears after charging.
Detaching the eyepiece
Slide the eyepiece lock button and turn the eyepiece
clockwise.
Mounting the eyepiece
Line up the projection on the eyepiece lock button with the
mark on the viewfinder and slide in the eyepiece. Turn the
eyepiece counterclockwise until the lock knob clicks into
place.
NOTE
When outdoors, never carry or set up the camera with the
eyepiece facing up to prevent sunlight, which could damage
the camera, from entering.
1ꢄ0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Warning System
Warning Description Tables
If a problem is detected immediately after the power is turned on, or during operation, this will be indicated by the
WARNING lamp, lamps inside the viewfinder and a warning tone.
Warning description
Warning
type
LCD or viewfinder
indication
Warning
lamp
Alarm
tone*6
Priority
Tally lamp
and recording/playback Countermeasures
operation
Check the cause
SYSTEM ERROR
Blinks 4
times per
second
Blinks 4
times per
second
Continuous P2 microprocessor or control indication *1 and
1
System error Cause indication *1 Red
blinking
tone
failure. Operation stops.
consult your
distributor.
A P2 card was removed
during access and card data
was corrupted.
Both access LEDs light
orange.
Turn off the power.
Repair the P2 card if
the clips on the card
are corrupted.
Incorrect
Blinks 4
times per
second
Blinks 4
times per
second
TURN POWER OFF
P2 card
Continuous
tone
2
3
4
Blinks red
removal
LOW BATTERY Red
blinking, and the battery
level bar blinks with
the empty status. (This
The battery is exhausted.
Recording and playback
stop. The camera stops
automatically when the
voltage drops.
The
battery is
Blinks 1 time
per second
Continuous
tone
Lights
Replace the battery.
exhauseted indication appears also
when MENU indications
have been turned OFF.)
Blinks 4
times per
second after completing
completion recording
of recording.
Continuous
tone after
completing
recording
P2
FULL
Lights after
No more space on P2
cards left for recording.Stop
recording.*3
Delete clips that are
no longer needed or
insert a new card.
P2 card fully
Blinks red (appears only for
recorded
3 seconds in MCR mode.)
Turn the power off
and then back on
again and check
recording and
playback. Replace
any P2 card that
does not enable
normal recording.
Intermittent A recording error has
REC WARNING
Blinks 4
times per
second
Blinks 4
times per
second
Recording
error
tone 4
occurred. The error may
terminate recording or let it
continue. *4
5
Cause indication *2 Blinks
times per
second
red
An irregular reference
signal input to GENLOCK IN
prevents normal recording
Intermittent by pausing recording. The
Irregular
reference
signal
TEMPORARY PAUSE
IRREGULAR FRM SIG
Blinks red.
Blinks 4
times per
second
Blinks 4
times per
second
tone 4
recorded clip is divided.
• Recording resumes when
the signal returns to normal.
Recording does not resume
if interval, one-shot or loop
recording is in progress.
Check the
GENLOCK IN signal.
6
7
times per
second
Drop in
Blinks 4
times per
second
(Recording second
only)
Indicates poor reception
from the wireless receiver.
Recording continues but
wireless microphone cannot
be received.
reception
quality of
wireless
receiver
transmission
Check microphone
power supply and
receiver reception
status.
Blinks 4
times per
WIRELESS RF
Blinks red
No
(Continued on the next page)
1ꢄ1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(Continued from the previous page)
Warning description
and recording/playback Countermeasures
operation
Warning
type
LCD or viewfinder
indication
Warning
lamp
Alarm
tone*6
Priority
Tally lamp
Check the camera
and device
The DVCPRO/DV cable
connections,
1394
connection
error
Blinks 4
times per
second
Blinks 4
times per
second
1394 INITIAL ERROR Blinks
red
has become disconnected
reconnect them if
8
No
or multiple devices are
necessary, then turn
connected.
the power off and
back on again.
The last bar in the battery
level indication blinks (This
indication appears also
when MENU indications
have been turned OFF.)
Battery
nearly empty
Blinks 1 time Blinks 1 time
per second per second
The battery is near depletion. Replace the battery
9
No
No
Operation continues.*5
as necessary.
Less than 2 minutes is left on
the P2 cards (level indicator
shows 1 minute or less). This
warning appears only during
recording.
Blinks 1 time Blinks 1 time
P2 card
10 nearly fully
recorded
The P2CARD level indicator per second per second
blinks.
Replace or insert
additional P2 cards.
during
during
recording.
recording.
*1 P2 SYSTEM ERROR cause indication
• P2 MICON ERROR: The P2 microprocessor does not respond.
• P2 CONTROL ERROR: A P2 recording control error has occurred.
• CAM MICON ERROR: The camera microprocessor does not respond.
*2 REC WARNING cause indication
• CARD ERROR*: P2CARD error (* indicates the number of the slot of the card with the error.) Stops recording.
• REC RAM OVERFLOW: Overflow of recording RAM. Stops recording.
• PULL DOWN ERROR: 24P, 30P video pulldown error. Recording continues.
• ERROR: Other recording errors (When an attempt is made to record 1000 or more clips on one P2 card.)
*3 Perform either of the following procedures to cancel this warning.
• Press a playback control button.
• Press the THUMBNAIL button.
• Remove the P2 card and insert another card.
*4 Perform either of the following procedures to cancel this warning.
• Press the REC button.
• Press a playback control button.
• Press the THUMBNAIL button.
• Remove all cards.
*5 When NEAR END CANCEL is set to ON, you can press the DISP/MODE CHK button to cancel the alarm.
*6 When the alarm sounds, audio is not output to the camera speakers or earphones. The DISP/MODE CHK button cancels
only the alarm tone when pressed during an alarm.
1ꢄꢀ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Warning and Error Display for Thumbnail Operation and USB HOST MODE
Item
Message
Description
Data cannot be accessed because it is
corrupted or for other reasons.
Any thumbnails that cannot be produced
on the AVC-Intra 100 or AVC-Intra 50 and
displayed in gray cannot be changed at the
text memo position.
Measure
Restore media and clips to normal state
before access.
CANNOT ACCESS!
CANNOT CHANGE!
Set SYSTEM MODE according to the clips.
CANNOT COPY!
Images cannot be copied.
P2 card contains contents version
mismatches or bad clips.
Check the conditions for copying.
Match devices and contents versions, and
repair bad clips.
CANNOT DELETE !
CANNOT FORMAT!
CANNOT
RECONNECT!
P2 card problem prevents formatting.
A clip that does not span multiple P2 cards
cannot be reconnected.
Data cannot be repaired since content that
cannot be repaired is selected.
Some of the selected clip could not be
repaired.
Check P2 card.
Check selected content.
Check selected content.
—
CANNOT REPAIR!
CANNOT REPAIR IN
SELECTION!
CARD FULL!
The P2 or SD card is full.
Entered data was invalid.
There is not enough recording capacity left
on the card.
Insert media with sufficient capacity.
Enter data in a valid range.
Insert a card with sufficient recording
capacity.
INVALID VALUE!
LACK OF REC
CAPACITY!
Insert all P2 cards with recorded clips,
A shot mark will be added to the clips
recorded on multiple P2 cards when all P2
cards are not inserted yet.
!
and confirm that the
incomplete clip
Thumbnails
MISSING CLIP!
indicators disappear, and then add shot
marks.
NO CARD!
NO COPY TO SAME
CARD!
NO FILE!
NO SD CARD!
No P2 or SD card is inserted.
A clip cannot be copied to the card storing
the original clip.
The designated file is not found.
No SD card is inserted.
Insert compatible media.
Copy the selected clip to a card that does
not contain the original clip.
Check the file.
Insert an SD card.
The clip cannot be copied because a clip
that has already been copied and the original either the source clip or the destination
clip have been selected.
Too many clips are selected.
P2 card contains contents version
Confirm the selected clip and release
SAME CLIP IS
SELECTED!
clip and then execute the copy operation.
Reduce the number of selected clips.
Match devices and contents versions, and
repair bad clips.
TOO MANY CLIPS!
UNKNOWN
CONTENTS FORMAT! mismatches or corrupted content.
Use UTF-8 for the metadata character
code. Use the viewer to enter correct
characters.
UNKNOWN DATA!
The metadata character code is invalid.
The user clip name plus the counter
value can only contain up to 100
bytes. Characters in the clip name are
automatically deleted when the total
exceeds 100bytes.
USER CLIP NAME
MODIFIED!
Characters in the clip name had to be
deleted in adding the counter value.
WRITE PROTECTED!
CANNOT CHANGE!
The P2 or SD card is write protected.
[PERSON] will be entered while the text
memo is not available.
Insert write-enabled media.
Enter [TEXT] before entering [PERSON].
Soft
keyboard CANNOT SET! INVALID
VALUE!
The entered value is incorrect.
Change the value.
(Continued on the next page)
1ꢄꢂ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(Continued from the previous page)
Item
Message
CANNOT ACCESS
CARD!
Description
Measure
An error occurred during P2 card access.
Check P2 card.
CANNOT ACCESS
TARGET!
CANNOT FORMAT!
CANNOT RECOGNIZE The destination target cannot be properly
HDD!
An error occurred during hard disk access.
The hard disk cannot be initialized.
Check hard disk status and connection.
Connect another hard disk drive.
Reboot the hard disk or connect a different
hard disk.
recognized.
CARD IS EMPTY!
CANNOT COPY!
Copying is not performed since the card
is empty.
The P2 selected for copying is empty.
There is not enough space on the
connected hard disk. Use a new hard disk
or formatted hard disk.
Reconnect the USB cable. If the hard disk
does not operate normally, turn it off and
turn it back on again.
HDD CAPACITY FULL! Not enough space left on the hard disk.
HDD DISCONNECTED! The unit is not connected to a hard disk.
HDD
(USB
HOST
MODE)
MISMATCH
COMPONENT!
P2 CARD IS
Copying cannot be made because the
destination card is in the wrong format.
Use a P2 card with the same model
number or import video in clip units.
The P2 card is not formatted.
Use a formatted P2 card.
UNFORMATTED!
This warning indicates that data could not
be imported from a hard disk to a P2 card
because the P2 card contained recorded
data.
You cannot copy to a P2 card that
contains data. Format the card on a P2
device and copy again.
PLEASE FORMAT P2
CARD!
Hard disks can handle up to 23 partitions.
Use a new hard disk or formatted hard
disk.
TOO MANY
PARTITIONS!
There are too many partitions.
Disconnect devices, turn off the unit and
turn it back on again.
Disconnect devices, turn off the unit and
turn it back on again.
TOO MANY TARGETS! Multiple devices are connected.
UNKNOWN DEVICE
The connected DVD drive is not compatible.
CONNECTED!
VERIFICATION FAILED! The compare check after copying failed.
Copy the data again.
1ꢄꢃ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Updating the firmware incorporated into the unit
The firmware can be updated using either of the following two methods.
1
Checking the current version of firmware and performing the update using the dedicated tool (P2_Status_
Logger)
PASS (P2 Asset Support System) is only available to customers who have completed customer registration with
Panasonic.
Log in to PASS and use the dedicated tool (P2_Status_Logger) to check the version information of the firmware on the
unit and download links to pages containing the necessary firmware.For further information about downloading and
using P2_Status_Logger, log in to PASS and refer to the relevant pages.Besides access to PASS, completing customer
registration has a number of other benefits. For further details, refer to the PASS (P2 Asset Support System) website
(https://eww.pavc.panasonic.co.jp/pro-av/).
2
Checking the current version of the firmware using the unit and performing the update
Check firmware version of the camera in the DIAGNOSTIC screen. Then access the site listed in the NOTE below to
check the most recent firmware information and download any firmware you require.
NOTE
• The update is completed by loading the downloaded file onto the unit via an SD memory card. For further details about the
updating methods, refer to the following website.
https://eww.pavc.panasonic.co.jp/pro-av/
• Be sure to use a compatible SD memory card.The unit is compatible with SD memory cards based on the SD and SDHC
standards. Also, be sure to format the memory card using the unit before use.
1ꢄꢄ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10 Index
Connector signal ............................................. 164
Control of external devices.............................. 146
Copying........................................................... 109
Counter.............................................................. 64
cue up ............................................................... 42
1
MENU 1394 AUDIO OUT............................................ 131
MENU 1394 CMD SEL................................................ 137
MENU 1394 CONFIG.................................................. 138
1394 connection.............................................. 146
MENU 1394 CONTROL .............................................. 137
MENU 1394 STATUS................................................... 138
D
Date and Time................................................... 26
MENU DATE/TIME....................................................... 133
DC power .......................................................... 88
Deleting ........................................................... 108
MENU DETAIL CORING.............................................. 124
MENU DETAIL LEVEL ................................................. 124
MENU DIAGNOSTIC screen....................................... 138
Dimensions...................................................... 160
MENU DIONIC160 NEAR ........................................... 134
MENU DIONIC90 NEAR ............................................. 134
Diopter Adjustment............................................ 78
MENU DISPLAY SETUP screen .................................. 132
MENU DOWNCON MODE.......................................... 132
MENU DRS EFFECT ................................................... 125
DVCPRO/DV Connector .................................. 145
Dynamic Range Stretcher ............................. 9, 53
2
MENU 25M REC CH .................................................. 131
A
MENU A.IRIS LEVEL................................................... 125
MENU ACCESS LED................................................... 137
MENU ALARM ............................................................ 137
MENU ASPECT CONV................................................ 127
MENU ATW ................................................................. 128
MENU ATW TYPE........................................................ 128
Audio Input........................................................ 54
Audio level meter magnification........................ 73
MENU AUDIO SETUP screen ..................................... 130
Auto Black Balance........................................... 49
MENU AUTO KNEE SW.............................................. 129
MENU AUTO LEVEL CH3........................................... 130
MENU AUTO LEVEL CH4........................................... 130
Auto tracking white balance.............................. 49
E
Electronic Shutter .............................................. 51
MENU ENDURA10 NEAR ........................................... 135
MENU ENDURA7 NEAR ............................................. 135
MENU ENDURA-D NEAR............................................ 135
errors .......................................................... 69,153
B
MENU BATTERY MODE.............................................. 134
MENU BATTERY SELECT ........................................... 134
MENU BATTERY SETUP screen ................................. 134
battery
MENU EVF B.LIGHT ................................................... 133
MENU EVF COLOR..................................................... 133
MENU EVF PEAK FREQ.............................................. 132
MENU EVF PEAK LEVEL ............................................ 132
MENU EVF SETTING .................................................. 133
MENU EXT DC IN SEL................................................ 134
external DC power............................................. 88
Setting.......................................................... 86
Mounting...................................................... 86
Black Balance ................................................... 48
MENU BP-GL65/95 NEAR .......................................... 135
external power................................................... 88
C
F
MENU CAC................................................................. 136
MENU CAC CARD READ ........................................... 136
MENU CAC FILE DELETE........................................... 136
MENU CAC FILE INIT ................................................. 136
MENU CAC PROPERTY.............................................. 136
MENU CAMERA MODE.............................................. 127
MENU CARD FUNCTION screen................................ 136
MENU CARD/BATT ..................................................... 133
Center marker.................................................... 73
MENU F.MIC LEVEL.................................................... 131
MENU F.MIC POWER.................................................. 131
Fast-forward playback....................................... 42
Fast-reverse playback....................................... 42
FBC.................................................................... 52
firmware........................................................... 155
Flange Back ...................................................... 90
Flash Band Compensation................................ 52
Focus assist....................................................... 75
MENU FOCUS BAR .................................................... 133
Formatting
MENU CHROMA LEVEL ............................................. 124
MENU CHROMA PHASE ............................................ 124
Chromatic Aberration Compensation (CAC)..... 92
P2 Card...................................................... 114
SD memory card.................................. 81, 115
Hard Disks ................................................. 142
MENU FRAME RATE................................................... 124
FRONT AUDIO LEVEL Control .......................... 55
FRONT AUDIO LEVEL Control Knob................. 98
Front Microphone .............................................. 95
MENU FRONT VR CH1............................................... 130
MENU FRONT VR CH2............................................... 130
cine-like gamma................................................ 36
clip................................................................... 101
MENU CLOCK SETTING ............................................ 137
MENU COLOR TEMP Ach .......................................... 124
MENU COLOR TEMP Bch .......................................... 124
1ꢄꢅ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Microphone........................................................ 95
MENU MID GAIN ........................................................ 128
MODE CHECK................................................... 72
MENU MODEL NAME................................................. 138
MENU MONITOR SELECT.......................................... 131
G
MENU GAMMA........................................................... 125
GENLOCK ......................................................... 64
MENU GL PHASE ....................................................... 137
H
N
MENU H PHASE ......................................................... 137
MENU HEADROOM.................................................... 131
MENU HIGH GAIN...................................................... 128
Hot Swap Recording ......................................... 40
MENU NAME EDIT...................................................... 126
Native recording................................................ 34
Native VFR Recording ....................................... 35
MENU NEAR END CANCEL ....................................... 135
MENU NiCd14 END.................................................... 135
MENU NiCd14 NEAR.................................................. 135
Normal Recording ............................................. 33
Normal speed playback.................................... 42
MENU NP-L7 NEAR.................................................... 134
MENU HYTRON140 NEAR ......................................... 134
MENU HYTRON50 NEAR ........................................... 134
I
internal battery................................................. 150
Internal Clock .................................................... 26
Interval recording .............................................. 39
MENU INTERVAL TIME ............................................ 129
MENU IRIS ADJUST ................................................... 136
O
MENU ONE SHOT TIME ............................................. 129
One-shot recording (ONE SHOT REC).............. 39
MENU OPERATION..................................................... 138
MENU OPTION MENU screen.................................... 138
MENU OTHER DISPLAY ............................................. 134
MENU OTHER FUNCTIONS screen ........................... 137
MENU OUTPUT SEL screen ....................................... 132
overcranking effects.......................................... 37
K
MENU KNEE ............................................................... 125
L
LCD ................................................................. 120
MENU LCD BACKLIGHT ............................................ 133
LCD monitor ...................................................... 76
MENU LCD SETTING.................................................. 133
MENU LENS SETUP screen........................................ 136
Lens
P
P2 Cards
Inserting....................................................... 28
Writing back............................................... 143
Recording times........................................... 30
Status........................................................... 29
Status Display.............................................. 72
Removing..................................................... 28
Formatting.................................................. 114
Prevent Accidental Erasure ................... 28, 29
MENU P2CARD REMAIN............................................ 134
MENU PAG L95 NEAR................................................ 135
MENU PC MODE ........................................................ 127
MENU PC MODE SELECT.......................................... 127
playback............................................................ 42
Playing back.................................................... 104
MENU PREREC MODE............................................... 129
Pre-recording..................................................... 38
MENU PROPAC14 NEAR............................................ 134
Properties ........................................................ 116
PROXY....................................................... 40, 114
pull-down recording .......................................... 34
Mounting...................................................... 89
Adjusting...................................................... 89
MENU LEVEL METER ................................................. 133
MENU LIMITER CH1................................................... 130
MENU LIMITER CH2................................................... 130
MENU LOAD/SAVE/INIT.............................................. 124
Loop recording (LOOP REC)............................. 40
MENU LOW GAIN....................................................... 128
M
MENU MAIN MENU .................................................... 122
MENU MARKER.......................................................... 133
MENU MASTER PED .................................................. 125
MENU MATRIX............................................................ 125
MENU MENU BACK ................................................... 134
MENU MENU INIT....................................................... 137
menu
THUMBNAIL MENU................................... 102
menus ........................................................ 120
menus
R
MENU R.MIC CH1 LEVEL........................................... 131
MENU R.MIC CH2 LEVEL........................................... 131
MENU R.MIC POWER................................................. 131
Rain Cover......................................................... 98
Using.......................................................... 120
Initializing........................................... 120, 121
Meta Data........................................................ 110
MENU MIC LOWCUT CH1.......................................... 130
MENU MIC LOWCUT CH2.......................................... 130
MENU MIC LOWCUT CH3.......................................... 130
MENU MIC LOWCUT CH4.......................................... 130
MENU REC COUNTER ............................................... 134
MENU REC FORMAT .................................................. 126
1ꢄꢆ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MENU REC FUNCTION .............................................. 129
REC REVIEW Function ...................................... 40
MENU REC SIGNAL ................................................... 126
Reconnection .................................................. 109
Recording formats............................................. 44
Recording functions .................................... 38, 44
Recording level.................................................. 54
MENU RECORDING SETUP screen ........................... 129
remote control.................................................. 100
Restoring ......................................................... 109
MENU RET SW............................................................ 128
T
MENU TC MODE ........................................................ 129
MENU TC OUT............................................................ 132
MENU TC VIDEO SYNCHRO...................................... 132
MENU TEST TONE...................................................... 131
Text Memo ........................................................ 41
THUMBNAIL.................................................... 101
Thumbnail
Switching ................................................... 105
Selecting.................................................... 104
Changing ................................................... 106
menu.......................................................... 101
S
Time Code......................................................... 60
Time Data .......................................................... 56
Time zone.......................................................... 26
MENU TIME ZONE...................................................... 137
MENU TRIMPAC14 NEAR........................................... 134
Tripod................................................................. 97
MENU TYPE A END .................................................... 135
MENU TYPE A FULL................................................... 135
MENU TYPE A NEAR.................................................. 135
MENU TYPE B END .................................................... 135
MENU TYPE B FULL................................................... 135
MENU TYPE B NEAR.................................................. 135
MENU SAFETY ZONE................................................. 133
Safety zone markers.......................................... 73
MENU SCAN REVERSE.............................................. 127
Scene File.......................................................... 82
MENU SCENE FILE..................................................... 136
Scene File Data ................................................. 82
MENU SCENE FILE screen......................................... 124
MENU SD CARD FORMAT.......................................... 136
SD memory cards
Insert............................................................ 81
Status Display............................................ 119
Formatting, Writing and Reading................. 81
Handling ...................................................... 81
Remove........................................................ 81
Format.................................................... 21, 81
U
MENU UB MODE........................................................ 129
undercranking effects........................................ 37
Updating.......................................................... 155
USB
device mode.............................................. 139
host mode.................................................. 140
User bits ............................................................ 56
USER buttons .................................................... 53
USER CLIP NAME ........................................... 112
MENU USER FILE............................................... 136, 137
MENU USER MAIN ..................................................... 128
MENU USER1 ............................................................. 128
MENU USER2 ............................................................. 128
MENU SDI EDH .......................................................... 132
MENU SDI METADATA................................................ 132
MENU SDI SELECT..................................................... 132
MENU SELF SHOOT................................................... 133
Self-portrait Shooting......................................... 77
MENU SERIAL NO...................................................... 138
MENU SETUP ............................................................. 127
MENU SHADING (USER)............................................ 136
MENU SHADING SELECT .......................................... 136
Shooting ............................................................ 33
Shot Marker (SHOT MARK)............................... 41
Shoulder Strap................................................... 97
Shutter Mode..................................................... 51
Shutter Speed.................................................... 51
MENU SKIN TONE DTL .............................................. 125
Specifications.................................................. 160
Standard VFR recording.................................... 35
MENU START DELAY.................................................. 129
MENU SW MODE screen............................................ 128
MENU SYNC SCAN DISP ........................................... 133
SYNCHRO SCAN............................................... 51
MENU SYNCHRO SCAN............................................. 124
MENU SYSTEM MODE ............................................... 126
MENU SYSTEM SETUP screen................................... 126
V
MENU V DETAIL FREQ ............................................... 126
MENU V DETAIL LEVEL.............................................. 124
Variable Frame Rate (VFR)................................ 35
Variable Speed Playback .................................. 42
MENU VERSION ......................................................... 138
MENU VFR.................................................................. 124
MENU VIDEO OUT CHAR .......................................... 132
MENU VIDEO OUT ZEBRA......................................... 132
Viewfinder
screen displays............................................ 66
Status Displays ............................................ 65
Setting up..................................................... 78
Adjusting...................................................... 78
1ꢄꢇ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
W
MENU W.BAL.PRESET................................................ 128
Warning System............................................... 151
warnings............................................................ 69
Waveform monitor function................................ 77
MENU WFM ................................................................ 128
White Balance ................................................... 48
White Shading Compensation........................... 91
wireless receiver................................................ 95
MENU WIRELESS TYPE.............................................. 131
MENU WIRELESS WARN............................................ 131
Z
Zebra pattern..................................................... 74
MENU ZEBRA1 DETECT ............................................ 133
MENU ZEBRA2........................................................... 133
MENU ZEBRA2 DETECT ............................................ 133
MENU ZOOM.............................................................. 133
1ꢄꢈ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11 Specifications
Dimensions and specifications
Dimensions
441 mm (17-3/8 inches)
251 mm
(9-7/8
inches)
150 mm (5-7/8 inches)
343 mm (3-1/2 inches)
246 mm
(9-11/16
inches)
Specifications
General
Power supply:
DC12 V (11 V to 17 V)
Power consumption:
18 W (with the supplied lens, 3.2 LCD monitor)
indicates safety information.
Ambient operating
temperature/humidity:
Storage temperature:
Weight:
0 °C to 40 °C (32 °F to 104 °F)/10% to 85% (relative humidity)
–20 °C to 60 °C (–4 °F to 140 °F)
Approx. 3.6 kg (7.93 lb) (camera unit only)
Approx 5.0 kg (11.02 lb) (Including lens and lens hood)
Dimensions:
(Camera only)
246 mm (width) × 251 mm (height) × 441 mm (depth)
9-11/16 inches (width) × 9-7/8 inches (height) × 17-3/8 inches (depth) (excluding protrusions)
246 mm (width) × 251 mm (height) × 549 mm (depth)
(With supplied lens)
9-11/16 inches (width) × 9-7/8 inches (height) × 21-5/8 inches (depth) (excluding protrusions)
1ꢅ0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Camera Unit
Pickup devices:
Lens mount:
1/3 inch progressive, 2.2 megapixel, 3MOS sensor
1/3 inch bayonet type
Color separation optical
system:
Prism system
ND filter:
Gain settings:
Shutter speed:
4 positions (CLEAR, 1/4ND, 1/16ND, 1/64ND)
–3/0/+3/+6/+9/+12/+24 dB
• 60i/60p mode: 1/60 (OFF), 1/100, 1/120, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000 sec.
• 30p mode: 1/30 (OFF), 1/60, 1/100, 1/120, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000 sec.
• 24p mode: 1/24 (OFF), 1/60, 1/100, 1/120, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000 sec.
• 60i/60p mode: 1/60.0 to 1/249.8
Shutter speed
(Synchro scan):
• 30p mode: 1/30.0 to 1/249.8
• 24p mode: 1/24.0 to 1/249.8
Shutter speed
(slow):
• 60i/60p mode: 1/15, 1/30
• 30p mode: 1/7.5, 1/15
• 24p mode: 1/6, 1/12
Shutter opening angle:
Frame rates:
Horizontal resolution:
3 degrees to 359.5 degrees in 0.5-degree increments
12/15/18/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/30/32/34/36/40/44/48/54/60 fps (frames per second)
1000 TV lines or more (center)
Memory card recorder Unit
Recording media:
P2 card
Recording Formats:
AVC-Intra 100/AVC-Intra 50/DVCPRO HD/DVCPRO50/DVCPRO/DV formats switchable
Recording/Playback Time: AVC-Intra 100/DVCPRO HD:
8 GB × 1 approx. 8 min
16 GB × 1 approx. 16 min
32 GB × 1 approx. 32 min
64 GB × 1 approx. 64 min
AVC-Intra 50/DVCPRO50:
8 GB × 1 approx. 16 min
16 GB × 1 approx. 32 min
32 GB × 1 approx. 64 min
64 GB × 1 approx. 128 min
DVCPRO/DV:
8 GB × 1 approx. 32 min
16 GB × 1 approx. 64 min
32 GB × 1 approx. 128 min
64 GB × 1 approx. 256 min
The times listed above can be continuously recorded as one clip. The number of recording
clips will reduce the above figures somewhat.
Recorded video signals:
1080/59.94i, 1080/29.97p, 1080/29.97pN, 1080/23.98p, 1080/23.98pA, 1080/23.98pN,
720/59.94p, 720/29.97p, 720/29.97pN, 720/23.98p, 720/23.98pN, 480/59.94i, 480/29.97p,
480/23.98p, 480/23.98pA
1ꢅ1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Digital video Unit
Sampling Frequency:
AVC-Intra 100/DVCPRO HD:
Y: 74.1758 MHz, PB/PR: 37.0879 MHz
DVCPRO50:
Y: 13.5 MHz, PB/PR: 6.75 MHz
DVCPRO:
Y: 13.5 MHz, PB/PR: 3.375 MHz
AVC-Intra 100/AVC-Intra 50: 10 bits
DVCPRO HD/DVCPRO50/DVCPRO/DV: 8 bits
AVC-Intra 100/AVC-Intra 50:
MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 Intra Profile
DVCPRO HD:
Quantizing:
Video Compression Format:
DV-Based Compression (SMPTE 370M)
DVCPRO50/DVCPRO:
DV-Based Compression (SMPTE 314M)
DV:
DV Compression (IEC 61834-2)
Digital audio Unit
Audio Recording Signal:
AVC-Intra 100/AVC-Intra 50/DVCPRO HD:
48 kHz/16 bits, 4CH
DVCPRO50:
48 kHz/16 bits, 4CH
DVCPRO/DV:
48 kHz/16 bits, 2CH/4CH switchable
Head room:
20 dB/18 dB Menu selectable
Video Input/Output Unit
GEN LOCK IN:
VIDEO OUT:
SDI OUT:
BNC × 1, 1.0 V [P-P], 75 Ω
BNC × 1, 1.0 V [P-P], 75 Ω
• BNC × 2, 0.8 V [P-P], 75 Ω
• HD: compliant with SMPTE 292M/296M/299M
• SD: compliant with SMPTE 259M-C/272M-A/ITU-R.BT656-4
Audio Input/Output Unit
MIC IN:
• XLR, 3-pin
• + 48 V (available)
• available menu selections: –40 dBu/–50 dBu/–60 dBu
AUDIO IN:
• XLR × 2, 3-pin (CH1, CH2)
• LINE/MIC / + 48 V (selectable)
• LINE: 0 dBu
• MIC: available menu selections: –50 dBu/–60 dBu
WIRELESS:
25-pin, D-SUB, –40 dBu
AUDIO OUT:
Earphone:
Pin jack × 2 (CH 1, CH 2), Output: 316 mV, 600 Ω
ø3.5 mm stereo mini jack × 1
Internal speaker:
28 mm diameter × 1
1ꢅꢀ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Other Input/Output Unit
TC IN:
TC OUT:
IEEE1394:
DC IN:
DC OUT:
BNC × 1, 0.5 V [P-P] to 8 V [P-P], 10 kΩ
BNC × 1, low impedance, 2.0 V 0.5 V [P-P]
6 pins, digital input/output (compliant with IEEE1394)
XLR × 1, 4 pins, DC 12 V (11.0 V to 17.0 V)
4 pins, DC 12 V (11.0 V to 17.0 V), Maximum rated current: 1.5 A
10 pins
REMOTE:
LENS:
12 pins
USB2.0 (DEVICE):
USB2.0 (HOST):
Type-B, 4 pin USB (compliant with USB ver. 2.0)
Type-A, 4 pin USB (compliant with USB ver. 2.0)
LCD Monitor Unit
LCD monitor:
3.2 inch color LCD monitor with approx. 921,000 dots (16:9)
0.45 inch color LCD monitor with approx. 1,226,000 dots (16:9)
Viewfinder Unit
LCD monitor:
P2HD 5 Year Warranty Repair Program*1
Thank you for purchasing this Panasonic P2HD device.
Register as a user for this device to receive a special service warranty up to five years of free warranty repairs.
Customers who register as users on the website will receive an extended warranty repair valid for up to
five years.
5
1st year
2nd year
3rd year
4th year
5th year
*
2
3
4
P2HD device
Basic warranty
Extended warranty repair
*
*
*
*1: Please note that this extended warranty is not available in some countries/regions. *2: Not all models eligible for extended
warranty coverage. *3: The basic warranty period may vary depending on the country/region. *4: Not all repair work is covered by
this extended warranty. *5: The maximum warranty period may be adjusted depending on the number of hours the device has been
used.
Free 5 years of Warranty Repairs
Make sure to save the “Registration Notice” e-mail
during the warranty period.
Purchase
P2 product
Register online
within 1 month
“Registration Notice”
e-mail sent
Details about user registration and the extended warranty: http://panasonic.biz/sav/pass_e
Please note, this is a site that is not maintained by Panasonic Canada Inc. The Panasonic Canada Inc. privacy policy does not apply and is not applicable in relation to any
information submitted. This link is provided to you for convenience.
1ꢅꢂ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connector signal description
DC IN
REMOTE
1
2
3
4
GND
NC
NC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
CAM DATA (H)
CAM DATA (C)
CAM CONT (H)
CAM CONT (C)
R/C ON
R/C VIDEO OUT
R/C VIDEO GND
NC
+12 V
Panasonic Part No. K1AA104H0038
Manufacturer Part No. HA16RX-4P (SW1) (76)
(Hirose Electric Co.)
9
10
UNREG +12 V (Max 0.6 A)
GND
Panasonic Part No. K1AY110JA001
Manufacturer Part No. HR10A-10R-10SC (71)
(Hirose Electric Co.)
4
1
2
3
8
1
7
6
2
3
10
9
NOTE
Be sure to use correct polarity when using external power
supplies.
4
5
FRONT MIC IN
1
2
3
GND
AUDIO IN (H)
AUDIO IN (C)
DC OUT
1
2
3
4
GND
R TALLY (open connector)
REC START SW
UNREG +12 V (Max 1.5 A)
Panasonic Part No. K1AY103A0001
Manufacturer Part No. HA16PRM-35G (72)
(Hirose Electric Co.)
Panasonic Part No. K1AY104J0001
Manufacturer Part No. HR10A-7R-4SC (73)
(Hirose Electric Co.)
PUSH
2
1
3
1
2
4
3
AUDIO IN
1
2
3
GND
AUDIO IN (H)
AUDIO IN (C)
Panasonic Part No. K1AY103A0001
Manufacturer Part No. HA16PRM-3SG (72)
(Hirose Electric Co.)
PUSH
2
1
3
1ꢅꢃ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LENS
Wireless receiver interface
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
RET-SW
REC
GND
1
ꢀ
CH-1ꢁSHIELD
GND
CH-1ꢁHOT
CH-1ꢁCOLD
GND
Audioꢁinputꢁfromꢁaꢁwirelessꢁ
receiver:ꢁCH1ꢁHOT
Audioꢁinputꢁfromꢁaꢁwirelessꢁ
receiver:ꢁCH1ꢁCOLD
ꢂ
IRIS-AUTO
IRIS-CONT
UNREG +12 V (Max 0.4 A)
IRIS-POSI
ꢃ
ꢄ
ꢅ
GND
UNREGꢁ+1ꢀꢁV Powerꢁsupplyꢁforꢁaꢁwirelessꢁreceiver
RXꢁON
Remoteꢁpowerꢁoutputꢁtoꢁaꢁwirelessꢁ
receiver.ꢁ
RFꢁwarningꢁinputꢁfromꢁaꢁwirelessꢁ
receiver
IRIS-G-MAX
EXT-POSI
ZOOM-POSI
FOCUS-POSI
SPARE
ꢆ
RFꢁWARN
10
11
12
ꢇ
ꢈ
10
11
1ꢀ
1ꢂ
RMꢄ
RMꢃ
SPAREꢁ1
SPAREꢁꢀ
EXTꢁCLK
CLKꢁSHIELD
Notꢁused
Notꢁused
Notꢁused
Notꢁused
Notꢁused
Notꢁused
GND
Panasonic Part No. K1AY112JA001
Manufacturer Part No. HR10A-10R-12SC (71)
(Hirose Electric Co.)
1ꢃ CH-ꢀꢁSHIELD
1ꢄ
9
1
CH-ꢀꢁHOT
Audioꢁinputꢁfromꢁaꢁwirelessꢁ
receiver:ꢁCHꢀꢁHOT
Audioꢁinputꢁfromꢁaꢁwirelessꢁ
receiver:ꢁCHꢀꢁCOLD
8
10
2
7
12 11
3
1ꢅ
CH-ꢀꢁCOLD
4
6
5
1ꢆ
1ꢇ
1ꢈ
ꢀ0
+ꢄ.ꢅꢁV
Powerꢁsupplyꢁforꢁaꢁwirelessꢁreceiver
VIDEOꢁOUT
VIDEOꢁRET
VIDEOꢁEN
Notꢁused
Notꢁused
Notꢁused
Notꢁused
Notꢁused
Notꢁused
Notꢁused
Notꢁused
ꢀ1 RM1ꢁ(RMꢁCLK)
ꢀꢀ RMꢀꢁ(RMꢁDATA)
ꢀꢂ RMꢂꢁ(RMꢁWR)
ꢀꢃ
ꢀꢄ
RMꢁ+ꢄꢁV
RMꢁGND
Panasonic Part No. K1GB25A00010
Manufacturer Part No. HDBB-25S (05)
(Hirose Electric Co.)
13
25
1
14
1ꢅꢄ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the
European Union
This symbol is only valid in the European Union. If you wish to discard this product, please
contact your local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|